JP2009201689A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of preventing impairment of randomness of generated random numbers and capable of effectively preventing an act of fraudulently extracting a random number for determination at the same time as of a determination value. <P>SOLUTION: A game controlling microcomputer updates a numeric value within a prescribed value range by software to create a random 1, and generates a numeric value for jackpot determination when a starting condition is satisfied. Then, the microcomputer determines whether the game state should be transferred to a jackpot game state or not by comparing the generated numeric value and a jackpot determining value. When the numeric value for jackpot determination is generated, a count value output from a counter circuit 511 is added to the random 1, and the added value is divided by the numeric value within the prescribed value range, and the remainder as the result of division is the numeric value for jackpot determination. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2009,JPO&INPIT

Description

  In the present invention, a predetermined game can be performed using a game medium. After the start condition is satisfied, the game state is changed to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the predetermined transition condition being satisfied. The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines to be transferred.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display device, the game state (game The state of the machine, more specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled) is configured to give a predetermined game value to the player.

  The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine is advantageous for a player who is easy to win and a right to become advantageous for a player. Or a condition where a condition for paying out a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started in the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be called a round.

  Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) are continuously stopped for a predetermined time, and are stopped, swung, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Game progress in the gaming machine is controlled by game control means such as a game control microcomputer. The game control means generates a pseudo-random number for determination (hereinafter referred to as a random number) by a counter whose value is updated by software when a predetermined condition (for example, a start condition by a start winning) is established, and the determination is made. Based on the value of the random number, it is determined whether or not the display result of variable display is a big hit symbol. In that case, the game control means determines whether or not the value of the random number for determination matches a determination value (for example, a jackpot determination value), thereby determining a predetermined transition condition (that is, a condition for shifting to the jackpot gaming state). Whether or not is satisfied is determined. When it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the game control means shifts the gaming state to the big hit gaming state after the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device.

  When a random number (software random number) is generated by software, generally, a count value for generating a random number changes periodically. Then, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act that establishes the predetermined condition at the timing when the value of the random number matches the predetermined determination value may be performed.

  There is a method of generating a random number for determination by adding a software random number value to a random number (hardware random number) value generated by a hardware counter (random number generation circuit) (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In the method described in Patent Document 1, the lower 16-bit count value of the 24-bit hardware counter (in effect, the count value of the 16-bit counter) and the count value of the counter by 16-bit software are used. A 14-bit random number for determination is generated by adding and masking the upper 2 bits of the 16 bits after the addition (set them to 0). Then, it is determined whether the 14-bit determination random number value matches the determination value existing in the range of 0 to 16383 represented by binary 14 bits.

  Judgment by adding software counter count value and hardware counter count value when generating random number only by software count value or when generating random number only by hardware counter count value By generating the random number for use, it becomes difficult for the player to perform an action of extracting the value of the random number for determination at the timing when the value of the random number for determination matches the determination value.

JP 2003-126333 A (paragraph 0031, FIG. 2)

  In Patent Document 1, in order to create a 14-bit numerical value from a 16-bit numerical value, the upper 2 bits of the 16 bits are set to 0. However, if 2 bits other than the upper 2 bits of the 16 bits are set to 0, There is a period in which the same numerical value appears continuously in the course of counting. That is, the randomness of the 14-bit random number value is hindered. Then, it may be easy to perform an act of extracting the random number value for determination at the timing when the random number value for determination matches the determination value.

  Therefore, the present invention does not reduce the randomness of the generated random number value when using the software counter count value and the hardware counter count value, and further matches the determination value. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can effectively prevent an act of extracting a random number value for determination at an unauthorized timing.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can play a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and after a start condition (for example, a winning to a start winning opening) is satisfied, a predetermined transition condition (For example, it is determined to be a big win and the big win symbol is derived and displayed on a special symbol display) A specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state: normal) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the game state A game machine that shifts to a state of winning a symbol, a probable change state, a short-time state, a state where the number of rounds of a big hit game is lottery, etc. A game control microcomputer (for example, a game control microcomputer 560 including the CPU 56) and a pulse signal supply circuit (for example, a pulse oscillator 513) that perform processing A counter circuit (for example, counter circuit 511) that increments the count value within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) and outputs the count value as the first numerical value by counting the pulse signal to be applied The game control microcomputer updates the numerical value within a predetermined numerical range by software and generates a second numerical value (for example, random 1) (for example, in the gaming control microcomputer 560, step S24). And a determination numerical value generating means for generating a determination numerical value when the start condition is satisfied (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, the processes of steps S402, S403, S415 to S418 are executed). Portion), the determination numerical value generated by the determination numerical value generating means and the predetermined numerical value. Specific game state determination means for determining whether or not to shift to the specific game state by comparing the value (for example, a part for executing the process of step S65 in the game control microcomputer 560), and for determination The numerical value generation means includes the first numerical value and the numerical value generation means output by the counter circuit when the determination numerical value generation condition is satisfied (for example, when the start condition is satisfied and MR1 should be stored in the storage area). Is added (step S416 in FIG. 53), and the added value is divided by the number of numerical values within a predetermined numerical range (step S417 in FIG. 53), and the remainder as a result of the division is obtained. A numerical value for determination is used (step S418 in FIG. 53).

  After any of a plurality of starting conditions (for example, winning in the first starting winning port 13 and winning in the second starting winning port 14) is satisfied, the gaming state is played based on the predetermined transition condition being satisfied. And a plurality of latch circuits (for example, a first latch circuit 514 and a second latch circuit 515) corresponding to each of a plurality of start conditions, and a start condition is established. And a plurality of latch signal output means (for example, a first start port switch 13a and a second start port switch 14a) for outputting a latch signal to the corresponding latch circuit. The computer may be configured to input the count value of the counter circuit via the latch circuit (see FIG. 3).

  A variable display means (for example, an effect display device 9) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can be identified based on the establishment of the variable display start condition is provided. When the display result of the identification information in the game becomes a predetermined specific display result, the gaming machine is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, and is a numerical value for determining the variable pattern type of the variable display of the identification information Is updated within a predetermined type determining numerical range, for example, a variation pattern type determining numerical value updating means (for example, a part for executing the processing of step S423 in the game control microcomputer 560), and a numerical value for determining the variation pattern are predetermined. Fluctuation pattern determining numerical value updating means (for example, the game control microcomputer 5) for updating within the numerical range for determining the fluctuation pattern of 0, a part for executing the processing of step S424) and a plurality of variation pattern types of identification information based on the extracted numerical values for extracting the variation pattern types according to the determination result by the specific gaming state determination means. Based on the variation pattern type determination means for determining one of the types (for example, the part that executes the processing of steps S101 and S102 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the extracted numerical value for determining the variation pattern. Thus, the variation pattern determining means for determining the variation pattern of the identification information from the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determining means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, steps S103, S104, For executing the processing of S105) It can have.

  The game control microcomputer stores a first numerical value storage means for storing the first numerical value output from the counter circuit as a stored numerical value (for example, an area for storing the stored value in the RAM 55 in the game control microcomputer 560), and a determination When the numerical value generation condition is satisfied, the first numerical value output from the counter circuit is compared with the stored numerical value stored in the first numerical value storing means to determine whether or not they match (for example, In the game control microcomputer 560, when it is determined that the numerical comparison means has coincided continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) and an abnormality notification means ( For example, in the production control microcomputer 110, the steps in the game control microcomputer 560 The first numerical value storing means uses the first numerical value output from the counter circuit as the stored numerical value when the determination numerical value generation condition is satisfied, according to the processing of 407. You may be comprised so that it may preserve | save (for example, process of step S409).

  The frequency of the pulse signal output from the pulse signal supply circuit is preferably different from the operating frequency of the game control microcomputer (for example, the oscillation frequency of the clock signal is 20 MHz, and the operating frequency of the CPU 56 is 15.872 MHz).

  The game control microcomputer has a built-in random number circuit (for example, random number circuit 506) for generating random numbers, and numerical value storage means for storing numerical values (for example, a counter (software counter) for generating random 2-2) , A counter for generating random 3 (software counter), a counter for generating random 4 (software counter)), and a random number value is read from a random number circuit, and an addition value is determined based on the read random number value Then, an adding means for adding the determined added value to the numerical value stored in the numerical value storing means (for example, a part for executing the processing of steps S421 to S424 in the game control microcomputer 560) and a predetermined effect mode determination When the condition is satisfied (for example, when determining the variation pattern), the numerical value storage means The memorized numerical value is read, and the read numerical value is compared with a predetermined determination value to thereby determine the effect mode determining means for the game machine (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, steps S95 to S100). Processing and a part for executing steps S101 to S105).

  A first starting port and a second starting port (for example, a first starting winning port 13 and a second starting winning port 14) in which game balls as game media can be won are provided, and a game to the first starting port as a starting condition is provided. First variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display 8a) for starting the variable display of the first identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the winning of the ball, and the second as the start condition Second variable display means (for example, a second special symbol display device 8b) for starting the variable display of the second identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the winning of the game ball at the start opening has been provided. A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state when a specific display result is derived and displayed on either the first variable display means or the second variable display means, and the microcomputer for game control includes the first variable display means Variable of first identification information by The display of the second identification information is executed by the second variable display means, and the execution of the variable display is controlled by a common processing routine (for example, the first special symbol is variably displayed). And when the second special symbol is variably displayed, the control may be executed by one special symbol process program.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, the determination numerical value generation means adds the first numerical value output from the counter circuit and the numerical value generated by the numerical value generation means when the determination numerical value generation condition is satisfied, and the added value is obtained. Since it is configured to divide by the number of numerical values within a predetermined numerical range and use the remainder resulting from the division as a numerical value for determination, the randomness of the generated random number value is not reduced, There is an effect that it is possible to prevent an act of illegally extracting a random number value for determination at a timing coincident with the determination value. In particular, even if an illegal act that does not change the count value output by the counter circuit is received, the value of the determination value is changed within a predetermined numerical range by the second numerical value created by the software. It is difficult to establish the start condition aiming at a timing that coincides with a predetermined determination value.

  According to the second aspect of the present invention, a plurality of latch circuits corresponding to each of a plurality of starting conditions and a plurality of latch signal outputs for outputting a latch signal to the corresponding latch circuit based on the establishment of the starting conditions And the game control microcomputer is configured to input the count value of the counter circuit via the latch circuit, so that a plurality of start conditions can be satisfied simultaneously without complicating the configuration. However, the acquisition timing of the count value is not delayed, and the game control microcomputer can acquire an accurate count value.

  According to the third aspect of the present invention, the variation pattern type of the identification information is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the extracted numerical value based on the determination result by the specific gaming state determination means. The variation pattern of the identification information is selected from the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determination unit based on the numerical value obtained by extracting and extracting the variation pattern determination numerical value. Since the change pattern determining means for determining is provided, it is possible to increase the types of change patterns while suppressing an increase in the program amount, and to enhance the effect in the game.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, the game control microcomputer has a first numerical value storage means for storing the first numerical value output from the counter circuit as a stored numerical value, and when the determination numerical value generation condition is satisfied, By comparing the output first numerical value with the stored numerical value stored in the first numerical value storing means to determine whether or not they match, it is determined that the numerical value comparing means and the numerical value comparing means have been continuously matched a predetermined number of times. The first numerical value storing means is configured to store the first numerical value output from the counter circuit as a stored numerical value when the determination numerical value generation condition is satisfied. Therefore, when an illegal act that does not change the count value output by the counter circuit is received, such an act can be detected, and the illegal act can be prevented more effectively. Can.

  In the fifth aspect of the invention, since the frequency of the pulse signal output from the pulse signal supply circuit is different from the operating frequency of the game control microcomputer, the first numerical value output from the counter circuit and the second generated by software In the configuration in which the determination numerical value is generated using the numerical value, the randomness of the determination numerical value can be prevented from being lowered. Even if the update period of the second numerical value created by the software is grasped by observing a signal (command or the like) output from the game control microcomputer to other control means or the like, Since it is different from the update cycle of one numerical value, the update cycle of the determination numerical value is not grasped, and it is difficult to establish the start condition aiming at the timing when the determination numerical value matches the predetermined determination value.

  In the invention according to claim 6, the game control microcomputer has a built-in random number circuit for generating a random number, a numerical value storing means for storing a numerical value, a random number value read from the random number circuit, and the read random number value The addition value is determined based on the addition value, and the addition value is added to the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage means, and stored in the numerical value storage means when a predetermined effect mode determination condition is satisfied. Since it is configured to include an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode in the gaming machine by reading the numerical value and comparing the read numerical value with a predetermined determination value, the type of the effect mode is determined at random. In this case, the amount of program can be reduced as compared with the case where random numbers are generated by software.

  According to the seventh aspect of the present invention, the game control microcomputer executes variable display of the first identification information by the first variable display means and variable display of the second identification information by the second variable display means. Since the execution of variable display is controlled by a common processing routine, the amount of program for controlling the progress of the game can be reduced.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The effect display device 9 performs variable display (variation) of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) as identification information. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer uses the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 along with the variable display. The effect display is executed, and when the second special symbol display 8b is executing variable display of the second special symbol, the effect display is executed by the effect display device in accordance with the variable display. Can be easily grasped. In addition, in the symbol display area 9L, variable display of the left symbol of the decorative symbol is executed, in the symbol display area 9C, variable display of the middle symbol of the decorative symbol is executed, and in the symbol display area 9R, variable display of the right symbol of the decorative symbol is performed. Executed. The arrangement positions of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R on the display screen of the effect display device 9 may be fixed or may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  A first special symbol display (first variable display means) 8 a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information is provided on the left side of the top of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. A second special symbol display (second variable display means) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information is provided on the right side of the upper portion of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) When the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display start condition is established in the order in which the start winnings are generated regardless of the winning at the first starting winning port 13 and the winning at the second starting winning port 14. However, among the winnings at the first starting winning port 13 and the winnings at the second starting winning port 14, for example, the winning to the second starting winning port 14 is prioritized and the variable display start condition is satisfied. Good. In that case, if the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and if the big hit game is not executed, the first reserved memory number is not 0, 2 The variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed until the number of reserved memories becomes zero.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. The display design (decorative design) is variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the variable display period is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. A game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easy for a game ball to win the second starting winning opening 14 by the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  Below the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed 4. There is provided a first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a composed of two indicators (for example, LEDs). The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Below the second special symbol display 8b is a second special symbol hold comprising four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. A storage indicator 18b is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as a summed pending storage display unit 18c) that displays a total number (total number of pending pending memories) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. .) Is provided. Since the summation pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In addition, since the total reserved memory display unit 18c is provided, the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may not be provided.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided at the lower right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded to the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of indicators that are lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, in the probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 The opening time becomes longer and the number of opening times is increased. Further, in the short-time state (a gaming state in which the special symbol variable display time is shortened), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be lengthened and the number of times of opening may be increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27R and 27L that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame LED 28a, a left frame LED 28b, and a right frame LED 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 7. Also, a prize ball LED 51 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 28b, and a ball cut LED 52 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 28c. . The top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, the right frame LED 28c, and the decoration LED 25 are examples of effects light emitters provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to the above-described various LEDs for production (decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In addition, an operation button 158 that can be pressed by the player and outputs a press signal when pressed is provided at the lower left portion of the gaming machine. When a predetermined announcement effect is being performed, an effect display in which the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 changes is performed in response to the operation button 158 being operated by the player.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 506 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The random number circuit 506 counts an internal clock signal for driving each block in the game control microcomputer 560. Note that a microcomputer configured so that a clock signal obtained by dividing the internal clock signal or a clock signal whose frequency is increased is supplied to the random number circuit 506 may be used.

  A counter circuit 511 used for generating random numbers is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 inputs data output from the counter circuit 511 at a predetermined time, and adds the input data to the count value of a counter (RAM 55 area) for generating random numbers.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special symbol process flag and the value of the total pending storage number counter) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. A reset circuit that generates a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like become operable, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like become inoperative. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is output during a period when the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer is output when the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 560 or the like is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). A clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for providing detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (comprising an effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the contents of the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 177. An effect control command is received, and display control with the effect display device 9 that variably displays effect symbols is performed.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the counter circuit 511 and the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 3, the counter circuit 511 receives a clock signal output from a pulse oscillator 513 (not shown in FIG. 2) mounted on the main board 31, and counts at the rising or falling edge of the clock signal. Increase the value by one. The counter circuit 511 is, for example, a 16-bit counter. Therefore, the output (that is, the count value) of the counter circuit 511 is output through 16 signal lines. The output of the counter circuit 511 is input to the first latch circuit 514 and the second latch circuit 515. The count value of the counter circuit 511 is one of 0 to 65535, and increments by one. That is, the value increases by one.

  In this example, the counter circuit 511 is a 16-bit counter, but the bit width of the counter circuit 511 is not limited to 16. However, even when the bit width of the counter circuit 511 is set to a value other than 16, the bit width of the software counter is made the same as the bit width of the counter circuit 511. When the bit width of the counter circuit 511 is n but the predetermined numerical range is not set to a power of 2 n (for example, when n is 16, the predetermined numerical range is set to 2 16 (0 to 0). The range of numerical values by the software counter is also made the same in the range from 0 to 59999 without setting to 65535). In this case, the CPU 56 subtracts a predetermined calculation (for example, 60000) when the value exceeding the predetermined numerical range becomes a count value of the counter circuit 511 and a numerical value (for example, 60000 or more) by the software counter. To obtain a numerical value within a predetermined numerical range.

  The oscillation frequency of the clock signal output from the pulse oscillator 513 is arbitrary, but the count value of the counter circuit 511 is used by the game control microcomputer 560 to generate a random number for determination. The oscillation frequency is different from the operating frequency of the CPU 56, and the oscillation frequency of the clock signal is preferably not an integer multiple of the operating frequency of the CPU 56 (for example, the operating frequency of the CPU 56 is 15.872 MHz and the clock signal is oscillated). Frequency 20 MHz). As will be described later, the CPU 56 starts the game control process periodically (for example, every 2 ms), and the count value of the software counter (counter using the RAM 55) whose value is updated by the game control process and the counter circuit Since a random number is generated by performing an operation on the count value of 511, it is preferable for generating a random number that the update cycle of the count value of the software counter and the update cycle of the counter circuit 511 do not have an integer multiple relationship. Because. Further, it is more preferable that the oscillation frequency of the clock signal and the operating frequency of the CPU 56 are frequencies that are not divisible by the other.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the detection signal of the first start port switch 13a is input to the first latch circuit 514 as a latch signal. Further, the detection signal of the second start port switch 14a is input to the second latch circuit 515 as a latch signal. The first latch circuit 514 latches the count value of the counter circuit 511 when the first start port switch 13a detects a game ball, that is, when there is a first start win. The second latch circuit 515 latches the count value of the counter circuit 511 when the second start port switch 14a detects a game ball, that is, when there is a second start winning. According to the configuration shown in FIG. 3, even when a plurality of types of start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the count value of the counter circuit 511 is latched by the respective latch circuits in accordance with the satisfaction of each start condition. The numerical value generated when the starting condition is satisfied is accurate.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 177, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 4, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 110 including an effect control CPU 111 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 111 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 177 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 112 and the input port 113. Further, the effect control CPU 111 causes the VDP (video display processor) 119 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 119 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 110 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 119 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 110, and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 119 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 111 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The effect control CPU 111 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 119. The VDP 119 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 111. Further, the effect control CPU 111 inputs a pressing signal from the operation button 158 via the input port 116.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 112 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 112 allows the signal input from the relay board 177 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 177). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, a signal input from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 177 only in a direction toward the effect control board 80 (a signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 177). The unidirectional circuit 177A is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 4 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit 177A is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571, which is also a unidirectional circuit, the signal going from the relay board 177 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, a signal from the relay board 177 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 177 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 111 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 115. Further, the effect control CPU 111 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 114.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side. If a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speakers 27R and 27L. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S9 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state recovery process (steps S41 to S44) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). In addition, a display result specifying command, a combined pending storage number designation command, and a variation pattern command are transmitted (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. The variation pattern command is transmitted only when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are variably displayed when the power supply is stopped. Whether or not the variable display has been performed is determined by, for example, a special symbol process flag stored in the RAM 55. However, even if special symbols and decorative symbols are variably displayed when a power failure or the like occurs, a gaming machine configured not to continue variable display when power supply is restored does not transmit a variation pattern command. In the gaming machine configured as described above, the effect control microcomputer 110 specifies the display result of the decorative design based on the received display result specifying command, and the game control microcomputer 560 when the variation time has elapsed. When the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from is received, the display result is derived and displayed on the effect display device 9.

  There are a plurality of types of commands as the display result specifying command. In the process of step S44, the display result specifying command stored in the RAM 55 (the display result specifying command transmitted last when the power supply is stopped) is shown. Send a command based on the data. In addition, although the data indicating the total pending storage number is included in the total pending storage number designation command, in the process of step S44, the total pending storage number designation command including data indicating the total pending storage number stored in the RAM 55 is used. Send. Then, a command based on data indicating the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 55 (the variation pattern command transmitted last when the power supply is stopped) is transmitted as the variation pattern command.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9). Predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S10), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S11).

  By the processes in steps S10 and S11, for example, initial values are set in flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, and a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command for initializing a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed initialization processing). Is transmitted to the sub-board (step S12). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 110 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  In step S <b> 14, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 506. For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program so that the random number circuit 506 updates the random number value.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern and a random number for determining whether to reach or not, and the display random number update process is for generating a display random number. This is a process for updating the count value of the counter. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win the display result of the normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination) and a random 1 to be described later. This is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value of the counter.

  In the initial value random number update process, it is not necessary to use a random number for determining the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating random 1. In this embodiment, a random number for determining the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating random 2-1 is not used, but for generating random 2-1, for random 2-1. You may use the random number for initial values for determining the initial value of the count value of a counter. That is, regarding the initial value random number, the initial value random number may be used for both random 1 and random 2-1, or the initial value random number may be used for either one. In either case, the initial value random number may not be used.

  A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game device such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. Counter for generating a random number in a process for transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer or a game device control process). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value that can be taken, the initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S33 and S34. Execute control.

  Next, processing for updating the count value of each counter for generating random numbers for determination such as random numbers for determining jackpot symbols used for game control is performed (determination random number update processing: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows. Random 1 is a software random number. For random 1, these values and a random number value (count value) generated by a hardware circuit (counter circuit 511 shown in FIG. 3) external to the game control microcomputer 560 are used. The final result is a random value. The final random value is a value that is compared with the determination value. Random numbers 2-2, 3, and 4 are values created by adding the random number value of the random number circuit 506 built in the game control microcomputer 560 to the software random number. Random numbers 5, 6, and 7 are software random numbers generated by the game control microcomputer 560 based on a program. A counter for generating each random n (n: 1 or the like) is a software counter formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in the RAM 55” means that it is an area of the RAM 55.

  In this embodiment, the random 2-1 is not created using the random number value of the random number circuit 506, but the random 2-1 is also similar to the random 2-2, 3 and 4. You may create using the random number value of the random number circuit 506 built in the microcomputer 560 for game control.

(1) Random 1: Variable display of a first special symbol (or second special symbol) based on a game ball winning (first starting winning or second starting entering) at the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening To determine whether to generate a big or small hit (for big hit judgment)
(2-1) Random 2-1 (MR2-1): Determines the type of jackpot (probability big hit, sudden probability change big hit, normal big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2-2) Random 2-2 (MR2-2): Determines whether or not to reach (for reach determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(6) Random 6 (MR6): The initial value of random 1 is determined (for determining the initial value of random 1)
(7) Random 7 (MR7): Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the initial value of random 5)

  In step S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 6, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) a big hit determination random number, (2-1) a big hit type determination random number, and (5) a normal symbol. A counter for generating a hit determination random number is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (MR2-2, MR3, MR4) or initial value random numbers (MR6, MR7). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than the random number of said (1)-(7).

  As described above, the big hit determination random number in (1) is not compared with the big hit determination value, but a value obtained by performing arithmetic processing on the value (becomes MR1) is a big hit. It is compared with the judgment value.

  In the random number updating process for determination in step S24, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the count value of the counter for generating random 1, and returns the count value to 0 when the count value reaches 65536. Also, the count value of the counter for generating random 2-1 is incremented by 1, and when the count value reaches 101, the count value is returned to 1. Also, the count value of the counter for generating random 5 is incremented by 1, and when the count value becomes 14, the count value is returned to 3. In the initial value random number update processing in step S25 (the same applies to step S18), the count value of the counter for generating random 6 is incremented by 1, and when the count value reaches 65536, the count value is reset to 0 and random 7 is generated. 1 is added to the count value of the counter, and when the count value reaches 14, the count value is returned to 3. In the display random number update process in step S26 (same in step S17), a predetermined value (for example, the random number value of the random number circuit 506) is added to the count value of the counter for generating random numbers 2-2, 3, and 4. When the count value exceeds the range shown in FIG. 7, the count value is returned to the range shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, the random number corresponding to the first start prize and the random number corresponding to the second start prize are used as a common software random number, but they may be separate random numbers.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to a normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 and the open / close state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 110 (effect control command control process: step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S31). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S32: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (step S33). The CPU 56, for example, until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, or the value of the special symbol process flag set in the special symbol process is changing in the special symbol. If the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds during the period shown, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b Variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (step S34). For example, the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag set in the normal symbol process until the end flag is set when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process or until the end flag is set. If the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol is a speed that switches the display state (“O” and “X”) every 0.2 seconds in the period indicating the fluctuation, every 0.2 seconds elapses. The value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S34 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set. It may be executed in the process.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing how to create a random (MR1) to be compared with the big hit determination value. As shown in FIG. 8A, when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13, that is, when the first start win occurs, the CPU 56 receives the counter circuit 511 via the first latch circuit 514. Read the count value. Also, random 1 is extracted. That is, the count value is read from a counter for generating random 1 (a software counter having the same bit width (for example, 16 bits) as the bit width of the counter circuit 511). Then, the count value read from the counter circuit 511 and the extracted random 1 are added, and the addition value is divided by 65536 (corresponding to the total number of values from 0 to 65535, in other words, equivalent to 65535 + 1) (as an integer). And the remainder (remainder) is defined as MR1 (a random number that is actually compared with the jackpot determination value).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, that is, when a second start win occurs, the CPU 56 counters via the second latch circuit 515. The count value of the circuit 511 is read. Also, random 1 is extracted. That is, the count value is read from a counter (software counter) for generating random 1. Then, the count value read from the counter circuit 511 and the extracted random 1 are added, and the addition value is divided by 65536 (corresponding to the total number of values from 0 to 65535, in other words, equivalent to 65535 + 1) (as an integer). And the remainder (remainder) is MR1.

  FIG. 8C shows creation of a reach determination random number (MR2-2), a variation pattern type determination random number (MR3), and a variation pattern determination random number (MR4) corresponding to random numbers for determining the production mode. It shows how. The CPU 56 reads the random number value from the random number circuit 506 when the random number update timing is reached (corresponding to the execution time of the processing in step S17 in FIG. 5 and step S26 in FIG. 6).

  Then, the random number value read from the random number circuit 506 is added to the count value of a counter (software counter) for generating random 2-2. Further, the random number value read from the random number circuit 506 is added to the count value of a counter (software counter) for generating random 3 as an added value. Further, the random number value read from the random number circuit 506 is added to the count value of a counter (software counter) for generating random 4 as an added value. In each case, the value after the addition processing remains in the software counter.

  The CPU 56 reads a count value from a counter (software counter) for generating random 2-2 at a predetermined random number extraction timing to obtain MR2-1, and counts from the counter (software counter) for generating random 3 Is read as MR3, and a count value is read from a counter (software counter) for generating random 4 as MR4.

  FIG. 8D shows another example of how to generate a random number for determining the production mode. In the example shown in FIG. 8D, a numerical value conversion table is stored in the ROM 54. In the numerical value conversion table, numerical values corresponding to each value in a range of random number values (for example, 0 to 65535) that can be output by the random number circuit 506 are set. The CPU 56 reads a random number value from the random number circuit 506 at a predetermined random number extraction timing, reads a numerical value corresponding to the read random number value from the numerical value conversion table, uses the numerical value read from the numerical value conversion table as an addition value, and randomly selects 2-2. Are added to the counter for generating random 3, the counter for generating random 3, and the counter for generating random 4. 8D shows an example in which a numerical value is read from the numerical value conversion table using the random number value read from the random number circuit 506 as an address, such a reading method is not essential.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 8C and 8D, the game control microcomputer 560 adds a random number value read from the random number circuit 506 or a value read from the numerical value conversion table to the software counter. The execution part reads the random number value from the random number circuit, determines the addition value based on the read random number value, and adds the determined addition value to the numerical value stored in the software counter as the numerical value storage means Corresponds to means.

  In this embodiment, MR1 (a random number to be compared with the jackpot determination value) is predetermined using the count value of the hardware counter and the count value of the software counter created inside the game control microcomputer 560. A random number is generated by calculation, but a big hit type determination random number for determining the type of big hit, a random number for normal symbol determination for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol, etc. 7), a random number may be generated by a predetermined calculation using the count value of the hardware counter and the count value of the software counter. Furthermore, if there are multiple types of jackpot game rounds (for example, 7 rounds and 15 rounds) and the number of rounds is determined by lottery, a random number used for the lottery (round number determination random number) For the above, a random number may be generated by a predetermined calculation using the count value of the hardware counter and the count value of the software counter.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the count value of one counter circuit 511 is input to a plurality of latch circuits, but the counter circuit corresponds to each of the latch circuits. May be provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are used as latch signals for the first latch circuit 514 and the second latch circuit 515. May be output from the game control microcomputer 560. In that case, when the CPU 56 inputs a detection signal from the first start port switch 13a, it outputs a latch signal to the first latch circuit 514, and when it receives a detection signal from the second start port switch 14a. A latch signal is output to the second latch circuit 515.

  In this embodiment, the output wiring of the counter circuit 511 (16 lines) is directly connected to the latch circuit (the first latch circuit 514 and the second latch circuit 515), but the wiring is shifted and connected. You may make it do. Note that “connect as it is” means that the wiring of the bit n (n: 0 to 15) of the counter circuit 511 is connected to the input of the bit n of the latch circuit. That is, wiring is performed so that the same value as the count value output from the counter circuit 511 is latched by the latch circuit. “Connect the wirings by shifting” means that among the 16 wirings from the counter circuit 511, the wiring of the bit i (i: any one of 0 to 15) is the bit j (j: 0 to 15) of the latch circuit. (I ≠ j). Note that two or more wirings connected in a shifted manner may be used. The output of the latch circuit is input to the CPU 56 via the input port (a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. 2) in the game control microcomputer 560, but between the counter circuit 511 and the latch circuit. Instead of shifting the wiring, the wiring between the latch circuit and the input port may be shifted and connected. In any case, the count value output from the counter circuit 511 and the value input to the CPU 56 are not the same, and the value changes at random instead of stepping one by one. It becomes more difficult to aim at a specific value.

  When MR1 is created, the value of a refresh register (register for refreshing DRAM) built in the game control microcomputer 560 may be used instead of random 1 which is a software random number. Also in this case, the range of values acquired from the refresh register is set to be the same as the count range of the counter circuit 511 (in this example, the range of numbers represented by 16 bits).

  Next, display effects in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described. In the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started, the stop symbol which is the variable symbol special display result is stopped and displayed (derived display). To do. If it is decided to win, a special special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed. When it is decided to make a small hit, a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is determined to be off, special symbols other than the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are stopped and displayed. When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are big hit symbols, the numbers indicating “5” are small hit symbols, and the symbol indicating “−” is an off symbol. To do. The big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the off symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a may be different from the symbols in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Alternatively, it may be common in the variable display of both special symbols.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are the jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are the 15 round jackpot symbols. . The special symbol indicating the number “1” is made a big hit symbol for two rounds. When the 15-round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display, the open / close plate in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 generates a predetermined number (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls. During the period until the game is started, a round is started in which the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of rounds is the first number (for example, 15). Hereinafter, the jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is the first number is also referred to as 15 rounds jackpot state.

  Further, when the two-round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display, the game proceeds to the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) in which the number of rounds is the second number (for example, “2”). In the 2 round big hit state, the period of each round becomes a short second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) due to the first period in the 15 round big hit state. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) which is smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In addition, in the two round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. It suffices to be controlled. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. The second state may be restored after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  In addition, when it is determined to control the gaming state to the time-saving state after the big hit gaming state is ended, the special symbol stop symbol is “3”. In the short time state, the variation time of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol is shortened compared to the normal state (the state that is not the probability variation state or the short time state). The time-short state is, for example, when one of the conditions is satisfied first, that is, the variable display of a special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit”. To finish. In addition, after the big hit state executed after the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol in the special symbol variable display after the 15-round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal state is not set. It may be made to become. The jackpot symbol that is derived and displayed when the game is controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the jackpot game state ends is called a normal jackpot symbol or a non-probable variable jackpot symbol (non-probable variation symbol).

  If the game state is decided to be controlled to the probable state after the big hit game state is ended, the special symbol stop symbol is “7”. The probability variation state continues until, for example, a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result. In addition, when one of the conditions is established first, a variable number of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result. The probability variation state may be terminated. Further, a special symbol stop symbol derived and displayed when it is determined to control the gaming state to the probability variation state is referred to as probability variation big hit symbol or probability variation symbol.

  Even after the two-round big hit state is over, the gaming state is controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). The probability variation state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state is also referred to as a sudden probability variation (surprise) state.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display, the gaming state is controlled to a small hit gaming state different from the big hit gaming state. In the small hit game state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the open / close plate in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in the open state for the second period, and the big winning opening is opened. The number of rounds is the second number (for example, 2). However, unlike the two round big hit state, the gaming state is not changed. That is, the gaming state before being controlled to the small hit gaming state continues. However, when it is decided to end the probability change state or the time-short state, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state after the small hit gaming state is ended. In addition, when changing the winning ball apparatus provided separately from the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round in the two round big hit state to the first state, the same as in the case of the two round big hit state even in the small hit gaming state Then, the winning ball apparatus is changed to the first state.

  Further, in the probability variation state, the probability of determining the big hit is higher than in the low probability state (normal state). For example, it is 10 times. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the number of determination values determined to be a big hit when it matches the value of the random number for jackpot determination is 10 times that in the normal state. In addition, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. That is, the second start winning opening 14 is easy to open, and a start winning is likely to occur. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the number of determination values determined to be a hit when it matches the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is larger than that in the normal state. Further, in addition to increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol, the number of opening or the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, or the number of opening and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. You may increase. Further, even in the short time state, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, the number of opening or the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, and the number of opening and opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. You may spend more time.

  In the display area of the effect display device 9, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in response to the special symbols variably displayed by the first special symbol indicator 8 a and the second special symbol indicator 8 b. That is, in the display area of the effect display device 9, the symbol display areas 9 </ b> L for “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. In 9C and 9R, the variation of the decorative symbols is started. For example, the decorative symbols stop symbols are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. Note that the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in a predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, or each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbols. The stop symbols may be stopped and displayed simultaneously in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R.

  During the period (variable display period) from when the variable display of decorative symbols is started until the stop symbol is derived and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R The variable display state of symbols may be a predetermined reach state. The reach state is a display state in which the decorative symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, or This is a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach effect, it is possible that the variable display state of decorative designs may be in the reach state and that the variable display result may be a big hit design. A specific effect may be executed for notifying the player by a variable display mode of the symbol. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, “intro”, “expansion chance”, “end of development opportunity” can be executed.

  In the specific effect of “sliding”, two or more symbol display areas (for example, “left”) are displayed after the decorative symbols are changed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In addition, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the symbol display areas of the temporarily stopped symbols are displayed. The decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed by changing the decorative symbol again after changing the decorative symbol again (for example, one or both of the “left” symbol display area 9L and the “right” symbol display area 9R). An effect display is performed. In addition, to notify the player that the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed will not be finalized (final stop) by, for example, displaying fluctuations in the temporary stop display or changing the decorative symbol again after a short temporary stop. Is preferred. Alternatively, the decorative design may be changed again after the decorative design is temporarily stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped and displayed is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” specific production, “Left”, “Medium”, “Right” are selected based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the variable symbol special display is established once. After changing the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the ornament is displayed in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. The effect display for changing the symbol again (pseudo continuous fluctuation) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times).

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing pseudo-continuous opportunities, development opportunities, and chances of surprise. For example, in the specific effect of “pseudo train”, any one of the pseudo train chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 9A in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R of “left”, “middle” and “right”. Are temporarily stopped and displayed. The “left symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the “middle symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “middle” symbol display area 9C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of decorative symbols included in the special combination.

  In the specific effect of “Intro”, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the symbols are confirmed in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (final stop display), for example, a predetermined effect display such as an introduction part of the effect display performed in the reach effect is performed.

  In the specific development of “Development Opportunity”, all symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are changed after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. , After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols constituting the development opportunity included in the predetermined special combination, the predetermined reach effect is started with the variable display state of the decorative symbols in the reach state. For example, in the specific effect of “Development Chance”, any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. Is temporarily stopped and displayed. When any one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The player's expectation is enhanced.

  In the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, all symbol display areas 9L, 9C, In 9R, an effect display is performed in which a combination of decorative symbols predetermined as development opportunities is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). For example, in the specific effect “end of development chance”, any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect “development opportunity” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Further, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, a display pattern other than the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image, A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may become a big hit symbol. In this embodiment, notice effects such as “character display”, “step-up image”, and “mail display” are executed.

  In the “character display” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then two or more symbol display areas (for example, “ In the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9R), before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed, an effect display is performed in which a character image prepared in advance is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 9. .

  In the “step-up image” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in two or more symbol display areas. Is temporarily displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, an effect display is performed in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, and then the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched.

  In the notice display of “mail display”, the decorative symbols are changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in two or more symbol display areas. Before the temporary stop display is performed, for example, an effect display in which the effect operation changes such as changing the display of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  When the special symbol display and the effect display device 9 are stopped and displayed in a stopped state, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol display is started. Any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 may be stopped and displayed among the combination of the decorative patterns of FIG. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) variable display mode when the variable display result is an out-of-order design.

  When the special symbol indicator and the effect display device 9 are stopped and displayed in a stopped state, the variable symbol display state is reached after reaching the variable symbol display state after the variable symbol variable display is started. After the effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that are not reachable may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when “3”, which is a normal jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, after the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, after the reach effect is executed, Alternatively, the reach number is not executed, and the symbol numbers of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 are even numbers “2”, “4”, “ Any one of the decorative symbols “6” and “8” is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are referred to as normal big hit symbols (“non-probable variation”) of the decorative symbols. The decorative display variable display mode in which the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “normal” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) variable display mode.

  When “7”, which is a probable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display, the reach effect is executed after the variable effect display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, or the reach effect is executed. In addition, the symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of “left”, “middle”, “right” in the effect display device 9. Any one of the decorative designs is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” are referred to as probability variation big hit symbols or probability variation symbols.

  Corresponding to the fact that the stop symbol in the variable symbol special display becomes the probability variation big hit symbol ("7" which is the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped on the special symbol indicator), the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbol is After the reach effect similar to the reach effect executed in the case of the normal jackpot symbol is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the decorative display variable display mode in which the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed is “No. This is referred to as a “variable display mode”.

  Executed when the variable display result of the decorative symbol is the normal jackpot symbol after the variable symbol display state reaches the reach state when the special symbol indicator “7” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed after the reach effect different from the reach effect to be performed is referred to as a variable display mode of “second probability variation”. In this way, it is referred to as a “second probability variation” variable display mode.

  Executed when the variable display result of the decorative symbol is the normal jackpot symbol after the variable symbol display state reaches the reach state when the special symbol indicator “7” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed after the reach effect similar to the reach effect is performed or without the reach effect being performed is referred to as a variable display mode of “third probability change”. . In addition, although the big hit symbol is usually derived and displayed on the effect display device 9, the gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state.

  If the decorative symbol variable display mode is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9, but the decorative symbol variable display mode is “third probability variation”. ”, The big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9. When the variable display mode is “third probability variation”, the player cannot recognize from the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbol whether or not the probability variation state is entered. In other words, the combination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol for the probability variation big hit is always used when the probability variation state is controlled. However, the combination of the stop symbol of the normal jackpot decorative symbol is used both when the probability variation state is not controlled and when the probability variation state is controlled.

  When “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the predetermined display symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9 without the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. Or the stop symbol that becomes one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 9B is stopped, or the stop symbol that becomes one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 9C is stopped. Is displayed. Note that the chance chances TC1 to TC4 are determined in advance as combinations of decorative symbols included in the special combination. In addition, when “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, a predetermined reach effect is executed or a reach effect is performed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. Is not executed, and a stop symbol which is a predetermined reach combination (for example, the stop symbols in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R match) is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9 May be. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display, is “surprise” (also referred to as “surprise probability big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit”). This is called a variable display mode.

  When “5”, which is a small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, in the effect display device 9, the decorative symbol variable display is performed in the same manner as the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “accuracy”. After being performed, a stop symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination (for example, the stop symbols in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R do not match) is stopped or displayed. The stop symbol of any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in 9 (B) is stopped or displayed, or the stop symbol that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped and displayed. This is referred to as a display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is a small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display, and a variable display mode of “small hit”. Note that the stop symbol of any of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 9C is used only when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “surprise”, and the variable display mode is “small hit”. If it becomes, it will not be stopped. In other words, when any stop symbol of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the variable display mode of “probability”.

  When the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal”, “first probability variation”, or “third probability variation”, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the promotion effect during variation as the specific variation display is executed. May be. In the fluctuating promotion effect, after the normal jackpot symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the active lines of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the effect display device 9, for example, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the same ornamental symbols are changed again, and the symbols are changed again. Stop display of one of the symbols (final stop display). When the changing promotion mode is executed when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or “third probability change”, the temporarily changing display of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped is used as the changing promotion effect. A promotion promotion failure during change is performed to stop and display the jackpot symbol. When the variable display mode is “first probability change”, when the changing promotion effect is executed, as the changing promotion effect, a change in which the probabilistic big hit symbol is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is changed again. Medium promotion success production is performed.

  When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is either “normal” or “third probability change”, the variable display result is stopped and displayed. After being controlled to the round big hit state, during the period until the 15th round big hit state ends, the promotion effect during the big hit is executed as a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probability variation state. The timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be before the first round in the 15 round big hit state starts after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or any round in the 15 round big hit state Or during the period from the end of any round in the 15 round jackpot state to the start of the next round, or the final round in the 15 round jackpot state It may be during the period from the end of the game to the start of the next variable display game. In addition, during the first special symbol or decorative symbol change after the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect operation corresponding to the big hit promotion effect may be performed. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as an “ending promotion effect”.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, a notification that there is a promotion to become a promiscuous state, and a notification that there is no promotion to become a promiscuous state, informing that there is a promotion that the gaming state will be probabilistic even though the stop symbol is a normal jackpot symbol There is a directing failure production during the jackpot. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. Then, in the big hit middle promotion failure production, the normal big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the production display result, and in the big hit middle promotion promotion production, the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the production display result. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9. Then, in the big hit mid-promotion failure production, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette enters the “even number” and displays an effect image that displays “Sorry!”, And in the big hit mid-promotion successful production, it is thrown into the rotating roulette. The ball is placed in an “odd number” and an effect image “Probability!” Is displayed.

  If “7” is stopped as a stop symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display result is a big hit symbol in the variable display mode of “third probability change”, the big hit game state is over until the big hit gaming state ends. By executing the promotion success production, it is notified that there is a promotion that is in a certain change state. When “3” is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol on the special symbol display, the success promotion effect during the big hit is not executed until the big hit gaming state is ended, and there is no notification that there is a promotion to be in a probable change state.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is no jackpot promotion success effect that notifies that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probable state even though the stop symbol is a combination of the normal jackpot symbol, and there is no promotion that becomes a probable state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result. In the big hit mid-promotion failure production, the normal symbol may be stopped and displayed as the production display result, and in the big hit mid-rise promotion success production, the probability variation design may be stopped and displayed as the production display result. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9. And in the big hit promotion promotion production, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette enters “Even” and displays the production image “Sorry!”, And in the big promotion during the big hit, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette An effect image that displays “Odd” and “Probability!” Is displayed. When the special symbol display “7” is stopped and displayed, if the variable display result is a big hit symbol in the variable display mode of “third probability change”, the big hit during the big hit gaming state is completed. By executing this, it is notified that there is a promotion that is in a probable state. When the special symbol display “3” is stopped and displayed, if the variable display result in the “normal” variable display mode becomes a big hit symbol, the success promotion effect during the big hit is executed before the big hit gaming state is completed. Without being notified, there is no notification that there is a promotion that is in a probable state.

  FIG. 10 shows a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows. As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7 and non-reach PB1- are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PB3-1 to super PB3− are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. 5. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. As shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4-1 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -Super PA4-8, Super PA5-1 to Super PA5-4, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-4, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-4, Super PC4-1 and Super PC4-2, Super PD1-1 And Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1-2, Super PF1-1 to Super PF1-3, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-4, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-3, Special PG3-1 ~ The variation pattern of special PG3-3 is prepared.

  The ROM 54 in the game control microcomputer 560 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 56 to make various determinations and determinations are stored. Further, the ROM 54 forms table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit various control commands from the main board 31 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data etc. are stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes, for example, a special symbol display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. The special symbol display result determination table 130 derives stop symbols that are variable display results in the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. Before being displayed, whether the variable display result is a big hit symbol and controlled to the big hit gaming state, whether the variable display result is a small hit symbol and controlled to the small hit gaming state, It is a table referred to for determination based on the random number MR1 for display result determination. The special symbol display result determination table 130 compares with the value of the random number MR1 for determining the display result of the special symbol, depending on whether or not the probability variation flag is set (depending on whether it is off or on). The determination value associated with the big hit, the small hit, and the loss is set.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes a jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets the decorative symbol variable display mode to “normal” or “first” based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of jackpot types from “1 probability variation” to “3rd probability variation” and “surprising accuracy”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, a numerical value (to be compared with the value of the random number MR2-1 for jackpot type determination depending on whether or not the first special symbol variation flag indicating the variation of the first special symbol is set. Determination values) corresponding to the jackpot types of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, and “rush probability” are set.

  In the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 13, the assignment of the determination value to the big hit type of “crash probability” differs depending on whether or not the first special symbol fluctuation flag indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol is set. Yes. That is, when the first special symbol variation flag is set, the value in the range of “83” to “100” corresponds to the big hit type of “surprise”, and the first special symbol variation flag is not set. In the case (indicating the variation of the second special symbol), no judgment value is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is satisfied. And a case where the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is satisfied. The ratio at which the big hit type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the second start winning prize, the determination value is not suddenly assigned. Therefore, in the probability variation state in which the second start winning opening 14 has many opportunities to open (including a long opening period), it is possible to reduce the ratio that is determined suddenly. Therefore, in the situation that is already in the probabilistic state, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a surprise that will be shifted to the probable state occurs and the interest of the game given to the player is reduced.

  The determination value is a numerical value to be compared with the extracted random number value (random number value). When the random value matches any of the determination values, the determination value corresponds to the determination value (the determination value is assigned). A gaming state or the like is determined. For example, it is determined to execute an effect corresponding to the determination value.

  The determination tables stored in the ROM 54 include jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 14 (A) to (F) and FIGS. 15 (A) to (C). The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state is selected according to whether the game state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short time state, and the determination result of the jackpot type. In each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I, depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability”. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 for type determination, which is normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, special CA4-1 The determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 is set.

  As an example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the big hit variation pattern type determination shown in FIG. 14A used when the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”. In the table 132A and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 14B used when the big hit type is “first probability variation”, the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 are used. The judgment value assignment is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation value type of the super CA 3-3 is determined. The judgment value is not assigned. Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4 is determined. Judgment value is assigned.

  Thus, when the gaming state is any one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132D selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state (the normal state Big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132E to 132H (selected when the probability variation state is selected) and big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, 132I (selected during the short time state) are compared. The determination value assignment to each variation pattern type is different depending on. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be made different.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H, and 132I used when the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, When the big hit type such as special CC4-1 or special CC4-2 is other than “surprise”, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the determination value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, when the control is made to the 2 round big hit state, the variation pattern type is different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. be able to.

  As another example, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, the big hit variation shown in FIG. 14 (A) used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. In the pattern type determination table 132A and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 14E used when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the variation pattern types of the normal CA 3-1 and the super CA 3-2 are selected. The judgment value assignment is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3. Is not assigned. As described above, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, “first probability change” to “third probability change”, or “surprise probability”, the big hit variation pattern type selected according to the gaming state. Determination tables 132A and 132E (selected when “normal” or “third probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132F (selected when “first probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination table When comparing 132C, 132G (selected when “second probability variation”) and big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H, 132I (selected when “crash probability”), the gaming state is a normal state or a short time state. Depending on whether or not the state is in a probable variation state, the determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type. In addition, determination values may be assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probable variation state, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied. .

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. The small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the variation pattern type is classified into a plurality of types based on the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination. It is a table that is referenced to determine one of them. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination, and includes special CA4-1, special CB4-1, and special CC4-. The determination value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types is included.

  The variation pattern type of the special CA 4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 16A is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. The variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 16B is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. The variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 16C is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 14 (D), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 15 (B), and FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in C) is set so as to include a variation pattern type that is common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, and the reach determination random number MR2-2. This table is referred to for determination based on the table. Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR2-2 for reach determination, and is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, Non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 determination results indicating no reach state, reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 The determination value corresponding to one of the determination results to the effect is included.

  For example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 17A, the value in the range of “1” to “204” is set to the non-reach HA1-1 corresponding to the case where the total number of pending storage is “0”. And a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “1”, a value in the range of “1” to “217”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1, is set to the non-reach HA1-2. assign. Furthermore, a value in the range of “1” to “220”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “2”, Assign to non-reach HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”, each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-3. More determination values in the range of “1” to “230” than the number of determination values to be allocated are allocated to the non-reach HA1-4 and the non-reach HA1-5. With such a setting, when the total pending storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is in the reach state compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The percentage made is lower. If the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “reach”. When the total pending storage number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened as compared to when the total reserved memory number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. Each reach variation pattern type determination table 135A to 135C is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, and for reach according to the determination result indicating reach HB2-1. The variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected as the use table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach HC2-1 is selected. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C indicates whether the determination result indicating the reach state is one of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, and the reach HC2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the variation pattern of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2 Data (determination value) for determining one of the types is included.

  For example, in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 18A, the value (determination value) in the range of “1” to “128” is set to the normal CA2− corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. 1 is assigned to the variation pattern type, and other values are assigned to the variation pattern types of Super CA2-2 and Super CA2-3. Further, in response to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. Further, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA 2-1 in accordance with the determination result of reach HA 2-3. The reach HA2-1 is compared with the value of the reach determination random number MR2-2 by means of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 17A, corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “0”. Judgment value is assigned. A determination value is assigned to the reach HA 2-2 in accordance with the case where the total pending storage number is “1” or “2”. The reach HA2-3 is assigned a determination value corresponding to the case where the total number of pending storage is “3” or “4” or any of “5” to “8”. Yes. With these settings, when the total pending storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “1”), the variation of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number The ratio determined for the pattern type increases. And, the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the “normal” reach effect is shorter than the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the reach effect other than “normal”. If the total pending storage number is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the total pending storage number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not the reach state. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the like. It is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, which is non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-. 4, data (determination value) corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3 and non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in FIGS. 20, 21A, and 21B. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C indicate the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, and the variation pattern type is super CB3. -1 to super CB 3-5, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, The hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2 is used. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit”. Alternatively, data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “small hit” is included.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. The deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate variation patterns according to whether or not to reach a reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “out of range”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each deviation variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type is determined to be one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as a usage table according to the result. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is “out of” and variable. Data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the display mode is “non-reach” is included. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is “out of” and variable. Data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the display mode is “reach” is included.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 22, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7 corresponding to the case of non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect. Also, corresponding to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CB1-2, the value in the range of “1” to “100” is assigned to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 that executes the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”. It has been. With such a setting, the non-reach PA1-4 to the non-reach PA1-4 to non-corresponding to the determination that the decorative symbol variable display result is “out” and the determination that the decorative symbol variable display state is not the reach state. It is possible to make a decision to be one of the variation patterns of reach PA1-7, and to perform an effect operation that becomes a specific effect.

  Then, for the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4, a numerical value (determination) compared with the value of random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination in non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. Value), and a determination value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1, and a determination value in the range of “230” to “241” to the non-reach HA 1-2 Is assigned to the non-reach HA1-3, and “237” to “241” are assigned to the non-reach HA1-4 and the non-reach HA1-5, respectively. "Is assigned. In addition, for the non-reach HA 1-1, the value of the random number MR2-2 for reach determination in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. And a determination value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned. For the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “1” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the reach determination random number MR2-2. , “1” to “217” are assigned determination values. For the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “2” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number MR2-2 for reach determination. , “1” to “220” are assigned determination values. For the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “3” and “4” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the reach determination random number MR2-2. ) And determination values in the range of “1” to “230” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-5, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “5” to “8” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the reach determination random number MR2-2. ) And determination values in the range of “1” to “230” are assigned. Therefore, when the total pending storage number is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is larger than when the total pending storage number is “0”. Lower. When the total pending storage number is “3”, “4”, or “5” to “8”, the total pending storage number is “0”, or “1” or “2” Compared with the case of "", the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is low.

  In the variation pattern illustrated in FIG. 10, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. Is 3.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “sliding” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of PA1-5 is 16.70 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-6 in which the specific effect of “Intro” is executed is 10.20 seconds. Yes, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is not performed. When the total number of pending storages is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than in the case of “0”. . Further, when the total pending storage number is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA1-4 is lower than that when it is less than “3”. Therefore, when the total pending storage number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened as compared to when the total reserved memory number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 23, the variation pattern for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and the reach effect such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-8. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA2-3 or super CB2-1, the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination is added to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as super PB3-1 to super PB3-5. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with is assigned.

  Further, for example, for a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, such as a variation pattern of super PA3-4, super PA3-8, and super PB3-4, a decorative pattern is displayed after the pseudo-continuous variation is performed The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state becomes the reach state. That is, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-4 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, this corresponds to the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-8 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, it corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-3 or the super CB 2-1 is used in the outlier variation pattern determination table 138B. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of normal CA 2-1 and super CA 2-2, the variation pattern type determination is performed in any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 is assigned. Further, the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 is compared with the value of the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135C shown in FIGS. 18A and 18C. A numerical value (judgment value) is assigned. For the variation pattern type of the super CB2-1, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. 18B. Assigned. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C, the effect in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state. It is configured to be able to determine one of the classified variation pattern types depending on the type of operation. Further, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. Depending on the type, it can be determined as one of the classified variation pattern types.

  In the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560, for example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 24 is used as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 24 includes a first hold storage buffer 151A, a second hold storage buffer 151B, a hold identification data storage section 151C, a game control flag setting section 152, and a game control timer setting section. 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 14 to 19 and the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 are provided, and the CPU 56 first determines the variation pattern type determination table. And the variation pattern type determination random number are used to determine the variation pattern type, and then the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table and the variation pattern determination random number. Therefore, if you want to partially change the distribution pattern distribution rate (appearance rate) from the existing distribution rate (for example, the distribution rate of existing models), change the distribution pattern type distribution rate. (The change pattern distribution ratio is not changed), the change ratio of the change pattern in the related change pattern type only needs to be changed (in this case, the change ratio of the change pattern type is not changed). It is easy to change the design from the model. When the concept of the variation pattern type is not included, the distribution rate for all the variation patterns is changed even when it is desired to partially change the distribution rate of the variation pattern.

  The first reserved storage buffer 151A is a variable display of a special symbol (first special symbol indicator) in which a game ball wins the first starting winning opening 13 and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of the variable display of the first special symbol in 8a) is stored. As an example, the first hold storage buffer 151A sets the numerical data indicating the big hit determination random number MR1 and the numerical data indicating the big hit type determination random number MR2-1 in the order of winning in the first start winning opening as the hold data, The number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached.

  The second reserved storage buffer 151B has a special symbol variable in which the game ball is won in the second start winning opening 14 formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 15 and the second start condition is satisfied but the second start condition is not satisfied. The hold data of the display (variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b) is stored. As an example, the second reservation storage buffer 151B uses numerical data indicating the jackpot determination random number MR1 and numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number MR2-1 as the hold data, and the number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, Memorize until “4”) is reached.

  The hold identification data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 a game ball has won, so that the order of winning of each game ball can be specified. That is, the hold identification data storage unit 151 </ b> C has data indicating “first” corresponding to winning at the first start winning opening 13 or data indicating “second” corresponding to winning at the second starting winning opening 14. Are stored according to the winning order.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 stores a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For each of the plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state are stored. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores a special symbol process flag, a normal symbol process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a short time flag, and the like.

  The big hit flag is set when it is determined to be a big hit when variable symbol special display is started, and is reset when variable special symbol display is completed. The small hit flag is set when it is determined to be a small hit when the special symbol variable display is started, and is reset when the special symbol variable display is completed. The probability change flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state ends. The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the time reduction state, and is reset when the time reduction state ends.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with counters that realize various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a counter used for controlling the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a counter for generating a random number, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a combined reserved memory number counter, a round number counter, and the like. Yes.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a buffer area for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating the big hit type.

  The data indicating the big hit type is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”, and the various types of big hits such as “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, “surprise probability” It is data corresponding to the determination result of which type to determine. For example, based on the determination using the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 13, when the jackpot type is “normal”, “00” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and the jackpot type is “first”. In the case of “probable change”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and in the case of “second probability change”, “02” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and the big hit type is “third”. In the case of “probable change”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and “04” is set as data indicating the big hit type in the case of the “big hit” type.

  The effect control microcomputer 110 mounted on the effect control board 80 uses a counter to update numerical values to be various random values used for controlling the effect operation. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 110. As shown in FIG. 25, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 110 is used to determine the random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols for promotion effect determination. A random number SR2, a random number SR3 for determining a temporary stop symbol at the time of a slip / development chance, a random number SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining a first to a third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol, a random number SR5 for determining promotion effect execution, The random numbers SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns, the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type, and the random numbers SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns are used. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the effect.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, “ This is a random number used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. The final stop symbols are three decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends. That is.

  The random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol during the promotion effect is normally displayed in a temporary stop display in each of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of "left", "middle", and "right" when executing the promotion effect during change. It is a random number used to determine the decorative pattern of the jackpot combination. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping / development chance is “left”, “middle”, “ This is a random number used to determine a decorative symbol to be displayed in a temporary stop in all or part of the “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects. This is a random number used to determine a combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the random number SR5 for promotion effect execution determination This is a random number used to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect.

  The random numbers SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns are specific effects corresponding to the contents of the effect operation when executing the specific effects of “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “intro”. It is a random number used to determine a pattern as one of a plurality of types. The random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “slip” is executed. The random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern when executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. The random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “intro” specific effect.

  The random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is used to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect, and to determine the notice pattern type when executing the notice effect as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. Random number. The random numbers SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns are random numbers used for determining the notice pattern as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “character display”. The random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of the “step-up image”. The random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “mail display”.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 110, for example, FIG. 26 shows a table for determining a predetermined decorative pattern to be one of a predetermined non-reach combination and development chances HC1 to HC8. The final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160D shown in (A) to (D) are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 26A is a left final stop that becomes a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the finalized symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the symbol number “of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1”. Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 26 (B) is a right final stop that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R among the predetermined decorative symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the second final stop symbol determining random number SR1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 26C is a medium final stop that becomes a fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among predetermined decorative symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM in the production control microcomputer 110 includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 27, and includes a left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and a right final stop symbol FZ1- From the combination with 2, determination is made as to which of the left and right roll type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR127LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C indicates the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR127LR31 to LR38. Including the data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are the middle final stop symbols FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 26B, the symbol number of the decorative symbol that is the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is the same as the symbol number of the decorative symbol that is the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. No numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is assigned. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol combination is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the chances of success TC1 to TC4). Can be avoided. Further, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 26C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined decorative symbols. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that is the combination of. For example, even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the portion that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 9A, the portion that becomes the development chance eye HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 9B, In the part that becomes the odd chance TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 9C, and the part that is a combination of a certain non-reach as shown in FIG. 28, the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value is not assigned. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance item HC1 to HC8, or a random chance item. TC1 to TC4, or a certain non-reach combination similar to these chances can be avoided.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 26D is a symbol display area 9L, 9C, “left”, “middle”, or “right” when the specific effect “end of development chance” is executed. The combination of the stop symbols that become the final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6 at 9R is set to one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table that is referenced to determine. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the data (determination value) corresponding to the development chances HC1 to HC8. Including.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 110, for example, a final stop symbol shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B is used as a table for determining a fixed ornament symbol to be a reach-removed combination. Decision tables 162A and 162B are included. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 29A is a left final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the finalized symbols that are out of reach. 1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is a confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, are determined based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table to be referenced. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and is the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the same decorative symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2). The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 29B is a final final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the finalized symbol symbols that are the reach out of combination. 3 is a table referred to for determining 3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  The middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that constitutes the unreachable combination is specified by the symbol difference that is the difference between the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 or the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. . That is, in the variable display of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols start to change in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and “left” → “right” → “middle”. When the fixed decorative pattern that is the result of variable display of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in this order, the “left” and “right” symbol displays other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C, where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the areas 9L and 9R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the "medium" symbol display is performed using the final stop symbol determination table 162B. A difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the area 9C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the determined symbol difference, the final decorative symbol that is the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. If it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-1 to PB3-5, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Special PG2-3, 5 is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol in accordance with any of the fluctuation patterns of the super PA 3-8, and the symbol difference “− Data (determination values) corresponding to “2”, “−1”, “+1”, “+2” are included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 110, for example, as a table for determining a definite decorative symbol to be one of the big hit combinations and the chances of success TC1 to TC4, for example, FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C shown in (C) are included. The final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 30A is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as fixed ornament symbols that are usually a big hit combination. The left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are tables that are referred to in order to determine the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. The final stop symbol determination table 163A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. -3 includes data (determination values) corresponding to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the same normal symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 30 (B) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as fixed ornament symbols that are probable big hit combinations. The left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are tables that are referred to in order to determine the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. The final stop symbol determination table 163B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. 3 includes data (determination values) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” of the probability variation symbols that are the same as −3. The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 30 (C) has a left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1, FZ4- in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. 2 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that become FZ4-3 to be one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol, and the data (determination value) corresponding to the probability chance items TC1 to TC4. Including.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 110, for example, as shown in FIGS. 31A to 31C, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types. Specific effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164C are included. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 31 (A) slides the specific effect pattern TP1 based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern when the specific effect of "slip" is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to slip TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Super PF1-3, Special PG1-2, Special The random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 10 and 11) in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as the change patterns of PG2-2 and special PG3-3. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of, and corresponds to a specific effect pattern of slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4 That contain data (determination value).

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the decorative symbols are displayed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the decorative symbols are displayed again in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the decorative symbols are displayed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the decorative symbols are displayed again in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 31B simulates the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of the series TP2-1 to the pseudo series TP2-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B includes non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PB3-4, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super The random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIG. 10 and FIG. 11) in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect of the change patterns of PF1-1 and special PG1-3 is executed. This is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3.

  In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then re-variation (pseudo-variable variation). The all-revariable display operation to be performed is performed once until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2, the all-revariable display operation is performed twice before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the all-revariable display operation is performed three times before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the specific performance pattern is determined to be one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3 by using the specific performance pattern determination table 164B, thereby determining the number of executions of the pseudo-series variation. be able to.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 31C indicates the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern when the “intro” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to intro TP3-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164C includes non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super In accordance with a variation pattern (see FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, such as a variation pattern of PB5-3, the value is compared with the value of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern. Data (determination value) corresponding to the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3.

  When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, for example, depending on whether the previous effect value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 164 shown in FIG. The assignment of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 corresponding to the effect operation is different. The previous effect value is set to 1 when the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined to be intro TP3-1, and is set to 2 when it is determined to be intro TP3-2. Is set to 3. When the previous effect value is 1, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-1. When the previous effect value is 2, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-2, and the previous effect value is 3. In some cases, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific performance pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-3. When the specific effect of “Intro” is executed according to the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6 by such allocation, the same specific effect as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” executed last time It can be prevented from becoming a pattern.

  The determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 110 includes a fluctuating promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 32A and a jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. It is included. In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 32A, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). Is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect based on the promotion effect execution determination random number SR5. The fluctuating promotion effect execution determination table 165A is compared with the value of the random number SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. Data (determination value) corresponding to a determination result indicating the presence / absence of a promotion effect during change. When the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, all the numerical values (determination values) compared with the value of the random effect SR5 for determining the promotion effect are allotted to the determination result with the changing promotion effect As a result, the promotion failure production during the change is executed. When the big hit type is “first probability variation”, the determination value corresponding to a part of the random effect SR5 for determining the promotion effect is assigned to the determination result with the changing promotion effect, and the remaining determination values are set. It is assigned to the determination result without promotion effect during fluctuation. In this case, if the determination result indicates that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion success effect is executed. Further, when the jackpot type is “second probability variation”, all the numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the value of the random effect SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution are allotted to the determination result without the promotion effect during the change, and the change Neither the middle promotion success production nor the floating promotion promotion production is executed.

  In the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 32 (B), the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). In this case, the table is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect based on the promotion effect execution determination random number SR5. The jackpot promotion promotion execution determination table 165B is compared with the value of the random effect SR5 for promotion effect execution determination depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. Data (determination value) corresponding to a determination result indicating the presence / absence of a jackpot promotion promotion success effect or a jackpot promotion promotion failure effect. When the jackpot type is “normal”, all the numerical values (judgment values) compared with the value of the randomization SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution are allotted to the determination result of the jackpot medium promotion failure effect, and the jackpot medium promotion failure The production will be executed. When the jackpot type is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, all the numerical values (determination values) compared with the value of the random effect SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution are all determined to be that there is no promotion effect during the jackpot. Assigned to the result. Accordingly, neither the jackpot promotion promotion success effect nor the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, the determination value corresponding to a part of the random effect SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result with the jackpot promotion success effect, and the remaining determination values Is assigned to the determination result that there is a promotion promotion failure effect during the big hit. In this case, either the jackpot promotion promotion success effect or the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed according to the determination result.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 110, as a table for determining the decorative symbols to be displayed temporarily when the “slip” specific effect is executed, for example, FIG. ) To (D), temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are included. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D is used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 according to the table selection rule as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D has a temporary stop at the time of slipping / development chance according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the symbol display area where the decorative symbols are changed again. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for symbol determination, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped symbols. In other words, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A has a decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. According to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance, and the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1 The data (judgment value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B has a symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance, and the ornament that becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2 Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of symbols are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C has the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random stop SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development opportunity according to “1” to “8”, and the ornament that becomes the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3 Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of symbols are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D has a symbol number of a decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. A decoration (judgment value) that is compared with the value of the random stop SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance according to “1” to “8”, and becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4 Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of symbols are included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 110, for example, FIG. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D shown in (A) to (D) are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D indicate that when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4- 4. Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3 Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of re-variable display operations to be executed until the operation is performed. For example, the remaining number of re-variable display operations is “0” in the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo continuous variation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop symbol is stopped one time before that. The displayed decorative pattern variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is “1”, and the decorative symbol variation (pseudo-continuous variation) in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed two times before becomes “2”. What happens after the quasi-continuous variation in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped is executed so that the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo-variable variation) in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”? This corresponds to whether the pseudo continuous variation (variation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shows the total re-variation display operation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as the symbol, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C are selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super PF1-1. When the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of the special PG1 to 3, is “1”. The left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R, In the “medium” symbol display area 9 </ b> C, it is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ <b> 2-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-8, Super PA 4-4, Super PA 4-8, Super PB 3-4, Super PB 4-4, Super PB 5-4, Super PF1. -1 or special PG1-3, the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “2” The left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R. 2. Selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3, which is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the "medium" symbol display area 9C. . The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. If the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the stop symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”, the symbol display “left” is displayed. Left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the area 9L, right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and “middle” symbol display. In the area 9C, it is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 which is the intermediate symbol to be displayed for temporary stop. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the specific effect pattern is determined as the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the total re-variation display operation to be re-variable after the temporary stop display is performed only once, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table. When the variation pattern is the special PG1-3, the specific effect pattern is determined to be the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 or the pseudo-continuous TP2-2 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B illustrated in FIG. Since the total re-variation display operation for re-variation after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed is performed at most twice, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determining table 167D as the use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 34 (A) and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 34 (B) are left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” symbol display area 9L. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbol, It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by combinations of stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 34C includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, a right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol 2-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. Is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo-continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 configured by a combination of the middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2, and KZ3-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 34D includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, a right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. Is a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol, depending on which of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1-GC8 It includes data (determination values) corresponding to the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8 constituted by combinations of the middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3.

  By determining the temporary stop symbols using the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D, for example, as shown in FIG. 35, the pseudo continuous variation due to each specific effect pattern of the pseudo continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo continuous TP2-3. Depending on the number of executions, any of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8 may be used as a decorative symbol for temporary stop display in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Can be determined.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 110, as a table for determining a decorative design that is temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect “Development Chance” is executed, for example, FIG. A temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 36 is included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 indicates the chance of slipping / development according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” symbol display area 9L. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol, which is a development chance eye HC1 constituted by a combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3 -Data (determination value) corresponding to HC8 is included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 110, for example, a temporary table shown in FIG. A stop symbol determination table 169 is included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 169 has the same left middle right final display that is stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the confirmed decorative symbols that are the jackpot combinations. A numerical value (compared with the value of the random number SR2 for temporary stop symbol determination for promotion effect according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3. Corresponding to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, KZ7-3. Data to be processed (judgment value).

  The determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 110 includes a notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. The notice pattern type determination table 170 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of kinds of notice pattern types based on the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type. In the notice pattern classification determination table 170, when the variation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-1, non-reach PA1-2, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PC1-1, or non-reach PA1-3. , Non-reach PA1-4, non-reach PA1-6, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-2, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5 -3, super PB3-3, super PB4-3, and super PB5-3, depending on the variation pattern other than these variation patterns, A numerical value (determination value) to be compared, which has no notice or data corresponding to the notice pattern type of notice CY1 to notice CY3 (judgment) ) Including the.

  In the notice pattern type determination table 170, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4-4. 3. Corresponding to the case of a variation pattern (see FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a specific effect of “intro” of the super PB 5-3 is executed, the determination value corresponding to the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is All assigned without notice. Therefore, when the specific effect of “Intro” is executed, execution of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is limited. In the specific effect of “Intro”, the effect display in the specific effect is started in a short time after the decorative symbols start to change in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Is started and a notice effect is performed, the execution period overlaps. Therefore, in the advance notice pattern type determination table 170, a numerical value (compared with the value of the random number SR7 for the advance notice pattern type determination so that there is no advance notice in the case of a variation pattern in which a specific effect of “Intro” is executed) ( By assigning (determination value), it is possible to prevent the notice effect that the specific effect of “Intro” and the execution period overlap from being executed.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 110, for example, the preview pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. include. When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY1, the notice pattern judgment table 171A indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP1-1 to notice YP1 based on the first notice pattern determination random number SR8-1. -4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first notice pattern determination random number SR8-1 according to the variation pattern, and has no notice or notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-1. Data (determination value) corresponding to the notice pattern of YP1-4 is included.

  In the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4, the effect display in the notice effect of “character display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “character display” notice effect, a character image corresponding to each notice pattern of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY2, the notice pattern determination table 171B has no notice or a notice pattern based on the random number SR8-2 for second notice pattern determination, or the notice pattern YP2-1 to notice YP2. -4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The advance notice pattern determination table 171B is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second advance notice pattern according to the variation pattern, and has no notice or notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-1. Data (determination value) corresponding to the notice pattern of YP2 is included.

  In the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to the notice YP2-4, the effect display in the notice effect of the “step-up image” is performed in different effect display modes. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and then each notice pattern of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4 is displayed. Correspondingly, a plurality of types of effect images may be switched and displayed according to a predetermined order, or the effect images may not be switched.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY3, the notice pattern determination table 171C indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP3-1 to notice YP3 based on the third notice pattern determination random number SR8-3. -3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the third notice pattern random number SR8-3 according to the variation pattern, and has no notice or notice YP3-1 to notice. Data (determination value) corresponding to the notice pattern of YP3-3 is included.

  In the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to the notice YP3-3, the effect display in the notice effect of “mail display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “mail display” notice effect, an effect image that prompts the operation of the operation button 158 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 and then the notice YP3-1 to the notice is given in response to the operation button 158 being operated. If the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern of YP3-3 is displayed and the operation button 158 is not operated, the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern is not displayed. As described above, in the “mail display” notice effect, the effect operation changes in response to the operation button 158 being operated.

  In the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 41, values in the range of “1” to “170” are associated with the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 in which the specific effect is executed. Assigned without notice. Corresponding to the variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state becomes the reach state, a smaller number of determination values than the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 are assigned without notice. ing. For example, values in the range of “1” to “160” are assigned without notice corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4. For other variation patterns that reach reach, assigning a judgment value for determining the third notice pattern depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” and the type of reach (normal or super) Is different. Further, in response to the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PB1-1, and non-reach PC1-1 where the specific effect is not executed, non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1- More judgment values than the seven variation patterns are assigned without notice. That is, values in the range of “1” to “190” are assigned without notice. With such a setting, the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, compared with the variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state is a reach state. The ratio of executing the effect is reduced, and the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than that when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed. In addition, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is executed, the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect. The ratio of executing the notice effect with high reliability (possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”) is high, and the reliability is higher than when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern that reaches a reach state. The ratio of executing a high notice effect becomes low.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 110 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 42A, a notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. Various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in 43 are included. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 42 (A), the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from when the variation of the ornament symbol is started until the confirmed ornament symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as the variable display operation of the decorative design, the effect display operation in the reach effect, and the effect display operation in the specific effect as the pattern variation control pattern. Each design variation control pattern includes, for example, various types of display designs such as production control process timer setting values, production control process timer determination values, production display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and end codes. The control data for controlling the rendering operation is included, and the contents of various rendering controls, the switching timing of the rendering control, and the like are set in time series.

  In the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 42 (B), the control content of the effect operation corresponding to the notice effect, such as the effect display operation in the notice effect, is shown corresponding to each of the plural kinds of notice patterns. A plurality of types of data may be stored as the notice effect control pattern. Each notice effect control pattern is, for example, control for controlling various effect operations according to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. Including data, the contents of various effects control, switching timing of effects control, and the like are set in time series.

  The notice effect control pattern table 181 stores notice effect control patterns of notice CYP1-1 to notice CYP1-4 corresponding to the notice patterns of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1 is an effect control pattern for displaying the character image MC101 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 is an effect control pattern that displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC102 in correspondence with the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-3 is an effect control pattern for displaying the character image MC101 and the character image MC103 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-4 is an effect control pattern that displays the character images MC101 to MC103 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-4.

  The notice effect control pattern table 181 stores notice effect control patterns of notice CYP2-1 to notice CYP2-4 corresponding to each of the notice patterns of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. The notice control pattern of the notice CYP2-1 is an effect control pattern that displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1, and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. It is. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-2 displays the effect image of the second step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-2, and the effect control pattern that ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. It is. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-3 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-3, and after switching the effect image to the effect image of the second step, the notice effect This is an effect control pattern for ending. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-4 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-4, switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step, and further the third step. This is an effect control pattern for terminating the notice effect after switching to the effect image.

  Further, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-1-1 and the notice CYP3-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1, and the notice of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-2-1 and the notice CYP3-2-2 are stored corresponding to the pattern, and the notice CYP3-3-1 and the notice CYP3-3-3 are corresponded to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. Two notice effect control patterns are stored. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-1 is an effect control pattern for displaying the effect image before the operation of the operation button 158 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-2 is an effect control pattern for displaying an effect image after the operation of the operation button 158 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 is an effect control pattern for displaying the effect image before the operation of the operation button 158 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-2 is an effect control pattern that displays an effect image after the operation of the operation button 158 is detected, corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-1 is an effect control pattern that displays an effect image before the operation of the operation button 158 is detected, corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-2 is an effect control pattern that displays an effect image after the operation of the operation button 158 is detected, corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3.

  In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 43, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state are stored as the effect control patterns. . Each effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect operation in a big hit game state or a small hit game state such as an effect control process timer set value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The contents of various production controls according to the progress of the production, switching timing of production control, and the like are set in time series.

  For example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 44 is provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 110 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 44 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 31, etc. Are stored.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a counter that realizes a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 9. . The effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. In the effect control counter setting unit 193, data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters is stored.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 110 will be described. In this embodiment, the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 177 by using eight signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. Further, between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, a signal line of the effect control INT signal for transmitting the capture signal (effect control INT signal) is also wired.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 110 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control microcomputer 110, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a signal (capture instruction signal) that triggers the capture of the effect control command data.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 110 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the effect control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable means, for example, the first byte and the second byte of the effect control command data, respectively. The production control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern) for designating a variation pattern of an effect symbol (decoration symbol) that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of a special symbol. Command) (corresponding to the variation pattern XX). “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 110 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols).

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of the big hit game. The production control microcomputer 110 determines the display result of the decorative design and the production design in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H). It is called a command.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a symbol variation designation command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 110 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are an effect control command for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of a big hit game or the start of a small hit game (a big hit start designation command or a small hit start designation command: a fanfare designation command). is there. The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command and a jackpot start designation 2 designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of the big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game and an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the jackpot game is a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). The command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a promising big hit (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the small hit end screen, that is, for specifying the end of the small hit game (small hit end specifying command: ending 3 specifying command).

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) for designating that the first starting prize has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that there has been a second start winning. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command, and does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When the stored number is subtracted, the combined pending storage number after the subtraction may be designated by a combined pending storage number designation command.

  The command D000 (H) is a command indicating that the counter circuit 511 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Command D001 (H) is a command indicating that the abnormality notification is to be ended.

  The effect control microcomputer 110 (specifically, the effect control CPU 111) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 45, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  46 and 47 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the transmission timing of the effect control command. FIG. 46 (A) shows an example when a start prize (first start prize or second start prize) is generated. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first start prize designation command (or the second start prize designation command), and then continuously transmits the total pending storage number designation command.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 46B, the game control microcomputer 560, at the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern command, the symbol fluctuation designation command (the first symbol fluctuation designation command or the second symbol fluctuation designation command), the display result A specific command and a command for specifying the total pending storage count subtraction are transmitted. When the variable display time has elapsed, a symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted.

  Before transmitting the variation pattern command, a background designation command for designating a background image in the effect display device 9 according to the gaming state (for example, normal state / short time state / probability variation state) may be transmitted. Further, an effect control command indicating the number of reserved storages itself may be transmitted following the display result specifying command.

  FIG. 47A shows an example in a 15R jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits a jackpot start 1 designation command (or jackpot start 2 designation command) at the start of a big hit game, and sends a big prize opening opening designation command at the start of each round. At the end of the game, a designation command is transmitted after the big winning opening is opened, and a jackpot end designation command is transmitted at the end of the jackpot game.

  FIG. 47B shows an example when power supply is started (when power is turned on). The game control microcomputer 560 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command after transmitting a power-on designation command.

  FIG. 47C shows an example when power supply is resumed (when power failure is restored). The game control microcomputer 560 continuously transmits the power-on designation command and the total pending storage number designation command. The value of the total pending storage number counter formed in the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply is resumed, the game control microcomputer 560 Based on the stored total pending storage number counter value, a total pending storage number designation command is transmitted.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports related to a switch for detecting a game ball in the game control microcomputer. As shown in FIG. 48, the detection signals of the count switch 23, the gate switch 32a, the second start port switch 14a, and the first start port switch 13a are input to the bits 4 to 7 of the input port 0, respectively. The input port 0 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the display random number update process (steps S17 and S26) shown in FIGS. In the display random number update process, the CPU 56 reads a random number value from the random number circuit 506 (step S421). Then, the read random number value is added as an added value to the contents of a counter (formed in the RAM 55) for generating random 2-2 (step S422).

  If the range that the random number value of the random number circuit 506 can take is 0 to 65535, the added value does not fall within the range of 1 to 239 that is the range of MR2-2. Therefore, the CPU 56 performs a calculation for keeping the added value in the range of 1 to 239. For example, an operation of dividing the added value by 239 is performed, and (remainder + 1) is set as the operation value. The range that the calculation value can take is 1 to 239. Also, the upper limit value of the range of MR2-2 may be added or subtracted to fall within the range. Further, an addition upper limit value (for example, 7) is provided for the addition value, and if the read random number value exceeds the addition upper limit value, the addition upper limit value is subtracted or added until the addition upper limit value is reached. Also good.

  Further, the CPU 56 adds the random number value read from the random number circuit 506 as the added value to the contents of the counter (formed in the RAM 55) for generating the random number 3 (step S423).

  If the range that the random number value of the random number circuit 506 can take is 0 to 65535, the added value does not fall within the range of 1 to 241 that is the range of MR3. Therefore, the CPU 56 performs a calculation for keeping the added value in the range of 1 to 241. For example, an operation of dividing the added value by 241 is performed, and (remainder + 1) is set as the operation value. The range that the calculation value can take is 1 to 241. Alternatively, the upper limit value of the MR3 range may be added or subtracted to fall within the range. Further, an addition upper limit value (for example, 7) is provided for the addition value, and if the read random number value exceeds the addition upper limit value, the addition upper limit value is subtracted or added until the addition upper limit value is reached. Also good.

  Further, the CPU 56 adds the random number value read from the random number circuit 506 as an added value to the content of the counter (formed in the RAM 55) for generating random 4 (step S424).

  If the range that the random number value of the random number circuit 506 can take is 0 to 65535, the added value does not fall within the range of 1 to 251 that is the range of MR4. Therefore, the CPU 56 performs a calculation for keeping the added value in the range of 1 to 251. For example, an operation of dividing the added value by 251 is performed, and (remainder + 1) is set as the operation value. The range that the calculation value can take is 1 to 251. Alternatively, the upper limit value of the MR4 range may be added or subtracted to fall within the range. Further, an addition upper limit value (for example, 7) is provided for the addition value, and if the read random number value exceeds the addition upper limit value, the addition upper limit value is subtracted or added until the addition upper limit value is reached. Also good.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S27) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56). In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that a game ball has won the first start port switch 13a or the second start winning port 14 for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 13. If the second start port switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning is generated, start port switch passing processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state. The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows. The game control microcomputer 560 executes variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Sometimes, execution of variable display is controlled by a common processing routine (special symbol process).

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is ready to start the variable display of the special symbol, it checks the total number of reserved memories (start prize memory number). The total number of reserved memories can be confirmed by the count value of the total number of reserved memories. If the total number of pending storage is not 0, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to step S301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) for starting the change is determined. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from when the variable display is started until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variable symbol variation display time. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the effect control microcomputer 110 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. Update to a value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the special symbol display 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 110 is performed. When the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 or 8 in this example) corresponding to step S305 or step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). The effect control microcomputer 110 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for opening the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening open process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit game state or the small hit game to the effect control microcomputer 110, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 110 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that the small hit pre-release process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the small hit pre-release process is a process for starting the small hit game.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 110, a process for confirming the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 110 to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  51 and 52 are flowcharts showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the on-hold storage process, the CPU 56 detects that the game ball has won the first start port switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start prize port 13 or the second start prize port 14. If the second start opening switch 14a is turned on, that is, if the first start prize or the second start prize is generated, a process of generating and storing a random number is executed. Specifically, the data of the input port 0 (see FIG. 48) is read and loaded into a predetermined area of the register or RAM 55, for example. If bit 6 in the loaded data is 1 (step S370), data indicating “second” is set in the start port pointer (step S372). If bit 7 of input port 0 is 1, data indicating “first” is set in the start port pointer (step S373). If bits 6 and 7 are 0, the process ends.

  The start port pointer is formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. For example, data indicating “first” is “0”, and data indicating “second” is “1”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a random number generation process for generating a random number for determination (step S374). If the abnormality notification flag is set, the process ends (step S375). The abnormality notification flag is set when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the counter circuit 511. The reason why the random number generation process is performed even when the abnormality notification flag is set is that, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the abnormality of the counter circuit 511 has been resolved in the random number generation process.

  If the abnormality notification flag is not set, the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the start port pointer is incremented by 1 (step S376). Specifically, when the starting port pointer indicates “first”, the value of the first reserved memory number counter indicating the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, and the starting port pointer indicates “second”. If it is, the value of the second reserved memory number counter indicating the second reserved memory number is incremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number which is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (step S377).

  Further, the value of the start port pointer is stored in an area corresponding to the value of the summed pending storage number counter in the pending identification data storage unit 151C (see FIG. 24) (step S378).

  In the random number generation process in step S374, the CPU 56 generates and stores the MR1 value that is a random number to be compared with the jackpot determination value (see FIG. 53), but random 2-1 (MR2-1), random 2-2 (MR2-2), random 3 (MR3) and random 4 (MR4) may also be extracted and stored.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the start winning designation command indicated by the start port pointer. Specifically, when the starting port pointer indicates “first”, a first starting winning designation command is transmitted, and when the starting port pointer indicates “second”, the second starting winning specification is specified. A command is transmitted (step S379). In addition, a total pending storage number designation command is transmitted (step S380). The total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the first start prize designation command or the second start prize designation command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 110, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S29).

  The value of the first reserved memory number counter is set in the EXT data of the first start winning designation command. The value of the second reserved storage number counter is set in the EXT data of the second start winning designation command. The value of the total pending storage number counter is set in the EXT data of the total pending storage number designation command.

  If the start port pointer indicates “second” (step S381), it is checked whether bit 7 of the loaded data is 1 (step S382). If bit 7 of the loaded data is 1, data indicating “first” is set in the start port pointer (step S383), and the process proceeds to step S374. If the start port pointer indicates “first” (step S384), it is checked whether bit 6 of the loaded data is 1 (step S385). If bit 6 of the loaded data is 1, data indicating “second” is set in the start port pointer (step S386), and the process proceeds to step S374. When both the bits 6 and 7 of the loaded data are 1 by the processing of steps S381 to S383 and steps S384 to S386, that is, both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are turned on. When the state is reached, the processing of steps S374 to S379 is executed for the second start port switch 14a corresponding to bit 7, and immediately after that, the steps S374 to S380 are performed for the first start port switch 13a corresponding to bit 6. Will be executed. Further, after the processing of steps S374 to S380 is executed for the first start port switch 13a corresponding to bit 6, the processing of steps S374 to S380 is executed for the second start port switch 14a corresponding to bit 7 immediately. It will be.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the random number generation processing (processing for generating MR1) in step S376. In the random number generation process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the start port pointer is “first” (step S401). When the value of the start port pointer is “first”, the CPU 56 reads the count value from the first latch circuit 514 (step S402). That is, the count value of the counter circuit 511 latched by the first latch circuit 514 is read. When the value of the start port pointer is “second”, the CPU 56 reads the count value from the second latch circuit 515 (step S403).

  Then, the CPU 56 compares the count value read from the first latch circuit 514 or the second latch circuit 515 with the stored value. The stored value is a value stored in the RAM 55, and is a count value read from the first latch circuit 514 or the second latch circuit 515 last time. When the count value read from the first latch circuit 514 or the second latch circuit 515 is not the same value as the stored value, that is, when the previously read count value is not the same as the current read count value (the count value of the counter circuit 511) Means stepping up) (step S404), the process proceeds to step S411.

  When the count value read from the first latch circuit 514 or the second latch circuit 515 is the same value as the stored value (meaning that the count value of the counter circuit 511 does not advance), it is formed in the RAM 55. The value of the counter for the number of unrunning steps is incremented by 1 (step S405). When the value of the unrunning number counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 10) (step S406), control for transmitting an abnormality notification start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 110 is performed (step S407). Also, an abnormality notification flag is set (step S408).

  In step S411, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the abnormality notification flag is set. If the abnormality notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S414. If the abnormality notification flag is set, the abnormality notification flag is reset (step S412), and control for transmitting an abnormality notification end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 110 is performed (step S413). When the abnormality notification flag is set, the count value of the counter circuit 511 is stepping up (steps S404 and S411) means that the counter circuit 511 is operating normally after being determined to be abnormal. Since it has been confirmed, the CPU 56 performs the processes of steps S412 and S413.

  Then, the CPU 56 clears (sets to 0) the value of the unrunning number counter (step S414), and proceeds to step S409.

  In step S409, the CPU 56 stores the count value read from the first latch circuit 514 or the second latch circuit 515 in the process of step S402 or step S403 in the RAM 55 as a saved value.

  Then, random 1 is extracted (step S415), and the count value read from the first latch circuit 514 or the second latch circuit 515 in the process of step S402 or step S403 is added to random 1 (step S416). Note that the range that the random 1 can take is 0 to 65535 (see FIG. 7), and the range that the count value of the counter circuit 511 can take is also 0 to 65535.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs an operation of dividing the added value (processing result of step S416) by 65536, and sets the remainder as the calculated value (step S417). The range that the calculation value can take is 0 to 65535.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets the value obtained in the process of step S417 as MR1, and holds the one indicated by the start port pointer of the first hold storage buffer 151A and the second hold storage buffer 151B shown in FIG. A process of storing in the storage area in the storage buffer is executed (step S418). Specifically, since the start port pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the software random number in the storage area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved storage number counter of the first reserved storage buffer 151A.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the start condition is satisfied, the count value output from the counter circuit 511 and the random number 1 that is a software random number are added, and the added value is set within a predetermined numerical range (this example Then, it is configured to divide by the number of numerical values in the range from 0 to 65535 (in this example, 65536), and the remainder resulting from the division is used as the determination numerical value (MR1). There is an effect that the randomness of the value of MR1) is not deteriorated, and further, the act of illegally extracting the value of the random number for determination at the timing coincident with the determination value can be prevented. Even if the counter circuit 511 receives a fraudulent act that does not change the count value output, the value for determination (MR1) changes within a predetermined numerical range due to the random 1 created by software. The numerical value for determination is changed to a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 65535 in this example) by random 1 that changes in the same numerical value range as that of the count value output by the counter circuit 511 (the numerical value range of the numerical value for determination is also the same). It is difficult to establish the start condition aiming at the timing when the numerical value for determination coincides with the predetermined determination value. That is, even if the count value output from the counter circuit 511 is fixed (the count value does not change), a predetermined operation (in this example, division) is performed on a numerical value based on random 1 that changes within a predetermined numerical range. ) Results in a random value within a predetermined numerical range, and measures against fraud are being taken.

  Further, in FIG. 12 and the like, a plurality of determination values are shown as continuous numerical values (0 to 109 in FIG. 12). However, actually, the plurality of determination values are skipped in a predetermined numerical range. Assigned as a value (discrete value). If the plurality of determination values are discrete values, the burden of the determination process of the CPU 56 (the process of determining whether there is a determination value that matches the random number) increases, but it is effective as a countermeasure against fraud. .

  Further, when the count value output from the counter circuit 511 does not change over a period of time that the count value of the non-running counter reaches a predetermined value, an abnormality notification start designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 110. The As will be described later, when the production control microcomputer 110 receives the abnormality notification start designation command, it performs abnormality notification using a production device or the like. Therefore, even if an illegal act that does not change the count value output by the counter circuit 511 is received, it can be easily recognized by a game store clerk or the like.

  In this embodiment, when the abnormality notification flag is set, the processing after step S376 is not executed. That is, even if it is detected that there has been a start winning, the number of reserved memories is increased. Etc. (see step S375), but the processing after step S376 may be executed even when the abnormality notification flag is set. In the case of such a configuration, even if the count value of the unadvanced counter accidentally becomes the same value over a period that reaches a predetermined value, processing for increasing the number of reserved memories is executed, and the player Is prevented from being penalized.

  In this embodiment, the count value output from the counter circuit 511 is not distinguished from the count value of the counter circuit 511 via the first latch circuit 514 and the count value of the counter circuit 511 via the second latch circuit 515. Although it is determined whether or not there is a change (see steps S402 to S404), for each of the count value of the counter circuit 511 via the first latch circuit 514 and the count value of the counter circuit 511 via the second latch circuit 515, You may make it perform the process of step S405-S408. In that case, the failure notification flag is set even if any latch circuit fails or a latch signal (that is, a detection signal of the start port switch) is continuously input to any latch circuit. can do.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects that the count value output from the counter circuit 511 has changed while the abnormality notification flag is set, an abnormality notification end designation command is transmitted. However (see steps S404, S411, and S413), the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured not to execute the process of step S413 (not transmit the abnormality notification end designation command). In that case, for example, when the production control microcomputer 110 receives a start prize designation command (see step S379) transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 after receiving the abnormality notification start designation command, an abnormality is detected. It is determined that it has been resolved.

  In addition, step-by-step notification regarding abnormality notification may be performed. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a corresponding command to the effect control microcomputer 110 each time the count value of the unrunning counter increases by a predetermined value. When receiving the abnormality notification start designation command, the effect control microcomputer 110 performs abnormality notification using the effect device (for example, the effect display device 9, the light emitter, and the speaker 27) (see step S646 described later). When a command is transmitted each time the count value of the non-running counter increases by a predetermined value, the count value of the non-running counter increases (the count of the counter circuit 511) in response to the reception of those commands. (Equivalent to the number of times the value has not been changed)), the abnormality notification is performed using the effect device. For example, the output sound from the speaker 27 is increased or the “abnormality occurrence” displayed on the effect display device 9 as the count value of the count value of the counter circuit 511 continues to increase is increased. The character size is increased, the blinking cycle of the light emitters (lamps and LEDs) provided in the gaming machine is shortened, or the number of lighting is increased.

  54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated. If the total number of reserved storage is not 0, the CPU 56 reads data in the area of the storage number 1 (the area in which the oldest data is stored) in the storage identification data storage unit 151C (step S52). Further, the value of the total pending storage number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the content of the pending identification data storage unit 151C is shifted (step S53). That is, the data stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage number n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the storage identification data storage unit 151C is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage number (n−1).

  When the data read from the hold identification data storage unit 151C in the process of step S52 is “first” (step S54), the CPU 56 saves the storage area corresponding to the hold storage number = 1 in the first hold storage buffer 151A. Each random number value stored in is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Further, the value of the first reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S56). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer 151A is set to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Store in the corresponding storage area. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers are extracted always coincides with the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that.

  And CPU56 sets the 1st special symbol fluctuation flag which shows the fluctuation | variation of a 1st special symbol (step S57), and transfers to step S65.

  When the data read from the hold identification data storage unit 151C is “second” (step S54), the CPU 56 stores the data in the save area corresponding to the number of hold storages = 1 in the second hold storage buffer 151B. Each random number value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S61). Further, the value of the second reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S62). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer 151B is set to the second reserved memory number = n−1. Store in the corresponding storage area. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that.

  Then, the CPU 56 resets the first special symbol variation flag indicating the variation of the first special symbol (step S63), and proceeds to step S65. When the first special symbol variation flag is in the reset state, the variation of the second special symbol is indicated.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, the first special symbol variation flag is set or reset according to the data (“first” or “second”) set in the holding identification data storage unit 151C. In the subsequent processing, processing related to the first special symbol or processing related to the second special symbol is executed depending on whether or not the first special symbol variation flag is set. Can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol. Further, in this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer 151A and the second reserved storage buffer 151B are provided separately, but one reserved storage buffer (the start winning regardless of the first starting winning prize and the second starting winning prize) Random numbers are stored in the order in which they are generated, provided that the first start winning memory number and the second starting winning memory number are managed separately), steps S55 to S57. And the processes in steps S61 to S63 can be made common.

  In step S65, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the random number MR1 stored in the random number buffer area matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. When the probability variation flag is set, it is determined whether or not the value of MR1 matches the determination value corresponding to the probability variation flag “ON” in FIG. 12, and when the probability variation flag is not set, the MR1 value is set. It is determined whether or not the value matches the determination value corresponding to the probability variation flag “OFF” in FIG. If they match, the process proceeds to step S71. If they do not match, it is checked whether the value of MR1 matches any of the small hit determination values (step S66). If they match, a small hit flag is set (step S67). Then, the process proceeds to step S68.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 13 is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). When the first special symbol variation flag is set, the one corresponding to “first” in FIG. 13 is selected, and when the first special symbol variation flag is not set, the “first” symbol in FIG. The one corresponding to “2” is selected. Then, the value of random 2-1 (MR2-1) is extracted (in the form in which random 2-1 is also stored in the random number buffer area, it is read from the random number buffer area), and the value corresponding to the value of MR2-1 is supported. The type (“normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability”) is determined as the jackpot type (step S73). Further, the data (“00” to “04”) indicating the determined jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). Then, the process proceeds to step S68.

  In step S68, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol. Specifically, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be “normal”, “3”, which is a normal jackpot symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined from “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, “7”, which is the probability variation big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. Further, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”, “1”, which is a two round big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S69).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91).

  If the big hit flag is set, the big hit variation pattern type determination is performed according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the tables 132A to 132I is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S101. The CPU 56 can determine the gaming state based on the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  When the small hit flag is set, as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, the small hit variation pattern according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected (steps S93 and S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the table selection rule shown in FIG. 17 (D) is based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. Accordingly, one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected as a table used for determining whether or not the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state (step S95). Further, MR2-2 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 2-2 (MR2-2) (step S96). Then, the CPU 56 reaches the reach state corresponding to the value that matches the value of MR2-2 in the area corresponding to the total pending storage number (the value of the total pending storage number counter) in any of the selected reach determination tables 134A to 134C. Whether or not to reach is determined based on the data indicating the presence or absence of, and the type of effect when not reaching or the type of reach when reaching is determined (step S97).

  If it is decided to reach, the variation pattern type is determined according to the reach type (reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1 or reach HC2-1) determined in the process of step S97. One of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types (step S99). If it is decided not to reach, the types of effects determined in step S97 (non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1- 1 or non-reach HC1-2), one of non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. (Step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  In step S101, the CPU 56 extracts the value of MR3 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 3 (MR3). Then, based on the extracted value of MR3, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the table selected in the process of step S92, S94, S99 or S100 (step S102).

  In the processes of steps S101 and S102, the decorative pattern variation pattern type corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is determined, or the decorative pattern variation pattern type corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is determined. Regardless of this, the variation pattern type is determined using the common random number MR3. Further, the variation pattern type is determined using the common random number MR3 regardless of the presence or absence of the reach state determined in step S97. That is, with respect to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern type can be determined by a common processing module.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C as the tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. One of the determination tables 138A and 138B is selected (step S103). Further, the value of MR4 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 4 (MR4) (step S104). Then, based on the extracted value of MR4, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103 (step S105).

  Next, an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 110 (step S106). Further, control is performed to transmit the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 45) to the effect control microcomputer 110 (step S107). When the first special symbol variation flag is set, the first symbol variation designation command is transmitted. When the first special symbol variation flag is not set, the second symbol variation designation command is transmitted.

  Moreover, the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started (step S108). For example, a start flag corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. When the first special symbol variation flag is set, the first special symbol variation is started, and when the first special symbol variation flag is not set, the second special symbol variation is started. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S109). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302) (step S110). In addition, you may comprise so that the process of step S107 may be performed before the process of step S106. That is, the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command may be transmitted before the variation pattern command is transmitted.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs a control to transmit an effect control command (see FIG. 45) of any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 7 designation according to the type of jackpot that has been lost or determined. Do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If it is not set, and if the small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a display result 7 designation command (steps S112 and S113). When the small hit flag is not set, control for transmitting the display result 1 designation command is performed (step S114). When the big hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit any effect control command from display result 2 designation to display result 6 designation (step S111). Which effect control command is to be transmitted is determined based on data (see FIG. 13 and the like) indicating the jackpot type stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155.

  Next, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command designating that the total pending storage number is subtracted by 1 is transmitted (step S115). Instead of transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S116).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step S121), and when the variable time timer times out (step S122), the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (step S304). The updated value is updated (step S123). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, when the first special symbol variation flag is set, the CPU 56 sets an end flag corresponding to the first special symbol that is referred to in the special symbol display control process of step S33. Control is performed to terminate the change of one special symbol and to derive and display a stop symbol on the first special symbol display 8a (steps S130 and S131). If the first special symbol variation flag is not set, the end flag corresponding to the second special symbol is set to end the variation of the second special symbol, and the stop symbol is derived to the second special symbol display 8b. Display control is performed (steps S130 and S132). Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 110 for production control is performed (step S133). If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S139 (step S134).

  When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (step S135), and performs control to transmit a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 110 (step S136). Specifically, if it is determined to be a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted, and if not, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. Whether or not it is determined to be a promising big hit is determined based on data (see FIG. 13 and the like) indicating the big hit type stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155.

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S137). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S138).

  In step S139, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set. If the time reduction flag is set, the value of the time reduction counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (step S140). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, the time reduction flag is reset (step S142). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S143). If the small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 110 (step S144). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S145). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (step S146). If the small hit flag is not set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S147).

  In the big winning opening opening pre-processing, when the big hit display time timer is set, the CPU 56 controls to open the big winning opening when the big hit display time timer times out, and sets the big winning opening opening time timer. A value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 29 seconds for normal big hits and probable big hits, 0.5 seconds for sudden hits) is set, and the value of the special symbol process flag is processed during the big winning opening opening ( Update to a value corresponding to step S306). The case where the big hit display time timer is set is the case before the start of the first round. When the interval timer (timer for determining the interval time between rounds) is set, when the interval timer times out, control is performed to open the big prize opening and the opening time ( For example, a value corresponding to 29 seconds is usually set for a big hit and a probable big hit, and 0.5 seconds is set for a sudden hit), and the special symbol process flag value is set to a process for opening a big winning opening (step S306). Update to a value corresponding to.

  In the process for opening the big prize opening, when the big prize opening time timer times out or the number of winning balls to the big prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the CPU 56 sets the value of the number-of-opening counter. -1. If the final round has not ended, control is performed to close the special winning opening, and a value corresponding to the interval time is set in the interval timer, and the value of the special symbol process flag is processed before the special winning opening is processed. Update to a value corresponding to (step S305). When the final round is completed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S307).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S150). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S161. When the big hit end display timer is not set and the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise” (step S151), a probability change flag is set to shift the gaming state to the probability change state (step S157). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S154.

  If the big hit type is not “probability change” or “surprise accuracy”, a time reduction flag is set to shift the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S152), and 100 is set in the time reduction counter (step S153).

  Further, the big hit flag is reset (step S154), and a control for transmitting a big hit end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 110 is performed (step S155). If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, a jackpot end 2 designation command is transmitted. If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set, a jackpot termination 1 designation command is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S156), and the processing is ended.

  In step S161, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S162). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S163).

  Note that the processes of steps S152, S153, and S157 may be executed immediately before the process of step S163 or after the process of step S163.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 110 (specifically, the effect control CPU 111) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 111 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 111 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 111 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 111 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 111 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 111 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number used for determining the effect sunlamp is executed (step S706). Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer in the form of a ring buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 45) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  63 to 65 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 111 checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 111 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 111 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 111 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 111 receives the display result specifying command (display result 1 specifying command, display result 2 specifying command or display result 3 specifying command). The display result specifying command storage area formed in the RAM is stored (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 111 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 111 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 111 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  Further, if the received production control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 111 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S643), the effect control CPU 111 sets a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (step S644).

  When the received effect control command is an abnormality notification start designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 111 performs abnormality notification using the effect device (for example, the effect display device 9, the light emitter, and the speaker 27). (Step S646).

  When performing the abnormality notification using the effect device, for example, the effect control CPU 111 causes the effect display device 9 to display characters such as “occurrence of abnormality” as the error notification by display. In addition, a sound corresponding to the occurrence of an abnormality (a sound different from the sound used while the game is in progress) is output from the speaker 27 as an abnormality notification by sound. Further, as an abnormality notification by the light emitting member, the lighting mode of the light emitter (lamp or LED) provided in the gaming machine is set to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the abnormality (a mode different from the mode used while the game is in progress). The abnormality notification may be performed using any one or more of abnormality notification by display, abnormality notification by sound, and abnormality notification by light emitting member.

  If the received effect control command is an abnormality notification end designation command (step S647), the effect control CPU 111 ends the abnormality notification (step S648).

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an abnormality notification end designation command when determining that the abnormality of the counter circuit 511 has been resolved, and the effect control CPU 111 receives the abnormality notification end designation command. Although the abnormality notification is terminated based on the fact (see FIG. 53), the abnormality notification may be terminated when other conditions are satisfied. For example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the abnormality notification, the effect control CPU 111 may end the abnormality notification. In addition, when either the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an abnormality notification end designation command or a predetermined time elapses after the abnormality notification is started, the effect control CPU 111 determines that an abnormality has occurred. You may make it complete | finish notification. Further, the gaming control microcomputer 560 may not perform the control for transmitting the abnormality notification end designation command, and the effect control CPU 111 may continue the abnormality notification until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. In such a case, the abnormality notification is terminated when the power is turned on again. In addition, when a reset switch that can be operated by a game shop clerk or the like is provided inside the gaming machine or the like, and it is detected that a press signal is output from the switch (for example, via an input port) In addition, the effect control CPU 111 may end the abnormality notification.

  If the received presentation control command is a combined pending storage number designation command (step S651), the presentation control CPU 111 uses the second byte data (EXT data) of the combined pending storage count designation command as a combined pending storage count storage area. (Step S652).

  If the received effect control command is the first start winning designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 111 sets the first start winning flag (step S654). If the received effect control command is the second start winning designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 111 sets the second start winning flag (step S656). If the received effect control command is a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 111 sets a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag (step S658).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 111 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S659). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 111 performs one of steps S800 to S806 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is realized. However, the effect symbol (decoration symbol) synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is realized. Control related to variable display and control related to variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol are executed in one effect control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the production control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the production symbol (decoration symbol) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) Control to derive and display. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805).

  Big hit game processing (step S805): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when a special winning opening opening designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S806).

  Big hit end processing (step S806): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 111 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  68 and 69 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 111 confirms whether or not it is determined to be off (step S501). Whether it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be off, it is confirmed whether a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received as the fluctuation pattern command (step S502). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined, for example, based on data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 111 uses the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command as a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development chance”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S503). For example, if the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern of non-reach PA1-7 (see FIG. 10), it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development opportunity”. .

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development chance eye”, the effect control CPU 111 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbols constituting any of the development chance points HC1 to HC8 ( Step S504). In the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 26D is selected as the use table. Further, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, FZ1 that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8. The combination of −6 is determined as the stop symbol for the decorative symbol.

  When it is determined in the process of step S503 that the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, the effect control CPU 111 determines a stop symbol of the decorative pattern that does not reach (step S505). In the process of step S505, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 26A is selected as the use table. Next, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 26B is selected as a use table. Subsequently, the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-2, the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. Further, by referring to the left and right output determination table 161 shown in FIG. 27 based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the left and right output type DC1-1 is Determine which of the multiple types. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 26C is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C.

  In the process of step S505, by referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the decorative symbols to be used as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. The stop symbol of the symbol does not become a reach combination or a jackpot combination. Further, even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 9A, the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 9B, FIG. There is no combination of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in (C) and a certain non-reach as shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 111 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbols constituting the reach combination (step S506). In the process of step S506, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 29A is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the same decorative design as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 29B is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-3, the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 become the decorative symbols and the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3. The design difference from the decorative design is determined. The effect control CPU 111 determines a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 according to the determined symbol difference.

  As described above, in the process of step S506, the effect control CPU 111 first uses the final stop symbol determination table 162A to “left” other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. ”And“ Right ”symbol display areas 9L and 9R, and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 are displayed. Next, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the ornament symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1 in the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. , FZ2-2 is determined as a design difference with respect to the decorative design, and according to the determined design difference, a decorative design as the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  If it is not determined to be out of place (step S501), the effect control CPU 111 determines whether or not it has been determined to be sudden or small hit (step S507). Whether or not it has been determined to be a sudden or small hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 6 designation command or a display result 7 designation command (see FIG. 45) is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined that the accuracy or small hit is determined, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is one of the variation patterns of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-4 (step S508). . As shown in FIG. 11, the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 are all variation patterns in which the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, the process proceeds to step S503, and the production control CPU 111 performs the process in step S504 or step S505. Then, the decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is determined.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is one of the special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, the effect control CPU 111 is designated by the variation pattern designation command in the process of step S503. If the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the special PG1-4 (see FIG. 11), it is determined that the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 pattern, the effect control CPU 111 determines that the designated variation pattern is the special PG2-1 to special PG2-3. It is determined whether or not any of the variation patterns (step S509). As shown in FIG. 11, the variation patterns of the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-3 are all variation patterns that perform a “normal” reach effect after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbols to the reach state. . Therefore, if the CPU 111 for effect control determines that it is one of the variation patterns of the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-3 in the process in step S509, the final combination constituting the reach combination in the process in step S506. A decorative design that is a stop design is determined.

  If it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 variation pattern), the designated variation pattern is one of the special PG3-1 to special PG3-3 variation patterns. Become. As shown in FIG. 11, the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3 are all variation patterns such that the display result of the decorative symbol is one of the chance chance items TC <b> 1 to TC <b> 4. Therefore, when any of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3 is designated, the effect control CPU 111 displays the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol constituting any of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4. Determine (step S510). In the process of step S510, the effect control CPU 111 selects the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4 that become any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4. -3 is determined as the final stop symbol.

  When it is not determined that the winning probability or the small hit (step S507), the effect control CPU 111 determines whether the big hit type is “normal big hit” or “third positive variation” (step S511). When the big hit type is “normal big hit” or “third probability variation”, the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is determined (step S512). In the process of step S512, the effect control CPU 111 selects the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, which become one of the normal jackpot combinations, are selected. The combination is determined as the final stop symbol.

  When the big hit type is neither “normal” nor “third probability change” (step S511), the effect control CPU 111 changes the probability according to whether the big hit type is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”. The final stop symbol of the big winning combination decorative symbol is determined (step S513). In the process of step S513, the CPU 111 for effect control selects the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, which become one of the combinations of probability variation big hits by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B. Is determined as the final stop symbol.

  After executing any one of steps S504, S505, and S506, or after executing any one of steps S510, S512, and S513, the effect control CPU 111 executes a specific effect setting process (step S514). ). Further, the changing promotion effect setting process is executed (step S515). Further, a notice effect setting process is executed (step S516).

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the specific effect setting process. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 111 determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that does not include the specific effect (step S551). If the variation pattern does not include the specific effect, the specific effect setting process ends.

  If the variation pattern includes a specific effect, it is determined whether the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “intro” (step S552). If it is any one of the specific effects of “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “intro”, the effect control CPU 111 selects a specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect as the use table (step S553). When the specific effect of “slip” is selected, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 31A is selected. When the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is selected, FIG. The specified specific effect pattern determination table 164B is selected, and when the specific effect is “Intro”, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 31C is selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 111 determines the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types (step S554). In the case of the “slip” specific effect, the value of the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted. Based on the value of the extracted random number SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is determined to be one of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A selected in the process of step S552. To do. In the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the value of the random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR6-2, the specific effect pattern is selected from any of the pseudo-series TP2-1 to the pseudo-series TP2-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164B selected in the process of step S552. To decide. In the case of the “Intro” specific effect, the value of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is extracted. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is read. And when the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, based on the value of the extracted random number SR6-3 and the previous effect value, when the fluctuation pattern is other than non-reach PA 1-6, it is extracted. Based on the value of the random number SR6-3, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of the intro TP3-1 to the intro TP3-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164C.

  When the specific effect is “intro” (step S555), the effect control CPU 111 determines the specific effect pattern according to the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 determined in the process of step S554. The previous effect value is updated with the previous effect buffer update setting value in the table 164C (step S556). For example, if the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 is determined in the process of step S554, the previous effect value is updated to 1. When the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-2 is determined in the process of step S554, the previous effect value is updated to 2. When the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-3 is determined in the process of step S554, the previous effect value is updated to 3.

  By executing the processing of step S556, any of the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “intro”. Each time it is determined, the previous effect value corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the determined intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 is updated. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined as one of a plurality of types, the determined type of effect operation is stored as an update value for the previous effect. In the process of step S554, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect value is read and the determination using the specific effect pattern determination table 164C as shown in FIG. 31C is performed. Thus, the specific effect pattern can be determined so that the same type of effect operation as the effect operation type stored as the previous effect value is not executed.

  If it is determined in step S552 that the specific effect is other than “slip”, “pseudo-run”, or “intro”, if it is determined in step S555 that the specific effect is other than “intro”, and step When the process of S556 is executed, the effect control CPU 111 determines whether or not the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “expansion chance” (step S557). If it is a specific effect other than “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, and “expansion chance”, the specific effect setting process is terminated. If it is any one of the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo ream”, and “development chance”, the effect control CPU 111 determines a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the specific effect (step S558).

  In the process of step S558, the effect control CPU 111 follows the table selection rule shown in FIG. 33E based on the specific effect pattern determined in the process of step S554 when the specific effect of “slip” is determined. Any one of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development opportunity is extracted. The right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, and the right temporary stop symbol are referred to by referring to any of the selected temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the value of the extracted random number SR3. 1-3, a decorative symbol to be one of the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 is determined.

  In the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the effect control CPU 111 sets the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation to a constant M based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S554. For example, the constant M is set to “1” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, and the constant M is set to “2” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2. In the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the constant M is set to “3”. In addition, “0” is set to the variable N indicating the determined number of combinations of temporary stop symbols. If the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 34A is selected as the use table, and the variation pattern is super PA3-4, super PA3-8. , Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3, The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted. Based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-1, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is referred to by referring to either the selected temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. Then, the variable N is updated by adding 1, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the process of step S558 ends. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 111 selects the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. Further, the value of the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3- 2. Determine the combination of KZ3-3. Then, the variable N is updated by adding 1, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the process of step S558 ends. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 111 selects the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. Further, the value of the random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1 and KZ4- that become any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. 2. Determine the combination of KZ4-3.

  In the case of a specific effect of “Development Chance”, the effect control CPU 111 selects the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 36 as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development opportunity is extracted. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the value of the extracted random number SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6 that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8. -3 combination is determined.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the changing promotion effect setting process (step S515). In the changing promotion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 111 determines whether or not the jackpot type is determined to be a jackpot other than “surprise” (step S571). If the jackpot is not determined, and if the jackpot type is “surprise” but determined to be a jackpot, the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  When the big hit type is determined to be a big hit other than “surprise”, the effect control CPU 111 selects the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. S572). Further, the value of the random number SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is extracted (step S573). Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR5, the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” by referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A selected in the process of step S572. The presence / absence of the changing promotion effect is determined (step S574). When it is determined that there is no changing promotion effect, the changing promotion effect setting process is ended. The effect control CPU 111 stores the value of the promotion effect execution random number SR5 extracted in step S573 in the RAM.

  If it is determined that there is a changing promotion effect, a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the changing promotion effect is determined (step S576). In the process of step S576, the effect control CPU 111 selects the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 37 as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of promotion effect is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 based on the value of the extracted random number SR2, the decorative symbols determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are displayed. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 is determined according to the number.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the notice effect setting process (step S516). In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 111 selects the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 38 as a use table (step S591). Further, the value of the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is extracted (step S592). Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR7, by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 170, the notice pattern type of no notice or notice notice CY1 to notice CY3 is determined according to the variation pattern ( Step S593). If it is determined without notice, the notice effect setting process is terminated.

  When it is determined to be one of the notice pattern types of the notice CY1 to the notice CY3, the effect control CPU 111 determines the notice pattern determination table 171A shown in FIG. 39 according to the decided notice pattern type and FIG. One of the indicated notice pattern determination table 171B and the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 41 is selected as a use table (step S595). When the notice pattern type of the notice CY1 is determined in the process of step S593, the notice pattern determination table 171A is selected. When the notice pattern type of the notice CY2 is decided, the notice pattern determination table 171B is selected and the notice is notified. When the notice pattern type CY3 is determined, the notice pattern determination table 171C is selected. Then, the notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S596).

  In the process of step S596, the effect control CPU 111 extracts the value of the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern when the notice pattern type is determined to be the notice CY1. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR8-1, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171A selected in the process of step S595, any of the notice patterns of no notice or notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4 is selected. Decide on.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be the notice CY2, the effect control CPU 111 extracts the value of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR8-2, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171B selected in the process of step S595, there is no notice or any of the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. Decide on something.

  The effect control CPU 111 extracts the value of the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern when the notice pattern type is determined to be the notice CY3. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR8-3, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171C selected in the process of step S595, any of the notice patterns of notice YP3-1 to notice YP3-3 is selected. Decide on.

  After executing the processing of steps S514 to S516, the effect control CPU 111 determines the effect control pattern to be one of a plurality of types (step S517). The CPU 111 for effect control, for example, according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect pattern determined by the process of step S554, the presence / absence of the promoted effect during change determined by the process of step S574, One of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in (A) is selected as a usage pattern. Also, any one of a plurality of types of notice effect control patterns stored in the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 42B is used in correspondence with the notice pattern determined in the process of step S596. Select as pattern.

  Next, the effect control CPU 111 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern (step S518). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S519).

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 111 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 111 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 111 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 73 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each production control pattern. Note that the process table is a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 42A, a notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 42B, and various effect control pattern tables shown in FIG. 182 corresponds to a more specific example.

  In addition, the CPU 111 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect component, the effect component as Control of the various lamps and speakers 27R, 27L as effect parts is executed (step S520). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70 in order to output audio from the speakers 27R and 27L.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S521), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the processing during the effect symbol variation (step S802). (Step S522).

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 111 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S842). When the process timer times out (step S843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S844). Further, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S845).

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S846), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S848). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S847), the process proceeds to step S848. Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, if the design confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop fluctuation.For example, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards is received. Even in such a case, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 111 performs control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol on the effect display device 9 when the confirmation command reception flag is set. And when it is determined to be a big hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804). If it is decided not to make a big hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  In the big hit display process, the effect control CPU 111 receives a big hit start 1 designation command reception flag, a big hit start 2 designation command reception flag indicating that a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start 2 designation command or a small hit designation command has been received, Control to display a game start screen corresponding to the hit designation command reception flag on the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805).

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the big hit game processing. In the big hit game processing, the effect control CPU 111 checks whether or not a big hit end designation command (big hit end 1 designation command and big hit end 2 designation command) or a small hit end designation command has been received (step S861). When the jackpot end designation command or the jackpot end designation command has been received, the jackpot effect that is performed corresponding to the jackpot gaming state is terminated (step S862), and the value of the effect process flag is set to the jackpot end process (step S862). Update to a value according to S806). In the process of step S862, for example, the effect control CPU 111 outputs a predetermined command signal to the VDP 109, outputs data indicating a predetermined sound effect signal to the audio output board 70, The control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35, and the effect operation of the big hit effect is ended.

  When the big hit end designation command and the small hit end designation command are not received, the effect control CPU 111 checks whether or not the promoted effect flag is set (step S864). The promotion effect in-progress flag is set in step S872 and is reset in step S876. The promotion effect flag is also reset when the process of step S862 is executed.

  When the promotion effect in-progress flag is not set, the effect control CPU 111 determines whether the value of the variation time timer matches the predetermined effect start determination value, thereby determining the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect. It is determined whether or not (step S865). The execution period of each round is short in the 2-round big hit state, but the production start determination value is a value set in the variable time timer (fluctuating so that the execution timing of the promotion effect during the big hit is not reached in the 2-round big hit state. A value longer than the value according to time).

  When it is determined that it is the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect, the effect control CPU 111 selects the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 32B as the use table (step S866). Further, by referring to the jackpot promotion promotion execution execution determination table 165B based on the value of the promotion effect execution random number SR5 extracted in the process of step S573 and stored in the RAM, the jackpot type is “normal” The presence / absence of the promotion effect during the big hit is determined according to any of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. If it is determined to perform the jackpot promotion promotion effect, a determination is made regarding execution of the jackpot promotion effect to determine whether to execute the jackpot promotion promotion effect or the jackpot promotion promotion effect (step S868). .

  When it is determined that it is not the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect, or when it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect in the process of step S868, the effect control CPU 111 determines the number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state. The effect operation of the big hit effect corresponding to a certain number of rounds is executed (step S870). In the process of step S870, the effect control CPU 111 specifies the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state from the special winning opening open designation command received from the main board 31 or the like. When the number of rounds is updated, the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 43, and the process timer is set. After that, in accordance with the process data read from the effect control pattern according to the process timer value, the effect operation during the big hit by the effect device is executed.

  In the process of step S870, when the setting corresponding to the reception of the special winning opening opening designation command is received from the main board 31, the variation pattern in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed immediately before the big hit gaming state is set. You may make it perform the setting for performing different production | presentation operation | movement according to the variation pattern classification classified. For example, when the big hit type of the variation pattern types of special CA4-1, special CB4-1, and special CC4-1 is “surprise” and when the variable display result is “small hit”, the common variation pattern type When the decorative symbols are variably displayed according to the variation patterns to be classified and then controlled to the big round state of two rounds, the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-2 and hit control CRE1-2 shown in FIG. The effect control patterns to be sequentially used are selected and read out, and the effect operation is set according to the effect control patterns. The decorative symbols are variably displayed by the variation patterns classified into the variation pattern types used only when the big hit type of the variation pattern types of special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2 is “surprise”. When the game is controlled to the big hit game state after 2 rounds, the effect control patterns of the hit start CST2-1 and the hit control CRE1-1 shown in FIG. The production operation according to the production control pattern is set.

  When it is determined in step S868 to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the effect control CPU 111 performs setting for starting the jackpot promotion effect (step S871). In the process of step S871, the effect control CPU 111 specifies the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state from the special winning opening open designation command received from the main board 31 or the like. Then, an effect control pattern for executing a promotion effect corresponding to the specified number of rounds is read from various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. It should be noted that the value of the notification content buffer (notification content buffer value) provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example, is determined depending on which of the big success promotion effect and the big success promotion effect is executed. You may make it set. As a specific example, the notification content buffer value is set to “1” when the big success promotion effect is executed, and the notification content buffer value is set to “0” when the big success promotion effect is executed. To do. Thereafter, the promotion effect flag is set to the on state (step S872).

  When it is determined in the process of step S864 that the flag indicating that the promoted effect is on, the effect control CPU 111, for example, does the timer value of the variable time timer match the effect end determination value indicated by the effect control pattern? It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect depending on whether or not (step S873). If it is not the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect, the effect operation of the jackpot promotion effect is executed (step S874). In the process of step S874, the effect control CPU 111 executes the effect operation of the jackpot promotion effect by the effect device according to the process data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value.

  If it is determined in step S873 that it is the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect, the effect control CPU 111 ends the jackpot promotion effect (step S875) and resets the promotion effect flag (step S876). .

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process. At the end of the big hit, the effect control CPU 111 determines whether or not the ending effect flag is set (step S881). The ending effect in-progress flag is set in the process of step S888 and reset in the process of step S891.

  When the ending effect flag is set, the effect control CPU 111 determines whether the big hit type is “normal” or not, based on the display result specifying command received from the main board 31 or the like ( Step S882). If it is not a normal big hit, it is determined whether or not the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S883). If the big hit type is “third probability variation”, for example, it is determined from the notification content buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 whether or not the promotion success effect has been executed (step S884). For example, when the notification content buffer value is “1”, it is determined that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed, and when the notification content buffer value is “0”, the jackpot promotion promotion effect is not executed. Is determined.

  When it is determined that the big hit type is other than “third probability variation”, or when it is determined in step S884 that the promotion success effect has been executed, the effect control CPU 111 performs a predetermined non-promotion ending effect. Settings for starting the production operation are performed (step S885). In the process of step S885, the effect control CPU 111 determines which of the 15 round big hit state or the 2 round big hit state is ended by the display result specifying command received from the main board 31 or the like. Then, according to the determination result of the jackpot gaming state to be finished, the effect control pattern that does not execute the promotion effect is read from the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 43, and the process timer is set.

  If it is determined in step S884 that the promotion success effect has not been executed, the effect control CPU 111 performs setting for starting the effect operation of the ending promotion success effect (step S886). In the process of step S886, the effect control CPU 111 reads the effect control pattern for executing the promotion success effect from the various effect control pattern table 182 in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, and sets the process timer and the like. Do.

  When it is determined in step S882 that the game is a normal big hit, the effect control CPU 111 performs setting for starting the effect operation of the ending promotion failure effect (step S887). In the process of step S887, the effect control CPU 111 reads the effect control pattern for executing the promotion failure effect from the various effect control pattern tables 182 in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, and sets the process timer and the like. Do.

  When any of the processes of steps S885 to S887 is executed, the effect control CPU 111 sets an ending effect flag (step S888).

  If it is determined in step S881 that the ending effect flag is set, the effect control CPU 111 matches, for example, the timer value of the variable time timer and the effect end determination value indicated by the effect control pattern. It is determined whether or not the end timing of the ending effect has come (step S889). The ending effect is an effect operation executed in response to the end of the big hit gaming state including the non-promotion ending effect, the ending promotion success effect, and the ending promotion failure effect.

  If it is determined in step S889 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect, the effect control CPU 111 executes the effect operation of the ending effect (step S890). In step S890, the effect control CPU 111 controls the effect operation of the ending effect by controlling the effect device according to the control data read from the effect control pattern in accordance with the timer value of the process timer. If it is determined in step S889 that it is the end timing of the ending effect, the effect control CPU 111 resets the ending effect flag and ends the ending effect (step S891). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S892).

  Next, a specific example of the effect operation in the display area of the effect display device 9 will be described. In the effect control board 80, for example, the effect control CPU 111 outputs a predetermined command signal to the VDP 109 in step S519 in FIG. 68 based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command received from the main board 31. Thus, the variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R provided in the display area of the effect display device 9.

  First, a specific example in the case where the variable display result of the decorative design is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “out of” will be described. FIG. 77 shows that, when the decorative display variable display mode is “non-reach”, when the specific effect is not executed, when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the “slip” specific effect is executed. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example when a specific effect of “end of development opportunity” is executed. When the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effects as shown in FIGS. 77 (C1) and (C2) are not executed. When the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 is designated, a specific effect of “slip” as shown in FIGS. 77 (E1) to (E4) is executed. When the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA 1-5 is designated, a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect as shown in FIGS. 77 (D1) to (D6) is executed. When the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 is designated, a specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” as shown in FIGS. 77 (F1) to (F6) is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 77A, for example, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” correspond to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display. In all, the decoration pattern starts to change. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the decorative symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, the last stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 26A is referred to in step S505 in FIG. Corresponding to the determination of the decorative symbol “6” as FZ1-1, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 77 (B). As shown in FIG. 31A, if the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach”, the specific design is performed. The effect pattern is always determined to be the slip TP1-1, and the “slip” specific effect that causes the decorative symbol to re-variate at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R is executed. Therefore, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L is not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. Further, when the specific effect of “end of development chance eye” is executed, the development chance eye HC6 is configured by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 26D in step S504 in FIG. In response to the combination of the decorative symbols to be determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 77 (B) is performed. . When the “pseudo-ream” specific effect is executed, the decorative symbol “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 in the process of step S505 in FIG. 68, and the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is displayed. Based on the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 34 (A) in step S558 in FIG. Corresponding to the determination as KZ2-2 and KZ2-3, a decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 77 (B) is performed.

  After that, when the specific effect is not executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (C1), the decorative symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in 77 (C2), after the decorative symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display). Is done. At this time, the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R and the “middle” symbol display area 9C refer to the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 26B in step S505 in FIG. In addition, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 26C together with the left / right outcome determination table 161 shown in FIG. 27, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are determined. Is done.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (D1), the decorative symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (D2), the decorative symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “middle” symbol display area 9C, thereby stopping the decorative symbol that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC6. Is displayed. At this time, for example, a temporary stop display such as a decorative fluctuation display is performed, and then the decorative symbols are changed again in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as shown in FIG. 77 (D3). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (D4) to (D6), “6”, “7”, and “4” are sequentially displayed in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the stop display (temporary stop display), the decorative symbols that are non-reach combinations are stopped (final stop display).

  When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (E1), the decorative symbol “5” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in FIG. 77 (E2), the decorative symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (E3), the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the decorative symbol of “7” is displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Here, as shown in FIG. 77 (E1), the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R is based on the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 determined in step S505 in FIG. 68, for example. In step S596 in FIG. 72, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A shown in FIG. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (E4), after the decorative symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination stops. Displayed (final stop display).

  When the specific effect of “end of development opportunity” is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (F1), the decorative symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (F2), the “7” decorative symbol is also stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” symbol display area 9C. As a result, the decorative symbols constituting the development chance HC6 are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (F3), an effect display is performed such that the temporarily stopped decorative design rotates in a certain direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 77 (F4), the decorative design is displayed. An effect display is performed so as to make the player expect that the variable display state will reach the reach state. Here, if the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped from the effect display as shown in FIG. 77 (F4) is rotated in the reverse direction, the development of the reach state occurs. In this example, there is no development that reaches the reach state, and for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (F5), an effect display is performed such that the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols in the rotated state is restored. Therefore, the decorative symbols constituting the development chance eye HC6 are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display operation example in a case where the specific effect of “intro” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, a specific effect of “Intro” as shown in FIG. 78 is executed. In FIG. 78 (A), for example, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are decorated in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol variable display. The design changes. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the “3” decorative symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and “2” is displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. "" Is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and the character image CH1 is displayed at a display position corresponding to the "medium" symbol display area 9C. The character image CH1 may be a reach effect that is executed when the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state later, and may appear as an effect image.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), after the effect display that updates the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R is performed, FIG. As shown in FIG. 4D, in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, “4” in the “left” symbol display area 9L is updated to the decorative symbol “4”, and “3” in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Each updated display on the decorative design is performed. Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), after the effect display that further updates the decorative symbols updated and displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R is performed. As shown in FIG. 78 (F), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” symbol display area 9L, the updated display to the “2” decorative symbol is displayed, and in the “right” symbol display area 9R, “1” is displayed. "Is updated and displayed on the decorative symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), with the change of the character image CH1, an effect display that updates the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R. As shown in 80 (H) to (K), “2” decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and “right” symbol display areas 9R are “ The decorative symbols “1” to “3” are updated and displayed in a predetermined order. Thereafter, in the “right” symbol display area 9R, for example, an effect display that updates the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 78 (L) is performed, and then “3” as shown in FIG. 78 (M). Is temporarily stopped. When the specific effect of “intro” is finished in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, the decorative symbols that are non-reach combinations are stopped and displayed (final stop display). .

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example when the specific effect of “intro” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. Any of the variation patterns of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PB3-3, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3 by the variation pattern designation command When is specified, a specific effect of “intro” as shown in FIG. 79 is executed. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 79, the same effect display as the effect display shown in FIGS. 78A to 78L is performed in the portions of FIGS. Thereafter, in the “right” symbol display area 9R, for example, as shown in FIG. 79 (M), the decorative symbol “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. The variable display state becomes the reach state together with the decorative pattern that is displayed. When the specific effect of “Intro” is finished, for example, as shown in FIG. 79 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, a reach effect corresponding to the change of the variable display state to the reach state is started. After that, decorative symbols that are combinations of reach, decorative symbols that are combinations of jackpots, etc. are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  80 to 82 are explanatory diagrams illustrating display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In the example shown in FIG. 80 (A), for example, in response to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” In all, the decoration pattern starts to change. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80B, the decorative symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  And, for example, when the specific effect of “slip” is executed as when the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as shown in FIGS. 80 (C1) to (C3), “Left” and After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the decorative symbols are changed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed. Effect display is performed to change the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed so that is in a reach state. Further, for example, when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA4-4, as shown in FIGS. 80 (D1) to (D5), all symbols are displayed. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, an effect display is performed in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo continuous variation) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Thereafter, the decorative symbols of “6” are aligned and stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, and the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state. Further, for example, when a specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PC 4-1, all of the effects are displayed as shown in FIGS. 80 (E1) to (E6). In the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, after the combination of decorative symbols serving as the development chance HC6 is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), the effect display that rotates the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is reversed. Is performed, the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state.

  In the reach state as shown in FIG. 80 (C3) and FIG. 80 (D5), as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the variation speed of the decorative symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C decreases. . When the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the number “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is “ A “normal” reach effect that is stopped (temporarily stopped) together with the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 81 (B), the decorative symbols constituting the combination of jackpots are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “out of”. For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (H), an effect image indicating that the number “5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 9C where “5” is “medium” is displayed, and then “medium” is displayed. Reach out of combination by stopping display of decorative symbols other than the number indicating “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, such as stopping displaying the decorative symbol of the number “5” in the symbol display area 9C of FIG. It is only necessary to stop and display the decorative symbols constituting the, and end the variable display of the decorative symbols. When any one of the reach effect α1 to the reach effect α3 and the reach effect β1 to the reach effect β3 is executed, as shown in FIG. The symbol fluctuation speed rises again, and various reach effects are displayed. In the reach effect β1, after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 81D is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds. In the case of any one of the reach effects α1 to the reach effects α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 81 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 81 (F) proceeds. To do. Then, in the reach effect α1, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), a decorative pattern that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 81 (G), in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed, but the variable display result becomes “out of place”. In this case, it is only necessary to stop and display the decorative symbols that make up the unreachable combination and end the variable display of decorative symbols. On the other hand, in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3, as shown in FIGS. 81 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. In the reach effect β2 and the reach effect β3, after the character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 81J is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display proceeds as shown in FIG. 81 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, the second stage effect display is stopped (temporary stop display) as shown in FIG. 82 (A). A decorative pattern appears. When the variable display result is “displaced”, the displayed decorative symbols are not changed as shown in FIG. 82B, and the decorative symbols constituting the reach-off combination are stopped and displayed. The variable display of symbols is terminated. In the reach effect α3, as shown in FIGS. 82B to 82D, the process proceeds to the third stage effect display (also called “relief effect”). Then, a decorative pattern that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage of effect display appears. For example, if it is determined in step S574 in FIG. 71 that the changing promotion effect is not to be executed, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is used as the final stopped decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 82 (E). Stop display (final stop display). When it is decided to execute the promotion effect during fluctuation, the decorative symbol that is a combination of the normal jackpot is temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 82 (G) as shown in FIG. 82 (F). As described above, the symbols are changed again in a state where the same decorative symbols are arranged in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Then, when the promotion effect during change is executed in response to the big hit type being “first probability change”, for example, as shown in FIG. After the change, the promotion success effect during change is performed to stop and display the decorative pattern that becomes a combination of the probable big hit. In the case where the promotion promotion effect during change is executed, after performing the change again of the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 82 (G), for example, as in FIG. What is necessary is just to stop-display the decorative pattern which becomes.

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example when the notice display effect of “mail display” is executed. In this display operation example, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol variable display, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), each symbol display area 9L of “left”, “middle”, “right”, As shown in FIG. 83 (B), the decorative symbols stopped and displayed at 9C and 9R start to change in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Then, the effect display control data read from the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 decided in step S517 in FIG. 68 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2 decided in step S596 in FIG. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 83C, an effect image YH1 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 158 is displayed. When the player operates the operation button 158 within a predetermined period and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 158 to the effect control board 80 is turned on accordingly, the effect control CPU 111 The effect in the notice effect is displayed by displaying the effect image YH2 indicating the mail message as shown in FIG. 83 (D) by switching the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 to the notice CYP3-2-2. Change the behavior. If the operation button 158 is not operated within the predetermined period, the notice effect control pattern is not switched, the effect image YH1 is erased as shown in FIG. 83 (E), and the notice effect is ended. After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), the decorative symbol variable display proceeds such as temporarily displaying the decorative symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In the example shown in FIG. 84 (A), all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” correspond to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display. The decoration pattern starts to change. Thereafter, as shown in 86 (B) to (D), the decorative symbols “1”, “5”, and “3” are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of “left” → “right” → “middle” ( After the temporary stop display), the decorative symbol that becomes the chance of chance TC1 is stopped and displayed (final stop display). At this time, as a big hit effect in the two round big hit state, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), an effect image for notifying the shift to a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode is displayed. As an ending effect in response to the end of the two-round big hit state, an effect image as shown in FIG. 84 (F) is displayed, and 86 (G) As shown in Fig. 5, the display is kept displayed even after the next decorative pattern change is started.

  In this embodiment, for example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot determination random number MR1 matches the jackpot determination value before the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or decoration pattern is derived and displayed. (See step S65 in FIG. 55), it is determined whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. In the process of step S97 in FIG. 56, based on the fact that the big hit flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state. In the process of step S102, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol is selected from among a plurality of types based on the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state, and the like. Decide on. In the process of step S105, the decorative pattern variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result in step S102. The effect control microcomputer 110, for example, in response to the change pattern designation command or the display result specifying command received from the main board 31, the effect symbol change start process in step S801 in FIG. 66 or the effect symbol change process in step S802. By executing the above, in accordance with the determination result of the process in step S105, control for executing various rendering operations during variable display of decorative symbols is performed.

  In response to the determination that the reach state is set in the process of step S97 in FIG. 56, in step S105, one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C selected in the process of step S99 is used. By executing the process, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2 according to the reach state. To do. Further, in response to the determination that the reach state is not set in step S97, the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C selected in step S110 are used. By executing the processing, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2 that execute a specific effect during variable display of decorative symbols.

  Further, in response to the determination that the CPU 56 reaches the reach state in the process of step S97 in FIG. 56, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is used based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S103. By executing the process of step S105, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to “reach”. Further, it is determined in step S97 in FIG. 56 that the reach state is not set, and in step S102, the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type for executing the specific effect is determined. Correspondingly, a plurality of types of non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7 prepared in advance for executing a specific effect by executing the process of step S105 using the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Therefore, even if the decorative display variable display state does not reach the reach state, specific effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, “intro”, and “end of development opportunity” can be executed, enabling various effects. This can improve the game entertainment. Further, in the processes in step S102 and step S105, the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined using a different determination table depending on whether or not the reach state is determined in the process in step S97. The determination process does not compete between the case where the state is set and the case where the reach state is not set. Therefore, the value of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type used to determine the variation pattern type can be made into common numerical data regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state. The value of the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern used for determining the pattern can be set to common numerical data regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state. Therefore, the amount of processing in the processing executed to update the values of the random number MR3 and the random number MR4 (for example, the display random number value updating processing in step S26 in FIG. 6) is reduced, and the amount of programs is reduced. Can do. Further, in the processes in steps S102 and S103, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by the common processing module regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S97. In the processing of steps S104 and S105, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by the common processing module regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S97. Therefore, the amount of programs can be reduced as compared with the case where determination is performed using different processing modules according to the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state.

  Further, in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. 19A, the non-reach CA1 that executes a specific effect when the total pending storage number is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, compared to when it is less than the predetermined number. The table data is configured such that the ratio determined for the variation pattern type -4 is low. Therefore, when the number of stored data in the first reserved storage buffer 151A or the second reserved storage buffer 151B exceeds a predetermined number, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened, and the starting condition is not satisfied. Can be reduced.

  Further, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the classified variation pattern types depending on the type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in the reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation unlike the design, and various production operations can be executed at a predetermined rate close to the design to enhance the game entertainment. Can be improved.

  In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 14A to 14F and FIGS. Accordingly, the table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to perform different types of performance operations according to the determination result of the big hit type, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 14A to 14F and FIGS. 15A to 15C, whether the gaming state is a normal state or a short-time state is a probable variation state. Accordingly, different variation pattern types can be determined. Therefore, different types of performance operations can be executed according to the gaming state, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  Further, in the first special symbol display 8a, the first special symbol is variable based on the fact that the first starting condition is satisfied after the first starting condition is satisfied after the game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 13. Display is executed. In the second special symbol display 8b, based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied after the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 14 formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 15 and the second starting condition is satisfied, The variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In the effect display device 9, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, a plurality of types corresponding to variable display in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The decorative design of is variably displayed. In addition, the CPU 56 in the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 executes a process (see FIG. 6) for controlling the progress of the game in accordance with a program read from the ROM 54 or the like. The effect control CPU 111 mounted on the effect control board 80 follows the program read from the ROM, for example, in the command analysis process in step S704 and the effect control process process in step S705 in FIG. The process for controlling is executed. In the processes of steps S101 and S102, the decorative pattern variation pattern type corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is determined based on the first start condition being satisfied, or the second start condition is satisfied. Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is determined or not, any one of a plurality of variation pattern types can be selected using the value of the common random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Decide on something.

  As described above, after determining the variation pattern type using the value of the common random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the determination result. If so, various presentation operations can be performed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state. Further, even when a special symbol is variably displayed by a plurality of display devices (the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b) and the decorative symbol is variably displayed corresponding to the special symbol variable display, A common random value R3 is used for determining the variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of program by reducing the amount of processing in the processing executed to update the value of the random number MR3 (for example, the display random number value updating processing in step S26 in FIG. 6).

  Further, if the CPU 111 for effect control determines that the variation pattern is to execute the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in the processing of steps S551 and S552 in FIG. In accordance with the change to the pseudo control TP2-3, the temporary stop symbol determined in step S558, etc., the effect symbol variation processing is executed according to the variation control pattern determined in step S517 in FIG. That is, based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition for variable symbol special display is satisfied once, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, "L", "Middle", and "Right" After changing the decorative symbols in 9R, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, the effect display for changing the decorative symbols in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R again. It is possible to execute a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” that is performed a predetermined number of times. Then, in response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S97 in FIG. 56, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A set in step S99 for use in the determination in step S102. ˜135C, the variation pattern type classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after executing the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. The table data is configured so that it can be determined either. In this way, it varies depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the reach state instead of the type of effect operation in the specific effect such as whether or not to execute the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. By determining the variation pattern type using the determination table that classifies the pattern type, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in the reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation different from the design. It is possible to improve amusement entertainment by executing a large production operation at a predetermined rate close to the design.

  Further, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the control is performed to the 15 round big hit state. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, control is made to the two round big hit state. Then, based on the fact that the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in the process of step S73 in FIG. 55, the big hit variation pattern type selected in the process of step S92 for use in the determination in step S102 in FIG. In the determination tables 132D, 132H, and 132I, for example, the big hit type such as the special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 variation pattern type is “ The table data is configured so as to include a variation pattern type different from the case other than “accuracy”. Therefore, when the big hit type is “Accuracy”, it is determined that the variation pattern type or the fluctuation pattern is different from the case other than “Accuracy”. In spite of being controlled by the state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted by performing the same production operation as when the state is controlled to the 15 round big hit state.

  Further, based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, the CPU 56 changes the special variable winning device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state. The variable winning action is executed. When the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed by not changing the state of the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag. Therefore, even when the normal state continues, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation for being controlled to the probability variation state and improve the game entertainment.

  Also, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 14D, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 15B, and the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in FIG. 15C. Then, it is configured to include a variation pattern type common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the game is controlled to the big hit state or the small hit game state depending on the variation pattern type, and the expectation for being controlled to the probable state is maintained. Can improve the entertainment interest. In addition, when the variable display result is “small hit” and when the big hit type is “surprise”, it is possible to determine a common variation pattern type, so when determining the variation pattern, Regardless of whether the display result is “small hit” or the big hit type is “surprise”, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced. .

  When the big hit type is “probable”, for example, the production control CPU 111 determines whether the variation pattern is a plurality of types in the processing of steps S508 and S509 in FIG. Decide the decorative pattern for the stop symbol. As a result, when the big hit type is “surprise”, various combinations of decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed as a variable display result to improve the gaming fun.

  Further, in the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 13, a plurality of jackpot types are selected based on the fact that the first start condition for starting variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is satisfied. If it is determined to be one of them, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is satisfied. Depending on the case, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be “accurate” is made different. Therefore, the player's expectation for being controlled to the big round hit state according to which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied can be made different, and the gaming interest can be improved. In particular, when the second start condition is satisfied, the big hit type is not determined as “surprising accuracy”, so that, for example, in the period in which the second start winning port 14 is easily controlled to the expanded open state such as a probability change state or a short time state. Since the big hit type becomes “surprise”, it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from deteriorating, and it is possible to increase the frequency at which award balls are paid out in the probability variation state or the short time state.

  Further, the CPU 56 can specify a display result specifying command that can specify a variable display result from the main board 31 to the effect control board and a variation pattern by the process of step S106 in FIG. 56 and the process shown in FIG. Send the fluctuation pattern command. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 111 executes the notice effect setting process in step S516 in FIG. 68, thereby determining whether or not to execute an effect operation that becomes a notice effect during variable display of decorative symbols. Then, the presentation operation to be the notice presentation effect is determined as one of a plurality of types. For example, in step S593 in FIG. 72, the notice pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of kinds using the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 38, and is determined as one of the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3. In some cases, after setting one of the notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C as shown in FIGS. 39 to 41 in the process of step S595, the notice pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types in the process of step S596. Then, in accordance with the specific effect pattern determined based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, the notice pattern, etc., the effect is produced according to the change control pattern and the notice effect control pattern determined in step S517 in FIG. The process during symbol variation is executed. The control load for controlling the progress of the game of the game control microcomputer 560 is increased by performing the determination, determination and setting for executing the notice effect by the effect control CPU 111 mounted on the effect control board 80. It is possible to improve amusement entertainment by executing a variety of presentation operations as a notice effect while preventing the occurrence.

  For example, the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 38 is configured not to execute a notice effect in which a specific effect and an execution period overlap, as in the case where a specific effect of “Intro” is executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a plurality of types of performance operations from overlapping, and to prevent a decrease in performance effects due to the player's interest being dispersed.

  In the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 31C, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, depending on whether the previous effect value is 1 to 3, intro TP3-1 to intro The specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” executed last time is changed by assigning a determination value to be compared with the value of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern for each specific effect pattern of TP3-3. It is made not to become the same specific production pattern. Therefore, various entertainment operations can appear so as not to be biased, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  The notice pattern classification determination table 170 shown in FIG. 38 and the notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 39 to 41 are configured so that the notice effect can be executed even when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach”. It is configured. As a result, even if the decorative display variable display state does not reach the reach state, it is possible to execute a presentation operation that becomes a notice effect, thereby enhancing the player's expectation for reaching the reach state and improving the game entertainment Can do.

  The notice pattern determination table 171C illustrated in FIG. 41 is a variation pattern that corresponds to “non-reach” and is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed. The ratio of executing the notice effect is lower than that of the time, and the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than that of the change pattern corresponding to “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed. It is configured. Accordingly, the case where the decorative display variable display state does not reach the reach state when the effect operation as the notice effect is executed is reduced, and the case where the specific effect is not executed when the effect operation as the notice effect is executed is further reduced. By reducing it, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for reaching a reach state when a notice effect is performed, and to improve the gaming interest.

  The effect control CPU 111 checks the press signal from the operation button 158 in the effect symbol changing process, and switches the notice effect control pattern in response to the press signal being turned on, thereby changing the notice effect control pattern. Change the direction. Therefore, the notice effect according to the operation by the player is possible, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  Further, the effect control CPU 111 performs the processing of steps S504, S505, and S506 in FIG. 68 and the step in FIG. 69 based on the variable display result notified by the display result specifying command and the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command. By executing the processing of S510, S512, and S513, the decorative symbols of the final stop symbols are determined for the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, respectively. Further, the effect control CPU 111 determines the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the specific effect by executing the process of step S558 in FIG. Further, the effect control CPU 111 executes the process of step S576 in FIG. 71 to determine the decoration pattern of the combination of normal jackpots to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the changing promotion effect. The effect control CPU 111 determines the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, thereby allowing the game control microcomputer 560 to progress the game. While preventing an increase in the control burden for control, it is possible to determine the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the multiple symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R.

  Further, the effect control CPU 111 executes the process of step S558 in FIG. 70 when the specific effect of “simulated ream” is executed, so that the temporary stop symbol that becomes one of the pseudo ream chances GC1 to GC8 is displayed. Determine the combination. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game interest by performing various presentation operations while preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress of the game of the game control microcomputer 560.

  In addition, when the “slip” specific effect is executed, the effect control CPU 111 determines the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed with the “slip” specific effect by executing the process of step S558 in FIG. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the game interest by performing various presentation operations while preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress of the game of the game control microcomputer 560.

  In addition, in response to the fact that the decorative display variable display state becomes the reach state, the effect control CPU 111 first uses the final stop symbol determination table 162A in the process of step S506 in FIG. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R other than the “middle” symbol display area 9C are displayed. Thereafter, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the ornament symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the ornament symbol is finally stopped and displayed is determined. In addition, in response to the fact that the decorative display variable display state does not reach the reach state, the effect control CPU 111 performs the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right appearance determination table 161 in the process of step S505 in FIG. By determining the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed with reference to FIG. 9, the combination of reach and jackpot is not achieved, and the pseudo-shown in FIG. Combination of consecutive chances GC1 to GC8, development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 9B, sudden chances TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 9C, and certain non-reach combinations as shown in FIG. Decide which combination of decorative patterns should not be. Thereby, it can be prevented that the player is misunderstood whether or not the special effect is executed.

  In addition, when the effect control CPU 111 is the “first probability variation” jackpot type that can execute the promotion effect during the change, the decorative symbol of the final stop symbol constituting the combination of the probability variation jackpot in the process of step S513 in FIG. 69. To decide. Then, in the process of step S574 in FIG. 71, it is determined whether to execute the changing promotion effect by referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. If it is determined that the promotion effect during the change is to be executed, the decorative symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination is changed by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 37 in the process of step S576. Decide on a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped for medium promotion. Therefore, even when the “first probability variation” jackpot type that can execute the changing promotion effect, a case where the changing promotion effect is executed and a case where the changing promotion effect is not executed are provided. While preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress, it is possible to improve the gaming fun by enabling various performance operations.

  In addition, in the case of the “third probability variation” jackpot type for executing the jackpot promotion promotion effect, the effect control CPU 111 determines the decoration pattern of the final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination in step S512 in FIG. . Therefore, it is difficult to recognize from the variable display result of the decorative symbol whether or not the control is changed to the probability variation state when the notification effect that the probability variation state is entered after the control to the big hit gaming state is started. Thus, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification effect and improve the game entertainment.

  In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 111 mounted on the effect control board 80 executes the process of step S593 and the process of step S595 in FIG. The determination of whether or not to perform an effect operation to be executed and the effect operation to be a notice effect are determined to be any of a plurality of types, and the processing in steps S504, S505, and S506 in FIG. 68, and step S510 in FIG. 69 are performed. , S512, S513, step S558 in FIG. 70, and step S576 in FIG. 71 are executed, so that the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, The decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed at 9R is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, a notice is given during variable display of decorative symbols by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided for controlling the production operation, for example. The determination as to whether or not to perform an effect operation that will be an effect, the determination that the effect operation that will be a notice effect is one of a plurality of types, and the determination of a decorative pattern to be stopped are executed in a shared manner Also good.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 13, when the variation special figure designation value is 2, the random hit MR2 for determining the big hit type for the big hit type of “surprise” A decision value to be compared with a value of -1 is not assigned. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and even when the variation special figure designation value is 2, the determination value may be assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. In this case, based on whether the first start condition is satisfied by changing the number of determination values assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type depending on whether the variation special figure designation value is 1 or 2. The jackpot type is determined to be “surprise” when the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types and when the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. The proportions may be different.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C are determined depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. It is configured so that it can be determined as one of the classified variation pattern types. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C are used to specify a specific effect operation type such as a specific effect of “expansion chance” and a promotion effect during change. By the above, it may be configured to be able to determine any of the classified variation pattern types.

  In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 111 displays a predetermined color (for example, blue) when the first start condition is satisfied in the total suspension storage display unit 18c, and the second start condition is satisfied. In this case, another color (for example, red) may be displayed. Further, for example, a round symbol is displayed when the first starting condition is satisfied, and a triangular symbol is displayed when the second starting condition is satisfied. Also good. In addition, a number indicating the number of times each of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied may be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 111 refers to the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 31B in step S554 in FIG. It has been described that the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is set to any one of “1” to “3” depending on which of the three specific performance patterns is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the CPU 56 may determine the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation when the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern in the process of step S105 in FIG. Good. In that case, it is possible to set a different special symbol variation time according to the number of times of pseudo continuous variation execution. In this way, for the case where the variation time of the special symbol changes depending on the presence / absence of the production operation, the presence / absence and type of the production operation is determined on the main board 31 side, and the variation time of the special symbol is also determined depending on the presence / absence of the production operation. For those that do not change, the presence / absence and type of effect operation may be determined on the effect control board 80 side.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the effect control CPU 111 determines the notice pattern type including presence / absence of the notice effect when the notice pattern type is determined in step S593 in FIG. 72, step S596 is performed. When determining the notice pattern, the notice pattern is determined including the presence or absence of the notice effect. However, the presence / absence of the notice effect, the type of the notice pattern, and the decision of the notice pattern may be determined in a single process. The type may be determined.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the effect control CPU 111 determines the final stop symbol of the reach combination in step S506 in FIG. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed together are determined, the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R. It was explained that the design difference was also determined. However, for example, regarding the symbol difference between the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C and the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, For example, the CPU 56 may determine with the determination of the variation pattern and notify the side of the effect control board 80 by a predetermined effect control command.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the effect control CPU 111 determines the final stop symbol of the non-reach combination in step S505 in FIG. 68, the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination With reference to the table 161, the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R were individually determined. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, after determining the decorative symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L, the determined decorative symbol and the “middle” and “right” symbols are determined. You may make it determine the symbol difference with the design symbol in the display areas 9C and 9R with reference to a predetermined | prescribed determination table.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when executing the changing promotion effect, the effect control CPU 111 refers to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 as shown in FIG. 37 in step S576 in FIG. By determining the temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, KZ7-3, when the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 become a decorative symbol that normally constitutes a jackpot combination, A normal design different from the decorative design was determined as a decorative design to be temporarily stopped and displayed with the promotion effect during the change. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and when the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are decorative symbols that constitute a normal jackpot combination, they are the same as the decorative symbols. The normal symbol may be determined as a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. For example, in the temporary stop symbol determination table 169, the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are any one of “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”. In this case, the determination values corresponding to all the random numbers SR2 for temporary stop symbol determination at the promotion effect are any of the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” that are the same as the final stop symbol The left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 may be configured to be the same as the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3.

  In the first embodiment, the process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56 is executed regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied in the variation pattern setting process. However, when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, different processes are executed to determine which of the plurality of types of variation pattern types or a plurality of types of variation patterns. You may make it determine in any of these. In this case, the process for determining the variation pattern type and the process for determining the variation pattern are made different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, and for determining the variation pattern type. For the value of the random number SR3 and the value of the random number SR4 for determining the variation pattern, common numerical data may be used regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied.

  For example, as a variation pattern type determination table such as a big hit variation pattern type determination table, a small hit variation pattern type determination table, a reach variation pattern type determination table, or a non-reach variation pattern type determination table, the first start condition and the second Depending on which of the start conditions is satisfied, a different value may be prepared in advance for assigning the determination value to be compared with the variation pattern type determination random number SR3 for each variation pattern type. In the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the first start condition, the variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition is selected as a use table, and the random number SR3 for variation pattern type determination is selected. Based on this value, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the second start condition, a variation pattern type determination table that is different from the case in which the first start condition is established according to the establishment of the second start condition. It may be selected as a usage table, and the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types based on the value of the random number SR3 for variation pattern type determination common to the case where the first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, regarding the determination processing for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state, different processing is executed when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. It may be. In this case, the process for determining whether or not to reach the reach state differs depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, and the first start is set as the value of the random number MR2-2 for reach determination. Regardless of which of the condition and the second start condition is satisfied, common numerical data may be used. Further, for example, instead of the process of step S73 in FIG. 55 in the first embodiment, as a process of determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types, when the first start condition is satisfied and the second start Different processing may be executed when the condition is satisfied. In this case, the process for determining the big hit type differs depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, and the first start is set as the value of the random number MR2-1 for the big hit type determination. Regardless of which of the condition and the second start condition is satisfied, common numerical data may be used.

  In the first embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. In addition, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is controlled based on the fact that the big hit type is “surprise”, and after the two round big hit state is finished, the positive hit state is controlled. . However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate” or the variable display result is “small hit”, A case of “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” may be provided. For example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 may be configured to include determination values to be assigned to the “sudden time reduction” or “sudden normal” jackpot types according to the variation special figure designation value. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprising”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “Accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “Accuracy”, it is controlled to the normal state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation for the gaming state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state, and to improve the gaming interest.

  When providing such “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” judgment values, it is possible to determine a variation pattern type or variation pattern different from those other than “suddenly short” and “suddenly normal”. Good. Even though the big hit type is “suddenly short time” or “suddenly normal”, the player performs the same performance operation as when controlled to the 15 round big hit state despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. Can prevent distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Accurate”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the probability variation state or the short time state, it is advantageous for the player by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning opening 14 and easily establishing the second start condition. Control was done. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in the probability variation state, probability variation control (control to increase the probability of winning a big hit) is continuously performed, and a game is given to the second start winning opening 14. A high-accuracy and high-base state in which advantageous opening control that increases the possibility that a ball enters may be included, and a high-accuracy and low-base state in which probability changing control is performed but advantageous opening control is not performed may be included. Also, in the short-time state, a low-accuracy base state in which the special symbol fluctuation time is shortened and advantageous release control is performed, and a low probability low in which the special symbol variation time is shortened but advantageous release control is not performed. The base state may be included. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “first probability change” to “third probability change” or “surprise probability”, after the big hit gaming state is finished, which of the high probability high base state and the high probability low base state You may make it control. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “first probability change” to “third probability change” or “surprise probability”, which of the high probability high base state and the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends The ratios that are controlled may be different from each other.

  When the big hit type is “Crush Probability”, when determining the variation pattern type to be one of multiple types, whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends Accordingly, different variation pattern types may be determined. For example, when the jackpot type is determined to be “surprise” in the process of step S73 in FIG. 55, it is determined whether to control to the high-accuracy high base state or the high-accuracy low base state after the jackpot gaming state ends. A determination process is executed. At this time, if it is decided to control to the high accuracy low base state, it is variable from the case where the big hit type such as the variation pattern type of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1 and the special CC 4-1 becomes “surprising accuracy”. When the display result is “small hit”, the common variation pattern type is determined. In addition, when it is determined to control to the high-accuracy high-base state, the dedicated variation pattern type is used only when the big hit type such as special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2 is “surprise”. You just have to decide. In that case, when the big hit type is “surprise” and the high hit low base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the variable display is performed as the stage action during the variable display of the decorative pattern or the stage action in the two round big hit state. After the production operation common to the case where the result is “small hit” is performed, a highly accurate and low base state can be obtained. On the other hand, if the big hit type is "surprise" and the high hit high base state is reached after the big hit gaming state ends, the big hit type is "surprise" After the dedicated performance operation is performed only in the case of “

  In the first embodiment, the variation pattern command and the display result specifying command are separate presentation control commands. For example, the variation pattern and the variable display result (“out”, “small hit”, “big hit”) One type of effect control command that can specify any one of the above and the type of jackpot in the case of “big hit”) may be used. Further, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands.

  In the first embodiment, the CPU 56 determines whether the big hit type is “normal” or “first certain variation” to “third certain variation” in the process of step S73 in FIG. 75. In step S866 in FIG. 75, control CPU 111 selects jackpot / medium promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 32 (B), and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot / medium promotion effect in steps S868 and S869. It was. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the effect control CPU 111 may determine whether to execute the jackpot promotion effect regardless of the determination result of the CPU 56. Good.

  In the first embodiment, “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are provided in the display area of the effect display device 9, and the symbol display areas 9L and 9C are provided. 9R, one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the decorative symbol of the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed on one predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” The decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed at these three locations, and the decorative symbols of the final stopped symbols may be stopped and displayed on five or eight active lines.

  Further, the first embodiment corresponds to the fact that the variation pattern type is determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 based on the value of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Thus, it is determined as one of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7 for executing the specific effect. That is, the presence / absence of the specific effect is determined by determining the variation pattern type using the value of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the presence or absence of a specific effect may be determined by determining a variation pattern using the value of random number MR4 for variation pattern determination. . For example, the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type is configured so that the non-reach PA1-1 variation pattern includes the non-reach PA1-1 variation pattern. In that case, at the time when the variation pattern type is determined to be the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type based on the value of the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination, the presence or absence of a specific effect is still present. It is not determined and the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach PA1-1 based on the value of random number MR4 for variation pattern determination, so that it is determined that the specific effect is not executed, and the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach PA1-4˜. Execution of the specific effect is determined by determining one of the non-reach PAs 1-7.

  In the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of start conditions, and a plurality of numerical value generating means (first number generators) for generating random numbers when the corresponding start conditions are satisfied. The means for generating MR1 based on the establishment of the start condition, the means for generating MR1 based on the establishment of the second start condition), and the random number generated by each of the plurality of numerical value generation means and the jackpot determination value are compared. A specific game state determining means for determining whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, and each of the plurality of numerical value generating means updates a count value in response to establishment of a predetermined numerical value update condition ( Counter for generating random 1-1 and counter for generating random 1-2: may be one software counter) A random number is generated by an operation using the count value and the count value input from the corresponding input circuit (first latch circuit 514 or input port 572a or second latch circuit 515 or input port 572b shown in FIG. 3). Even when a plurality of start conditions are satisfied at the same time, it is possible to prevent an inaccurate random number from being generated. Even if a plurality of types of count values are input to the CPU 56, since only one pulse signal supply circuit 513 is provided, the circuit configuration is prevented from becoming complicated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where two start winning holes 13, 14 are provided is taken as an example. However, the first implementation is also performed when three or more start winning holes are provided. Can be applied. However, three or more input ports or latch circuits shown in FIG. 3 are provided.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
FIG. 85 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment as viewed from the front. The difference from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 1 is that two special variable winning ball apparatuses 20A and 20B are provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20A includes an opening / closing plate, and a solenoid in a first specific game state (first big win game state) that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a. When the opening / closing plate is controlled to be in the open state by 21A, the first big prize opening serving as the winning area is in the open state. A game ball won in the first grand prize opening is detected by the count switch 23A. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20B includes an opening / closing plate, and a solenoid in a second specific game state (second big hit game state) that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. The opening / closing plate is controlled to be in the open state by 21B, so that the second big prize opening serving as the winning area is in the open state. A game ball won in the second grand prize opening is detected by the count switch 23B.

  FIG. 86 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31 in the second embodiment. 2 differs from the circuit configuration of the main board 31 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 2 in that detection signals from the count switches 23A and 23B are input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input driver circuit 58, That is, a drive signal from the game control microcomputer 560 is output via the output circuit 59 to the solenoids 21A and 21B that open and close the variable winning ball devices 20A and 20B.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 to perform a game control process in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, an abnormal winning notification process (step S23) is added to the timer interruption process in the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the game control means (game control microcomputer 560) will be described. The control of the big prize opening (the first big prize opening and the second big prize winning) and the execution of the abnormal winning notification process are different from the operation of the game control means in the first embodiment, but other operations Is the same as in the case of the first embodiment.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S305) in the special symbol process shown in FIG. In the big winning opening opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step S471). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S472). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated. In the case where the pre-opening process for opening the big winning opening is executed before the start of the first round, the big winning opening control timer corresponds to the big hit display time timer set in the process of step S137 in FIG.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, the CPU 56 designates the big prize opening opening designation command (A1XX) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). (H) (see FIG. 45) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 110 (step S473). Note that the CPU 56 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the number-of-releases counter (see step S138 in FIG. 59) for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, when the first special symbol variation flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to drive the solenoid 21A to open the first big winning opening (special variable winning ball device 20A) (steps S474, S475). ). When the first special symbol variation flag is set, control is performed to drive the solenoid 21A to open the first big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20A) (steps S474 and S475). If the first special symbol variation flag is not set, control is performed to drive the solenoid 21B to open the second big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20B) (steps S474 and S476). Also, the value of the number-of-releases counter is decremented by 1 (step S477).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets a threshold corresponding to the big hit type (a first big hit of 15R, a sudden big hit of 2R, a second big hit of 11R) in the abnormal winning determination counter (step S478). In the case of small hit, the same threshold is set as in the case of 2R sudden hit big hit.

  In the second embodiment, as an example, the number of rounds per first big hit is 15, and the number of rounds per second big hit is smaller than the number of rounds per first big (for example, 11). .

  89A and 89B are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of a relationship between the number of rounds and a threshold value. In the example shown in FIG. 89 (A), the threshold value corresponding to the first big hit gaming state of 16 rounds is “180”. Note that the threshold value is a value that allows a game ball to be awarded to the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state. Since the maximum number of winnings that can be awarded to the big winning opening in each round is 10, for example, 150 game balls (10 × 15 rounds: standard value of winning) can be won in the 15R big hit gaming state. However, there is a possibility that the game balls will win the first grand prize opening after the count switches 23A and 23B detect the winning of the tenth game ball to the big winning opening until the big winning opening is closed. There is. In other words, there is a possibility that more than 10 game balls may win the grand prize opening in one round, and more than 150 game balls may win the big prize opening when the 15th round is completed. Therefore, the thresholds exemplified in FIGS. 89A and 89B are determined on the assumption that there are cases where a maximum of 12 game balls may win a big winning opening in each round. In the case of 11 rounds, the standard value for winning is 120.

  When it is detected that more than 12 game balls are won in the grand prize opening in one round, a trouble that the opening / closing plate of the big prize opening cannot be closed or some illegal act is performed. It is thought that. Therefore, as will be described later, when the number of game balls detected by the count switches 23A and 23B exceeds 12 per round (specifically, when the number of rounds exceeds 12 × rounds), an abnormal prize is awarded. It is determined that has occurred, and processing for executing abnormality notification is executed.

  In the second embodiment, the number of rounds per second big hit based on the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 at which the game ball can be won by the variable winning ball apparatus 15 being opened is the first round. Less than the number of rounds per game. Therefore, the threshold value for the second jackpot is set to a smaller value than the threshold value for the first jackpot.

  The thresholds exemplified in FIG. 89 are set as a table in the ROM 54. Note that the threshold value shown in FIG. 89A corresponds to a first threshold value used for notifying the abnormal variable winning ball device 20A with the number of winnings, and the threshold value shown in FIG. This corresponds to a second threshold value used to notify an abnormal winning to the special variable winning ball apparatus 20B.

  After setting the threshold value in the abnormal winning determination counter, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened in each round in the large winning opening control timer (step S479). For example, in the case of 15 round big hits, the maximum time is 29 seconds, and in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit, the maximum time is 0.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the step large winning opening opening process (step S306) (step S480).

  FIG. 90 and FIG. 91 are flowcharts showing the special prize opening process during the special symbol process (step S306). In the special winning opening opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special winning prize control timer by -1 (step S481).

  Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S482). When the value of the big prize winning control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the count switch (count switch 23A during the first big hit game and count switch 23B during the second big hit game) is turned on (step S483). ) If the count switch is not on, the process is terminated. When the count switch is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls won in the big winning opening (first large winning opening or second large winning opening) is incremented by one (step S484). . Also, the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is decremented by 1 (step S485).

  Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (10 in this example) (step S486). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number, the process is terminated. Note that the determination order of S482 and S483 may be reversed.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 56 drives the solenoid (solenoid 21A or solenoid 21B) to close the big prize opening. Control is performed (step S487). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S488).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the opening number counter (step S489). When the value of the number-of-opening counter is not 0, the CPU 56 designates the post-big prize opening after-opening designation command (A2XX (H)) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the end of the round). ) Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 110 (step S490). Then, a value corresponding to the time (interval period) from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval period) is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S491), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the big prize opening The value is updated according to the pre-release process (step S305) (step S492). The interval period is, for example, 5 seconds. In the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit, a shorter period than 15R big hit may be used.

  When the value of the number-of-opens counter is 0, the CPU 56 corresponds to the big winning end control timer corresponding to the big hit end time (for example, the time for notifying in the effect display device 9 that the big hit game or the small hit game has ended). A value to be set is set (step S493), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S307) (step S494).

  In this embodiment, the same big winning opening opening pre-processing, big winning opening opening processing and big winning end processing are executed for both big hit games and small hit games. The processing may be separated.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the abnormal winning notification process (step S23 in FIG. 87). In the abnormal winning notification process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more (step S581). When the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more, the gaming state is a case where the special winning opening may be properly opened.

  When the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more, the process proceeds to step S594. If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 4 or more (less than 3), it is confirmed whether or not the count switches 23A and 23B are turned on (step S582). When the value of the special symbol process flag is not 4 or more, the count switches 23A and 23B should not be turned on. Therefore, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the abnormal winning determination counter by −1 (step S583). Then, control goes to a step S584.

  In the second embodiment, the CPU 56 sets an initial value (normal value: for example, 3) in the abnormal winning determination counter in the process of step S11 in the main process (see FIG. 5). In the big hit end process (see FIG. 60), for example, an initial value (normal value) is set in the abnormal winning determination counter before the execution of the process of step S163. As shown in FIG. 88, a predetermined value (threshold value) different from the initial value is set in the abnormal winning determination counter before the special winning opening is opened, and initialization of step S11 in the main process (see FIG. 5) is performed. Since the initial value (normal value) is set in the abnormal winning determination counter in the processing for winning and the big winning end processing (see FIG. 60), in the gaming state that is not in the big winning game, the abnormal winning determination is made unless an abnormal winning occurs. The counter value is a normal value.

  In step S594, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is zero. When the abnormal winning determination counter is 0, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an abnormal winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 110.

  In the second embodiment, an abnormal winning designation command is defined as an effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 110, and the effect control CPU 111 of the effect control microcomputer 110. When the abnormal winning designation command is received, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying that an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred.

  If the number of times that a game ball has been detected by the counter switches 23A and 23B reaches three times in a state where there is no possibility that the big winning opening will be in an open state by the processing as described above, an abnormal winning notification designation command is issued. Is sent. In addition, in a state where there is no possibility that the special winning opening is in an open state, the number of times that the game ball is detected by the counter switches 23A and 23B reaches a predetermined number (the number of times that the game ball is not reached when there is no failure or fraud) In such a case, an abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted.

  In the second embodiment, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of big prizes, in any gaming state such as a normal gaming state (a state where there is no possibility that the big prize opening is in an open state), a specific gaming state, etc. Can accurately detect abnormal winnings. In addition, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20A is opened and when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20B is opened, the abnormal winning determination can be made by setting different numbers of winning prizes in the abnormal winning determination. Thus, an abnormal winning can be accurately detected during the opening operation of any special variable winning ball apparatus.

  In the second embodiment, there are provided two special variable winning ball devices 20A and 20B that can be opened when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the corresponding special symbol display and can be opened. However, the gaming machine may be a gaming machine that uses two variable winning ball devices that can be in an open state based on an openable condition different from such an openable condition.

  For example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display, the first jackpot game state is controlled (a condition for opening the first variable winning ball device is established), and the second variable winning ball device is started and opened. Sometimes the game ball is controlled to the second big hit game state (the number of rounds is less than the number of rounds in the first big win game state) on condition that a special ball provided in the second variable winning ball device is won. It may be a gaming machine.

  In such a gaming machine, the second threshold value for the second variable winning ball device may be lower than the first threshold value for the first variable winning ball device.

  Also, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display, the first big hit game state is controlled (the opening condition of the first variable winning ball device is established), and the second variable winning ball device is started and opened. Sometimes the game ball is controlled to the second big hit game state (the number of rounds is less than the number of rounds in the first big win game state) on condition that a special ball provided in the second variable winning ball device is won. The invention disclosed in the first and second embodiments can also be applied to a gaming machine having a plurality of start winning openings.

  In the second embodiment, an initial value or a predetermined value is set in the abnormal winning determination counter, and the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is decremented by 1 every time a winning in the big winning opening is detected. When the value of the counter reaches 0, it is determined that an abnormal winning at the big winning opening has occurred, but the abnormal winning determination counter is set to 0 in the initialization process and the big hit ending process to win the winning prize. Each time is detected, the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is incremented by one, and the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is a threshold value in a state where there is a possibility that the big winning opening is opened, For example, when it becomes 3, it may be determined that an abnormal winning in the big winning opening has occurred.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing another method for preventing an illegal act with respect to a random number value compared with the jackpot determination value. The method shown in FIG. 93 executes a lottery process (internal lottery process) in which a random number value is generated and compared with a jackpot determination value when a start condition capable of starting the variation of the special symbol is established (step S596). S597). The method of generating random numbers may be the same as the method of generating random numbers in the first and second embodiments, or the count value of the hardware circuit (counter circuit) may be read and used as it is as a random value. It may be extracted from a software counter.

  Then, the generated random number value is compared with the random number value used in the previous lottery, and if they do not match, no error is generated. If the number of times of coincidence continues for a predetermined number of times (one or more times), an error is assumed. In the case of an error, a notification is provided by the effect parts provided in the gaming machine (effect display device 9, speakers 27R, 27L), light emitters such as lamps and LEDs, for example, until the power is turned off. (Step S598).

  The generated random number value is stored as the random number value used in the previous lottery (step S599).

  In each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  In each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 110. However, the game control microcomputer 560 is not connected to another board (for example, FIG. Or a sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 110 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. 110 may be transmitted. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 110 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  Next, a mechanistic countermeasure for preventing fraud will be described.

  FIG. 94 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front, and FIG. 95 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. In the following description, the front side of FIG. 94 will be described as the front (front) side of the pachinko gaming machine, and the back side will be described as the back (back) side. The front surface (front surface) of the pachinko gaming machine is a surface facing the player when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player side. The front view shown in FIG. 94 is slightly different from the front view shown in FIG. 1 and the like, but the basic function of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 94 is the gaming machine shown in FIG. Is the same as the basic function.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of an outer frame 100 (see FIG. 95) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a front frame 101 (see FIG. 95) attached to the outer frame 100 so as to be openable and closable. Yes. On the front surface of the front frame 101, a glass door frame 102 and an upper plate door frame 103 are provided so as to be openable and closable around one side, respectively, and a lower plate frame 104 is attached. Further, a mechanism plate 105 (see FIG. 95) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached is attached to the back side of the front frame 101 so as to be openable and closable around one side.

  As shown in FIG. 94, on the front surface of the upper plate door frame 103 attached below the glass door frame 102, a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) capable of storing a game ball (hit ball) as a game medium (game ball). ) 3 is provided. Below the hit ball supply tray 3, there is provided an extra ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 for storing game balls overflowing from the hit ball supply tray 3. At the side, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching a game ball is provided. A game board 6 detachably attached to the front frame 101 is disposed on the back surface of the glass door frame 102. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. A game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, there is provided an effect display device (variable display device) 9 including a plurality of variable display areas, each of which displays a decorative pattern for effect. In addition, a special symbol display device (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them is provided on the top of the effect display device 9. The effect display device 9 has, for example, three variable display areas (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The effect display device 9 is a decorative (effect) symbol during the special symbol variable display period by the special symbol display 8, and a variable symbol variable display as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. To do. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer 110 (see FIG. 96) mounted on an effect control board 80 described later. Since the display unit of the special symbol display 8 is small, the variation display mode and the display result of the variation display are difficult to see compared to the display result of the effect display device 9. Therefore, the player pays attention mainly to the effect display device 9.

  The special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, for example. The special symbol display 8 may be configured to display various numbers such as 0 to 99 in a variable manner in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the type of winning. The effect display device 9 is realized by a liquid crystal display device, for example. The effect display device 9 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol during the special symbol variable display period by the special symbol display 8.

  Below the effect display device 9, there is provided a start winning device 15 having a first start port 15a and a second start port 15b as a winning area that can receive a game ball. In the start winning device 15, a first start port 15a is provided in the upper part, and a second start port 15b is provided in the lower part. A pair of movable pieces 13 are provided on the left and right sides of the second start port 15b in such a manner that they can be opened and closed. The first start port 15a is always in a state in which a game ball can enter (accept). Since the structure around the first start port 15a is provided above the second start port 15b and the movable piece 13 is provided on the left and right, the second start port 15b is when the movable piece 13 is in a closed state. When the movable piece 13 is in the open state, the game ball is allowed to enter (accept).

  Note that the start winning device 15 is able to win in the state where the movable piece 13 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win the second start port 15b (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win). It may be configured as follows. Further, only the first start port 15a where the easiness of winning a prize does not change may be provided as the start port, and only the second start port 15b where the easiness of winning a prize changes by the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 13 is provided. It may be provided.

  The movable piece 13 of the starting prize-winning device 15 is driven from a closed state to a closed state for a predetermined period by being driven by a solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid) 16 when a predetermined opening condition is satisfied, and then to a closed state. Is done. When the movable piece 13 of the start winning device 15 is in the open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the second start opening 15b (easy to start winning). In addition, when the movable piece 13 of the start winning device 15 is closed, the game ball does not win the second start opening 15b (it becomes difficult to start winning). The winning ball that has entered the first start port 15a is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start port switch 13a. The winning ball that has entered the second start port 15b is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start port switch 14a.

  Under the effect display device 9, four special symbols for displaying the number of memorized effective winning balls that have entered the first starting port 15a or the second starting port 15b, that is, the number of reserved memories (also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory). A hold memory indicator 18 is provided. The special symbol reservation storage display 18 displays up to four reservation storage numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol storage memory display 18 increases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 each time there is a start prize at the first start port 15a or the second start port 15b. Then, each time the special symbol display 8 starts the variable display, the special symbol hold storage indicator 18 decreases the number of LEDs in the lit state (that is, turns off one LED). Specifically, the special symbol hold storage display 18 shifts the lighting state every time the special symbol display 8 starts the variable display. In this example, an upper limit number (up to 4) is provided for the number of reserved memories by winning to the first start port 15a or the second start port 15b, but the upper limit number of reserved memory numbers is 4 or more. Or may be a value less than four.

  A special variable winning ball apparatus 20 using an opening / closing plate that is opened and closed by a solenoid (large winning opening door solenoid) 21 is provided below the start winning apparatus 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 forms a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing plate. In the big hit game state, the open / close plate is controlled to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player, and in other states than the big hit game state, the open / close plate is controlled to a closed state (second state) disadvantageous to the player. The The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying the normal symbol is started. In this embodiment, left and right LEDs (designs can be visually recognized when lit) are alternately lit to perform variable display. For example, if the left LED is lit at the end of variable display, it is a win. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the opening condition of the movable piece 13 of the start winning device 15 is established, and the movable piece 13 in the start winning device 15 is moved a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. Only open. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, there is provided a normal symbol start memory display 41 with four LEDs for displaying the number of stored effective passing spheres that have passed through the gate 32, that is, the number of start passing memories. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, the normal symbol start memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  The game board 6 is provided with a first normal winning opening 29 and a second normal winning opening 30 as winning areas for receiving game balls and allowing winnings. The winning of a game ball in the first normal winning opening 29 is detected by a winning opening switch (first normal winning opening switch) 29a. The winning of the game ball in the second normal winning opening 30 is detected by a winning opening switch (second normal winning opening switch) 30a. The first start port 15a, the second start port 15b, and the big winning port also constitute a winning area that accepts a game ball and allows winning. In addition, decoration LEDs 25 blinkingly displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7, and an outlet 26 for collecting the game balls that have not won a prize is provided at the bottom.

  Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the gaming area 7, a top frame light emitting unit 28H in which a top frame LED 28a (see FIG. 96) is built, a left light emitting unit 28L in which a left frame LED 28b (see FIG. 96) is built in, and a right frame LED 28c (see FIG. 96). The right light-emitting portion 28R in which the reference is incorporated is provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 7. The top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, the right frame LED 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to the above-described various LEDs for production (decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed.

  In this example, a prize ball LED 51 that is lit during award ball payout is provided at a predetermined position of the left light emitting unit 28L, and a ball break LED 52 that is lit when a supply ball is cut is provided at a predetermined position of the right frame LED 28c. Is provided. Further, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter referred to as “card unit”) 50 that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  From the left and right sides of the hit ball supply tray 3 on the front surface of the upper tray door frame 103 to the left and right sides of the hit ball supply tray 3, a supply tray left light emitting unit 300L having a supply tray left LED 300a and a supply tray right light emitting having a supply tray right LED 300b. The unit 300R is provided. On the front surface of the hitting ball supply tray 3, a pre-supply tray light emitting unit 301 having a supply tray LED 301 a provided inside the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided. Furthermore, a tray light emitting unit 302 is provided on the upper peripheral surface of the surplus ball tray 4. The tray light emitting unit 302 includes a tray LED 302 a provided inside the surplus ball tray 4.

  The LED driver board 35 is used for various light emitting means such as the decoration LED 25, the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, the right frame LED 28c, the supply tray left LED 300a, the supply tray right LED 300b, the supply tray left and right outside LED 300c, the supply tray front LED 301a, the tray LED 302a. Is supplied with a drive signal for lighting. In addition, an audio output signal is supplied from the audio output board 70 to the speaker 27.

  A game ball fired from the ball striking device in response to the player's operation enters the game area 7 through the ball striking rail, and then descends the game area 7. When a game ball enters the first start port 15a and is detected by the first start port switch 13a, or enters the second start port 15b and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, a special symbol variation display is displayed. If it can be started, the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 starts to be displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol variable display is not ready to start, the number of reserved memories is increased by one.

  The special symbol variation display on the special symbol display 8 stops when a predetermined variation time (the time from the variation start time to the display result derivation display time) has elapsed. If the special symbol at the time of stoppage (stop symbol) is a big hit symbol, the game shifts to a big hit game state. In the big hit gaming state, the opening control is performed so that the special winning opening by the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins. The opening control continues for a predetermined number of times (predetermined round: for example, 15 rounds). The next round may be started on the condition that the V winning area provided in the big winning opening is won while the big winning opening is open.

  When the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 at the time of stoppage is a predetermined special big hit symbol (probable variation big hit symbol) of the big hit symbol, the probability that it will be determined that the big hit after the big hit gaming state is normal It becomes a more advantageous state for the player in a probability variation state (probability variation state: also referred to as a high probability state) that is higher than that in the state.

  Further, in the high probability state, control is performed to derive and display the display result at an early stage by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display 10 (the time from the start of fluctuation to the time when the display result is derived and displayed). Further, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, the opening time of the movable piece 13 of the start winning device 15 is lengthened, and the number of times of opening is increased. Further, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to a short time state (a state in which the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened) for a predetermined period. The short time state continues until the special symbol change (variable display) is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times).

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 95, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a variable display control unit 49 including an effect control board 80A on which an effect control microcomputer 110 for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer, etc. A game control board (main board) 31 on which is mounted, an audio output board 70, an LED driver board (not shown), a payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control, and the like are mounted. Various substrates are installed. The game control board 31 is stored in the board storage case 200.

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power supply substrate 910 and a touch sensor substrate 91A on which power supply circuits for generating various power supply voltages such as DC30V, DC21V, DC12V, and DC5V are mounted. The power supply board 910 is supplied with the game control board 31 and each electrical component control board (the effect control board 80 and the payout control board 37) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and each electrical component (power is supplied) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A power switch is provided as a power supply permission means for executing or cutting off the power supply to the component operating by the operation. Further, a replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch (inside the substrate).

  The case cover in the substrate storage case 200 for storing the main substrate 31 is formed with a plurality of square tubular fixed portions 255a to 255d at locations facing the screw holes of the case body 201 in the substrate storage case 200. ing. The first fixed portion 255 is constituted by these fixing portions. In addition, the role of the 1st to-be-adhered part 255 etc. are mentioned later.

  An electrical component control means including an electrical component control microcomputer is mounted on the electrical component control board. The electrical component control means is an electrical component (game device: ball payout device 97, effect display device 9, LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like. The light emitter, speaker 27, etc.). Hereinafter, the game control board 31 may be included in the electric component control board for explanation. In that case, the electrical component control means mounted on the electrical component control board includes a game control means and a means for controlling the electrical components provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a command signal from the game control means or the like. Point to each. A board on which a microcomputer other than the game control board 31 is mounted may be referred to as a sub board.

  On the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a terminal board 159 having terminals for outputting various information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed above. The terminal board 159 includes at least a ball break terminal for introducing the output of the ball break detection switch 167 and outputting it externally, a prize ball terminal for outputting award ball information (prize ball number signal), and a ball. A ball lending terminal for externally outputting lending information (ball lending number signal) is provided.

  The game ball stored in the storage tank 38 passes through a guide rail (not shown), and reaches a ball payout device 97 covered with a payout case 40A through a curve rod. Above the ball payout device 97, a ball break switch 187 is provided as a game medium break detection means. When the ball break switch 187 detects a ball break, the payout operation of the ball payout device 97 stops. The ball break switch 187 is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage, but the ball break detection switch 167 for detecting the shortage of supply balls in the storage tank 38 is also an upstream portion of the guide rail (in the storage tank 38). (Proximate part). When the ball break detection switch 167 detects a shortage of game balls, the game balls are replenished to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the replenishment mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  When a large number of game balls as prizes based on winning a prize or a game ball based on a ball lending request are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 is full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball guide passage. When the game ball is further paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses a full tank switch 48 (see FIG. 96) as a storage state detection unit, and the full tank switch 48 as a storage state detection unit is turned on. . In this state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the ball hitting device is also stopped.

  FIG. 96 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the game control board 31. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 96, the payout control board 37, the LED driver board 35, the audio output board 70, the interface board 66, the relay board (peripheral command relay board) 177, and the effect control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 are shown. 80 is also shown. The main board (game control board) 31 includes a game control microcomputer 560 corresponding to a basic circuit (corresponding to game control means) for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program, a gate switch 32a, and a first start port switch 13a. The input driver circuit 58 for supplying the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, the winning port switches (ordinary winning port switches) 29a and 30a to the game control microcomputer 560, and the movable piece 13 of the starting winning device 15 are opened and closed. The output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560, and various information signals according to the command from the game control microcomputer 560 are used for hole management. Pachinko games such as computers An information output circuit 53 for outputting to the device provided to one outside is mounted. The information signal output from the information output circuit 53 is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer that collects gaming data of gaming machines) via the information terminal board.

  Information signals output from the information output circuit 53 include, for example, one jackpot information signal, two jackpot information signals, three jackpot information signals, a high probability information signal, a short time information signal, a first start information signal, and a second start information signal. is there.

  The jackpot 1 information signal, the jackpot 2 information signal, and the jackpot 3 information signal are signals indicating the occurrence of the jackpot, and each include information indicating the types of jackpots such as the probability variation jackpot and the non-probability variation jackpot. The high probability information signal is a signal indicating whether or not the state is in a probable variation state. The time reduction information signal is a signal indicating whether or not the time reduction state is present. The first start information signal is a signal indicating that a game ball has won the first start port 15a. The second start information signal is a signal indicating that a game ball has won the second start port 15b.

  Note that the switches such as the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, the winning port switches 29a and 30a may be referred to as sensors. That is, the name of the game medium detection means is not limited as long as it is a game medium detection means (game ball detection means in this example) that can detect a game ball. The first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a and 30a that perform winning detection are also winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game ball.

  Note that even if a passing gate such as the gate 32 is used, a game ball enters the passing gate as long as a prize ball is paid out. In that case, a switch (for example, the gate switch 32a) provided in the passing gate becomes the winning detection means.

  The game control microcomputer 560 is in accordance with a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means (variation data storage means for storing fluctuation data) used as a work memory, and a program. A CPU 56 that is a processor that performs control operations and an I / O port unit 57 are included. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. Note that the one-chip microcomputer may include at least the RAM 55 in addition to the CPU 56. In addition, the ROM 54 and the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached or built in. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  On the main board 31, a random number generation circuit 506 that generates hardware random numbers based on white noise is mounted. The game control microcomputer 560 receives data output from the random number generation circuit 506 at a predetermined time, and sets the input data in a counter (RAM 55 area) for generating random numbers.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, what the game control microcomputer 560 described below executes (or performs processing) means that the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on boards other than the game control board 31. The game control means is realized by a game control microcomputer 560 including a CPU 56.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part of the RAM 55 is kept for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). Or the entire contents are preserved. In particular, at least data corresponding to the control state of the game (special symbol process flag or the like) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the RAM 55 as backup data. The data corresponding to the control state is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire storage area of the RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal from the power supply board 910 is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 becomes operable, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 becomes inoperative. The reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (including the game control board 31), or a reset circuit is mounted on one or more of the plurality of electric component control boards, and a reset signal is output therefrom. May be supplied to another electric component control board.

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board 910 has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the game control microcomputer 560. The power-off signal is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. In addition, a clear signal indicating that a clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  As shown in FIG. 96, a verification machine 365 can be connected to the main board 31. The collator 365 determines whether or not the main board 31 is a legitimate board based on a board ID uniquely assigned to the main board 31 (for example, an ID number unique to the game control microcomputer 560). This is a device that displays the determination result. In the ROM 54 provided in the main board 31, a board ID uniquely assigned to the main board 31 itself is registered. The collator 365 stores in advance a board ID uniquely assigned to the main board 31. The collator 365 collates the board ID sent from the main board 31 via the collation terminal 364 (see FIG. 135) with the board ID of the main board 31 stored by itself, and if they match, the collation is OK. The lamp on the side is turned on, and if it does not match, the lamp on the verification NG side is turned on.

  FIG. 97 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 177, the effect control board 80, the LED driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 97, the LED driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Moreover, you may provide only the effect control board 80 regarding effect control, without providing the LED driver board | substrate 35 and the audio | voice output board | substrate 70. FIG. Also, here, the LED driver board 35 is illustrated, but when a circuit for driving a light emitter (such as a lamp) other than the LED provided in the gaming machine is also mounted, it is also expressed as a lamp driver board. .

  Here, the case where the effect control board 80, the LED driver board 35, and the audio output board 70 are provided independently will be described as an example. However, an effect control board 80A on which circuits that realize all the functions of the circuits mounted on the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the LED driver board 35 may be provided (see FIG. 95). Even if the production control board 80, the LED driver board 35, and the audio output board 70 are provided independently, or the production control board 80A is provided, production control means for controlling the production display device 9 and the like, The operation of the light emitter driving means for driving the LED and the lamp and the driving means for driving the speaker 27 and the like are the same.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 110 including an effect control CPU 111, ROM and RAM. The ROM and RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 111 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 177 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. In addition, the effect control CPU 111 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 177 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 177). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  Further, the signal direction regulation that allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass through the relay board 177 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 177). A unidirectional circuit 177A as a means is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 97 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit 177A is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571, which is also a unidirectional circuit, the signal going from the relay board 177 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, a signal from the relay board 177 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 177 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 111 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the LED driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 111 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the LED driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 382 via the input driver 381. The LED driver 382 amplifies the signals for driving the LEDs, and the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, the right frame LED 28c, the supply tray left LED 300a, the supply tray right LED 300b, the supply tray left and right outside LED 300c, the supply tray front LED 301a, the tray LED 302a, etc. Is supplied to each lamp provided on the frame side. Moreover, it supplies to decoration LED25 provided in the frame side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The effect control CPU 111 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol or the like (including a decorative design and a background design) in advance. The effect control CPU 111 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 111.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 110 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent from the effect control microcomputer 110, and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

Embodiment A. FIG.
Each control board is provided with a board-side connector to which the wiring bundle (harness) -side connector is connected. If the harness-side connector can be easily detached from the board-side connector, the harness to which the regular part is connected There is a possibility that a harness to which unauthorized parts are connected is connected. Therefore, in the following, the harness-side connector cannot be easily detached from the board-side connector in the main board 31 to prevent fraud, and other control boards or switches other than the main board 31 on the side of electrical components such as switches. A structure for preventing an illegal act such as connecting the illegal board to the main board 31 via the harness by removing the connector connection (connection between the harness side connector and the board side connector) and connecting to the illegal board. explain.

  First, the structure of the substrate storage case 200 that stores the main substrate 31 will be described. FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view showing the substrate storage case, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view showing the substrate storage case, and shows an example in which the substrate storage case 200 is sealed for the second time. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view showing the assembled state of the substrate storage case 200 and the main substrate 31. FIG. 101 is a perspective view showing how the main board 31 is attached to the case cover 202. FIG. 102 is a perspective view showing a connection state of the wiring side connector. FIG. 103 is a perspective view showing an attachment state of the connector restricting member. FIG. 104 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a state in which the case body 201 and the case cover 202 are closed. FIG. 105 is a perspective view showing a sealed state of the substrate storage case 200. 106 is a cross-sectional view showing an AA cross section of the substrate storage case 200 shown in FIG. FIG. 107 is a partially broken side view showing the substrate storage case 200. FIG. 108A is a cross-sectional view showing a BB cross section of the substrate storage case 200 shown in FIG. FIG. 108 (b) is a cross-sectional view showing a CC cross section of the substrate storage case 200 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the substrate storage case 200 includes a case main body 201 that covers the back surface side of the main substrate 31, and a case cover 202 that covers the mounting surface 31a (see FIG. 104) side of the main substrate 31. 31 is assembled so as to sandwich it. A board-side connector to which an electronic component such as a game control microcomputer 560 or a wiring-side connector provided at one end of a wiring extending from another board is connected to the mounting surface 31a of the main board 31. 238a to 238c are mounted. In this embodiment, three board-side connectors 238a to 238c are illustrated, but the number of connectors to be mounted is arbitrary, and actually three or more connectors may be mounted.

  The board storage case 200 is attached to the outside of the case cover 201 and is a connector regulating member 500 for preventing the wiring side connectors (harness side connectors) 290a to 290c connected to the board side connectors 238a to 238c from being pulled out. It has. The main board 31 is housed in a sealed state inside the board housing case 200 while being attached to the back side of the case cover 202.

  The case body 201 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is formed into a rectangular parallelepiped shape having a bottom plate 201a formed in a substantially rectangular shape and side walls 203 to 206 formed so as to surround the periphery of the bottom plate 201a. ing. On the inner surfaces of the side walls 205 and 206, a plurality of support ribs 207 facing in the vertical direction and supporting the periphery of the back surface of the main substrate 31 in the sealed state (closed state) shown in FIG. In addition, a positioning rib 270 that faces the vertical direction for positioning the case cover 202 is formed at the longitudinal center position on the inner surfaces of the side wall 203 and the blocking wall 216.

  As shown in FIG. 98, one short side wall 203 has a central side wall 203a located at the approximate center in the longitudinal direction, bulging walls 203b and 203c located on the left and right sides of the central side wall 203a, and a central side wall 203a. And a connecting wall 203d that connects the bulging walls 203b and 203c to each other. That is, the bulging walls 203b and 203c and the connecting wall 203d form substantially rectangular bulging portions 208a and 208b bulging outward from the inside of the main body on the left and right sides in the longitudinal direction of the central side wall 203a. ing.

  Inside the bulging portions 208a and 208b are formed bulging spaces S2 and S3 that respectively communicate with a substantially rectangular substrate storage space S1 formed inside the case body 201. That is, the inside is configured to be hollow. In the bulging space S2 of one bulging portion 208a, a screw accommodating portion 209 that accommodates a plurality (three in this embodiment) of spare one-way screws 281 is provided.

  The screw storage portion 209 includes a plate-like portion 209a that is slightly lower than the side wall 203 standing from the bottom plate 201a of the case body 201, and a plurality of cylindrical shapes that are formed at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction of the plate-like portion 209a. Part 209b. Each cylindrical portion 209b is formed with an insertion hole 209c having a predetermined depth slightly larger than the diameter of the screw portion of the spare one-way screw 281 and smaller than the diameter of the head. A spare one-way screw 281 can be inserted into and stored in the insertion hole 209c from the top opening (see FIG. 108 (a)).

  The plate-like portion 209a has both ends in the longitudinal direction continuous to the inner surfaces of the side wall 206 and the connecting wall 203d. The plate-like portion 209a is disposed so as to partition the substrate storage space S1 and the bulging space S2 in parallel with the bulging wall 203b. In addition, locking holes 210 that can lock the locking claws 251 of the case cover 202 are formed in the lower portions of the bulging walls 203b and 203c (see FIG. 108A).

  The spare one-way screw 281 is screwed by rotation in one direction. However, it is a screw having a function that cannot be rotated even if it is rotated in the other direction, that is, the screw cannot be loosened. Specifically, it is composed of a screw part 283 having a male screw part formed on the outer periphery and a head part 284 provided at the upper end of the screw part 283, and the diameter of the head part 284 is larger than the diameter of the screw part 283. It has a diameter (see FIG. 108 (a)). The one-way screw 280 is configured in the same manner as the spare one-way screw 281. However, the color of the one-way screw 280 used for fixing first is different from the color of the spare one-way screw 281.

  On the outside of the central side wall 203a, a second fixed portion 212 is formed in which a plurality of (four in this embodiment) screw holes 211a to 211d to which the one-way screw 280 is screwed are formed. As shown in FIGS. 98 and 107, the adherend portion 212 is installed between the connecting walls 203d and 203d outside the central side wall 203a, and the screw holes 211a to 211d are arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction. The formed fixing piece 212a and a cylindrical portion 212b suspended from a position corresponding to each of the screw holes 211a to 211d on the lower surface of the fixing piece 212a. The screw holes 211a to 211d are formed in a cylindrical shape from the fixing piece 212a. It is formed to a predetermined depth over the portion 212b.

  The fixing piece 212 a is connected to the side wall 203. Three sides of the fixed piece 212 a are in contact with the central side wall 203 a and both connecting walls 203 d of the side wall 203. The long side of the fixing piece 212a opposite to the central side wall 203a is formed on the same plane as the bulging walls 203b and 203d. That is, it is formed so as not to protrude outward from the bulging portions 208a and 208b on both sides. Therefore, even if the case main body 201 is accidentally dropped, the second fixed portion 212 is protected by the bulging portions 208a and 208b on both sides and is not damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 98 and FIG. 104, the other short side wall 204 is formed so as to hang downward from the tip of the inward piece 204a and an inward piece 204a that is connected inward from the upper end thereof. A drooping piece 204b is continuously provided. A locked recess 215 (see FIG. 104) that opens downward to lock the rotating pivot piece of the case cover 202 is formed in the longitudinal direction by the inner surface of the side wall 204, the inward piece 204a, and the hanging piece 204b. Yes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 104, an opening is formed below the locked recess 215 in the bottom plate 201a. A closed wall 216 having a height lower than that of the side wall 204 is provided so as to rise from the opening edge, and the space between the lower end of the side wall of the case cover 202 and the upper surface of the bottom plate 201a is covered from the outside in the sealed state. .

  On the lower surface of the bottom plate 201a, when attaching the case body 201 to a substrate storage case attachment plate (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of attachment plate latches that can be engaged with the substrate storage case attachment plate A claw 217 and a positioning piece 218 for positioning at the time of attachment are provided so as to protrude.

  The case cover 202 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and surrounds three edges of the upper plate 220 formed in a substantially rectangular shape and the peripheral sides of the upper plate 220 as shown in FIGS. The side walls 230 to 232 are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose lower surface is opened. One of the two long sides of the upper plate 220 is recessed downward in the longitudinal direction, and a strip-shaped recess 234 having a predetermined width is formed in a part of the upper plate 220.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 106, the upper plate 220 includes a low covering surface portion 220 a provided at a position where a surface (back surface) facing the mounting surface 31 a substantially contacts the mounting surface 31, and It is composed of a high covering surface portion 220b provided at a position farther from the mounting surface 31a than the low covering surface portion 220a, and an inclined covering surface portion 220c connecting the low covering surface portion 220a and the high covering surface portion 220b. A concave portion 234 is formed by the inclined covering surface portion 220c.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the low covering surface portion 220a is a strip-shaped connector mounting region S10 (FIG. 100) formed along one long side of the mounting surface 31a of the main board 31 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. And a connector opening 236a for passing the connection port 238d of the plurality of board-side connectors 238a to 238c mounted in the connector mounting region S10 and the upper portion of the main body to the outside of the case cover 202. To 236c are formed.

  Further, the back surface of the low covering surface portion 220a substantially comes into contact with the mounting surface 31a of the main substrate 31 as shown in FIG. 106 with the main substrate 31 attached. In addition, in each of the connector openings 236a to 236c, the opening edge and the various connectors 238a to 238a to prevent foreign matter such as wire or wiring from entering between the opening edge and the main body side surface of the various connectors 238a to 238c. For example, the gap between the main body side surface of 238c is formed so as to have a gap of about 1 mm or less.

  The high covering surface portion 220b is a main component mounting area (an area other than the area shown by hatching in the drawing) other than the connector mounting area S10 on the mounting surface 31a of the main board 31, that is, an electronic component such as a game control microcomputer 560 and various circuits. In order to cover the upper part of the region where the etc. are mounted, it is arranged at a position higher than the low covering surface portion 220a, that is, at a position farther from the mounting surface 31a than the low covering surface portion 220a.

  The inclined covering surface portion 220c is provided so as to be inclined downward from one side edge of the high covering surface portion 220b toward one side edge of the low covering surface portion 220a. A plurality of engagement holes 502 into which a plurality of locking claws 501 formed in the connector restricting member 500 are engaged are formed at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction at the upper portion on the high covering surface portion 220b side.

  101. As shown in FIG. 101, two mounting posts 240 having screw holes 240a to which board mounting screws 239 for mounting the main board 31 are mounted project on one diagonal line at the four corners of the back surface of the upper plate 220. (FIG. 101 shows only one of them). In addition, positioning protrusions (not shown) for positioning at the time of mounting are provided so as to protrude two on the other diagonal, so that the main substrate 31 can be mounted on the back side of the case cover 202. Yes.

  When the main board 31 is attached, the main board 31 is pressed against the back surface side of the case cover 202 with the mounting surface 31a of the main board 31 facing the back surface of the case cover 202, that is, with the mounting surface 31a facing upward. . Then, the positioning holes 243 formed at the two corners corresponding to the positioning convex portions on the main board 31 are inserted into the positioning convex portions so that the connectors 238a to 238c pass through the connector openings 236a to 236c, respectively. In the state of being inserted and positioned, the board mounting screws 239 are attached to the screw mounting holes 242 formed at the two corners corresponding to the mounting posts 240 of the main board 31, and the board mounting screws 239 are screwed to the screw holes 240a. To do.

  In a state where the main substrate 31 is attached to the case cover 202, the back surface of the low covering surface 220a of the upper plate 220 and the mounting surface 31a are opposed to each other and are substantially in contact with each other (see FIG. 106). Therefore, even if a foreign object such as a wire or a wire is inserted between the opening edge of each connector opening 236a to 236c and the main body side surface of each connector 238a to 238c, a main board on which a game control microcomputer or the like is mounted It is difficult to enter toward the center of 31 and fraud is effectively prevented.

  In addition, a rectangular column-shaped cap that holds a cap suspension support body 245 (see FIGS. 98 and 99) in which a plurality of caps 265 that cover the head 284 of the one-way screw 280 are connected to a predetermined rear surface of the high covering surface 220b. A holding part (not shown) is provided downward. The cap 265 in the cap suspension support body 245 covers the head 284 of the spare one-way screw 281 and has a total number (three) of the spare one-way screw 281.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the cap 265 is provided with a pair of locking pieces 268 having locking claws 267 formed at the lower end. By locking the locking claw 267 to the stepped portion 266 formed on the inner surface of the fixed portions 255b to 255d, the cap 265 is held so as to close the upper surface openings of the fixed portions 255b to 255d. The locking claw 267 is for fitting into a step portion 266 provided inside the fixed portions 255b to 255d to prevent the cap 265 from being pulled out.

  On the upper surface of the upper plate 220, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, a model name display recess 247 for attaching a model name seal (not shown) indicating the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1, An inspection name display recess 248 is provided for attaching an inspection history seal (not shown) in which items such as “inspector” and “inspection date” written when the main board 31 is inspected are attached. Yes.

  In portions corresponding to the bulging portions 208a and 208b on the side of the case body 201 on the side wall 230, bulging portion covers 250a and 250b that are slightly smaller than the bulging portions 208a and 208b are formed so as to bulge outward. Has been. The bulging portion covers 250a and 250b enter inside the bulging walls 203b and 203c and the connecting wall 203d constituting the bulging portions 208a and 208b in the sealed state, and close the upper portions of the bulging spaces S2 and S3.

  The bulging portion covers 250a and 250b are formed in a hollow shape, and the internal space of one of the bulging portion covers 250b is separated from the substrate storage space in the case cover 202 by the side wall 230 and becomes an independent space. . The inner space of the other bulging portion cover 250a is cut out at a portion corresponding to the bulging portion cover 250a on the side wall 230, and communicates with the substrate storage space of the case cover 202 (see FIG. 108 (a)).

  The wall portions corresponding to the locking holes 210 formed in the bulging portions 208a and 208b in the bulging portion covers 250a and 250b can be elastically deformed via two slits cut out upward from the lower end. A locking piece 252 is formed. An outward locking claw 251 that can be locked in the locking hole 210 is formed at the lower end of the locking piece 252, and is locked when the upper surface of the case body 201 is closed by the case cover 202, that is, in a sealed state. The claw 251 is locked in the locking hole 210.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), on the upper wall rear surface 254 of the bulge portion cover 250a corresponding to the screw storage portion 209, screw restriction ribs 253 extending in the longitudinal direction of the bulge portion cover 250a are provided. It is provided downward (see FIG. 98). Specifically, the screw regulating rib 253 is parallel to the plate-like portion 209a immediately above the plate-like portion 209a of the screw storage portion 209 in a state where the upper surface of the case body 201 is closed by the case cover 202, that is, in a sealed state. The upper wall rear surface 254 of the bulging portion cover 250a is provided downward from a position facing the plate-like portion 209a. That is, a predetermined length is extended from the position facing the upper surface opening of the insertion hole 209c on the upper wall rear surface 254 toward the upper surface opening of the insertion hole 209c. Specifically, the lower end has a length close to the head 284 of each spare one-way screw 281 inserted into the insertion hole 209c.

  In the sealed state, the screw accommodating portion 209 of the spare one-way screw 281 accommodated in the screw accommodating portion 209 by the screw restricting rib 253 extending downward from the upper wall rear surface 254 of the bulging portion cover 250a. Deviations from are prevented. That is, it is reliably prevented that the spare one-way screw 281 deviates from the screw storage portion 209 and enters the substrate storage space S1 to damage the substrate.

  As shown in FIG. 98, a plurality (four in this embodiment) of rectangular tubular fixed portions 255 a to 255 d are provided between the bulging portion covers 250 a and 250 b on the side wall 203. A plurality of screw holes 211a to 211d are formed at locations facing each of the screw holes 211a to 211d. The first fixed portion 255 is constituted by these fixing portions.

  As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108 (b), each of the fixed portions 255a to 255d includes a square columnar screw insertion portion 256 into which the one-way screw 280 and the spare one-way screw 281 can be inserted, a screw insertion portion 256 and a side wall. 230 and a connecting portion (a part of the case cover 202) 257 that connects to 230. Then, the screw insertion portion 256 is arranged with a predetermined distance away from the side wall 230 via the connecting portion 257. Therefore, the connecting portion 257 can be cut with a tool such as a nipper. Further, a plurality of connecting portions 257 are provided outward from the outer surface of the side wall 230 that is one side edge of the case cover 202, and fixed portions 255 a to 255 d are provided at the tips of the connecting portions 257.

  The screw insertion portion 256 is a bottomed cylindrical body whose upper surface is open, and has a size capable of accommodating the one-way screw 280 therein. The bottom plate 258 has a diameter of the head 284 of the one-way screw 280. A mounting hole 259 having a smaller diameter is formed. The mounting hole 259 is disposed at a position opposite to the screw holes 211a to 211d in the sealed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 98 and 104, the side wall 231 corresponding to the side wall 204 in which the locked recess 215 on the case body 201 side is formed has an upward engagement that can be locked to the locked recess 215 at the tip. A locking piece 261 provided with a stop 260 in the longitudinal direction is provided outward.

  The case main body 201 and the case cover 202 configured as described above have the inner surface of the side wall 205 of the case main body 201 and the low covering surface portion of the case cover 202 in a state where the upper surface opening of the case main body 201 is closed by the case cover 202. A gap portion 505 through which the vertical plate 500b can be inserted is formed along the inner surface of the side wall 205 between the end surface of the long side 220d (see FIG. 102) which is the side facing the inner surface of the side wall 205 in 220a. 106).

  Next, the structure of the connector restricting member 500 will be described. The connector regulating member 500 is formed of a plate member made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is configured to be attachable to the outside of the case cover 202 as shown in FIG. The width dimension of the plate material is slightly shorter than the width dimension in the longitudinal direction of the long side 202 d of the case cover 202. The connector restricting member 500 includes an upper plate 500a formed slightly larger than the low covering surface 220a of the case cover 202 when mounted, a vertical plate 500b provided downward from the outer end of the upper plate 500a, and a vertical plate. A lower plate 500c provided in the same direction so as to be parallel to the upper plate 500a from the lower end of 500b is formed in a substantially U-shape.

  The long side 500d of the upper plate 500a can be inserted into each of the plurality of engagement holes 502 and can be elastically deformed. Further, a locking piece having an upward locking claw 501 formed at the tip is provided so as to protrude substantially parallel to the upper plate 500a, and the locking piece is passed through the case hole 202 through the engagement hole 502. In FIG. 2, the locking claw 501 is locked to the upper edge of the engagement hole 502 on the back surface of the case cover 202.

  In the upper plate 500a, elongated rectangular wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c capable of passing the wirings 291a to 291c extending from the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c are formed in the longitudinal direction. Wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c through which the wirings 291a to 291c can pass are provided from the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c toward the long side 500d.

  Each wiring 291a-291c is what is called a flat cable. Therefore, the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c and the wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c are formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. That is, the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c are formed such that the long side and the short side are shorter than the long side and the short side of the main body of the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c, and it is impossible to pass the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c. And the wirings 291a to 291c are formed to be allowed to pass therethrough. Further, the wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c are formed to have a width dimension that can be inserted from the long side 500d side in a state where the wirings 291a to 291c are parallel to the wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c.

  Therefore, the wirings 291a to 291c can be arranged in the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c by inserting the wirings 291a to 291c into the wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c from the long side 500d side and drawing them to the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c. it can.

  The wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c are formed in parallel to each other so as to incline with respect to the opening long edge sides of the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c, and in the longitudinal center of the opening long edge side. It extends obliquely from the position toward the long side 500d. Accordingly, the wires 291a to 291c drawn through the wire insertion slits 504a to 504c can be obliquely advanced into the wire insertion openings 503a to 503c, so that the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c can be smoothly inserted. Can enter.

  Further, since the wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c are provided from the central position in the longitudinal direction of the long edge of the opening, the wirings 291a to 291c are arranged in a state where the wirings 291a to 291c are disposed in the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c. Both ends in the column direction are not separated from the connection portions with the wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c, and the wirings 291a to 291c do not return back into the wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c. That is, the width of the wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c is narrower than one side of the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c.

  The lower plate 500c is provided in the same direction as the upper plate 500a from the lower end of the vertical plate 500b, and its width is slightly shorter than the width dimension of the short side of the main substrate 31. That is, it is a length that can cover almost the entire back surface 31b (opposite surface of the mounting surface 31a) of the main substrate 31 (see FIG. 106).

  The connector regulating member 500 formed in this way is used to insert the wirings 291a to 291c from the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c connected to the board side connectors 238a to 238c through the wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c. After passing through the openings 503a to 503c, the case cover 202 is brought close to the case cover 202 from the side, the locking claw 501 is inserted into the engagement hole 502, and one end is locked to the case cover 202. Can be temporarily fixed.

  In this state, the upper plate 500a covers the upper and outer sides of the low covering surface portion 220a with the upper plate 500a and the vertical plate 500b, and the back surface 31b of the main board 31 is covered with the lower plate 500c.

  Next, with the case main body 201 and the case cover 202 configured in this manner, the main board 31 is housed in a sealed state, and the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c are pulled out by the connector restricting member 500. Explain the regulatory situation.

  When the main substrate 31 is stored in a sealed state, first, the cap suspension support 245 is attached to a cap holding portion (not shown) provided on the back surface of the case cover 202, and then the main substrate 31 is attached to the case cover 202. Attach to the back side. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101, the main board 31 is pushed to the back surface side of the case cover 202 with the mounting surface 31a facing the back surface of the case cover 202, that is, with the mounting surface 31a facing upward. Hit it. Then, the positioning holes 243 formed at the two corners corresponding to the positioning convex portions 241 in the main board 31 so that the board side connectors 238a to 238c pass through the connector openings 236a to 236c, respectively. In a state of being positioned through the portion 241, the board mounting screws 239 are mounted in the screw mounting holes 242 formed in the two corners corresponding to the mounting posts 240 of the main board 31, and the board mounting screws 239 are mounted in the screw holes 240 a. Screw on.

  As shown in FIG. 102, when the main board 31 is attached to the back side of the case cover 202, the upper portions of the board-side connectors 238a to 238c are exposed to the outside of the case cover 202 through the connector openings 236a to 236c. The That is, since the connection port 238d formed on the upper surface of the main body of each of the board side connectors 238a to 238c is opened upward to the outside of the case cover 202, each board can be passed without passing the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c through the case cover 202. Each wiring side connector 290a-290c can be inserted and connected to the connection port 238d of the side connectors 238a-238c.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103, the wirings 291a to 291c from the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c connected to the board side connectors 238a to 238c are inserted into the wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c from the long side 500d side. After inserting and passing through the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c, the case cover 202 is made to approach from the side, the locking claw 501 is inserted into the engagement hole 502, and one end is locked to the case cover 202. Temporarily fix the case cover 202.

  In this way, the wirings 291a to 291c can be easily passed through the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c in a state where the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c of the wirings 291a to 291c are connected to the board side connectors 238a to 238c. . In addition, it is not necessary to pass a wiring side connector (not shown) provided at the end of the wirings 291a to 291c opposite to the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c through the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c. For example, even when the ends of the wirings 291a to 291c opposite to the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c are directly connected to another board (not shown) without using a connector or the like, the wiring side connector 290a ˜290c does not need to pass through the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c, and it is not necessary to form a large opening in the upper plate 500a. Therefore, the strength reduction of the connector restricting member 500 is prevented.

  In the case main body 201, as shown in FIG. 100, the spare one-way screw 281 is stored in the insertion hole 209c (see FIG. 108 (a)) of the screw storage portion 209. At this time, the threaded portion 283 can be easily housed simply by passing the threaded portion 283 into the insertion hole 209c from above the upper surface opening of each insertion hole 209c. In this stored state, the screw portion 283 is completely stored in the insertion hole 209c, and only the head portion 284 is held in a state of protruding outward from the upper surface opening of the insertion hole 209c (see FIG. 108 (a)). . Therefore, when using the stored one-way screw 281 for spare use, the head 284 can be easily taken out by simply picking it.

  Next, the upper surface opening of the case body 201 is closed with the case cover 202 to which the main board 31 is integrally attached and the connector restricting member 500 is temporarily fixed to the outside. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the case cover 202 is inclined so that the locking piece 260 protruding outward from one short side of the case cover 202 faces downward, that is, With the back surface 31b of the main substrate 31 facing the case body 201, the locking piece 260 is inserted between the upper end of the blocking wall 216 and the lower end of the hanging piece 204b in the case body 201. Then, with the locking strip 260 locked in the locked recess 215, the case cover 202 is rotated around the locking portion in the direction of the arrow in the figure, and the case cover 202 is rotated toward the case body 201. It fits in the space surrounded by the side walls 203-206.

  The bulging portion covers 250a and 250b are fitted into the bulging spaces S2 and S3 of the bulging portions 208a and 208b of the case main body 201, and both the locking claws 251 are respectively locked to the opening upper edge of the locking hole 210. The As a result, one short side of the case cover 202 is locked by the locking strip 260 and the locked recess 215, and the other short side is locked by the locking claw 251 and the locking hole 251. The case cover 202 is temporarily fixed to the case main body 201. In this state, the case cover 202 can be easily opened by pushing the respective locking claws 251 inward from the outside of the locking holes 210 to release the locked state.

  In this state, the lower ends of the screw regulating ribs 253 provided downward from the upper wall rear surface 254 of the bulging portion cover 250a are the heads of the three spare one-way screws 281 housed in the screw housing portion 209. Arranged close to the portion 284. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the spare one-way screw 281 from deviating from the screw storage portion 209 and entering the board storage space S1, damaging the wiring pattern of the main board 31 and disconnecting it.

  In addition, since the lower ends of the side walls 230 to 233 of the case cover 202 are deeper than the upper ends of the side walls 203 to 206 of the case main body 201, a wire or the like is inserted between the case main body 201 and the case cover 202. It becomes difficult to enter foreign objects.

  Further, since the screw storage portion 209 is provided in the bulging space S2 of the bulging portion 208a, the main substrate 31 is disposed at a position lower than the upper end of the screw storage portion 209 in the substrate storage space S1. However, it does not interfere with the screw storage portion 209 (see FIG. 108 (b)).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 106, a vertical plate of the connector regulating member 500 is formed in a gap portion 505 formed between the inner surface of the side wall 205 of the case body 201 and the long side 220d of the low covering surface portion 220a of the case cover 202. It is arranged with 500b inserted. Further, the entire lower surface of the lower plate 500 c is placed on the upper surface of the bottom plate 201 a of the case body 201. The connector restricting member 500 is stably held with respect to the case body 201, and the back surface 31b of the main board 31 is covered with the lower plate 500c.

  In other words, the connector restricting member 500 whose one end is locked to the case cover 202 via the locking claw 501 has the lower plate 500c and the lower portion of the vertical plate 500b constituting a part thereof in the case. Be placed.

  Further, in this state, the first fixed portion 255 of the case cover 202 is disposed above the second fixed portion 212 of the case body 201. In other words, when each of the fixed portions 255a to 255d is placed on the upper surface of the fixing piece 212a, the screw holes 211a to 211d and the mounting holes 259 are aligned, and the one-way screw 280 can be passed. . Here, the one-way screw 280 is inserted from the upper surface opening of the screw insertion portion 256 of any one of the four fixed portions 255a to 255d (for example, the fixed portion 255a), and the tip of the screw portion 283 is attached to the mounting hole. In the state of being inserted into 259, the one-way screw 280 is screwed clockwise with a tool such as a flathead screwdriver.

  In the example shown in FIG. 98, the one-way screw 280 is inserted from the upper surface opening of the screw insertion portion 256 of the fixed portion 255a. Then, the one-way screw 280 is screwed clockwise.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 107, the threaded portion of the external thread formed on the outer periphery of the threaded portion 283 causes the threaded portion 283 to penetrate the attachment hole 259 and penetrate into the fixing piece 212a and the tubular portion 212b. Screwed into the screw hole 211a, the fixed piece 212a and the fixed portion 255a, that is, the second fixed portion 212 and the first fixed portion 255 are fixed (caulked) via the one-way screw 280.

  In other words, the case cover 202 has one of the short sides fixed to the case main body 201 by the locking ridge 260 being locked by the locked recess 215 and the other short side fixed through the one-way screw 280. The main cover 31 is stored in a sealed state in the substrate storage case 200 with the mounting surface 31a and the back surface 31b covered by the case main body 201 and the case cover 202. The

  After the one-way screw 280 is completely screwed in, the adhesive Z is injected into the screw insertion portion 256 from above, and then the cap 244 is fitted into the upper surface opening of the fixed portion 255a to form the upper surface of the head 284. The one-way screw 280 can be made difficult to remove by covering the groove or the like.

  In this embodiment, the cap 244 used for the first sealing is a colored cap, and the spare cap 265 connected to the cap suspension support 245 is used for the first sealing. The cap 244 used is of a different color (may be transparent). Therefore, even if a spare cap 265 obtained from a used machine of the gaming machine can be attached to the adherend portion 255a after some illegal act has been done, this is immediately recognized.

  Instead of using the colored cap 244, or using the colored cap 244, a colored adhesive may be used as the adhesive Z. When the colored adhesive is injected into the screw insertion portion 256 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, when there is any access to the one-way screw 280, there is a trace of the colored adhesive Z being scraped off. Since it becomes easy to visually recognize by color, it becomes easy to find a trace of fraud even from the outside of the transparent screw insertion portion 256.

  Further, instead of injecting the adhesive into the screw insertion portion 256, the cap 244 may be fixed by thermal welding or ultrasonic welding after the cap 244 is placed on the upper surface opening of the fixed portion 255a. . When fixed by welding, it is fixed more firmly than when fixed by an adhesive.

  Also, when trying to open the case cover 202 after releasing this sealed state, the one-way screw 280 cannot be removed by turning it counterclockwise, so that either the case body 201 or a part of the case cover 202 is destroyed. Alternatively, the connecting portion 257 can be cut with a tool such as a nipper and the screw insertion portion 256 of the fixed portion 255a fixed to the fixing piece 212a via the one-way screw 280 can be separated from the case cover 202.

  That is, regardless of the method of destruction or cutting, when the case cover 202 is opened after the sealed state is released, traces of destruction or cutting remain. As a result, for example, even when the case cover 202 is opened by an illegal act, it can be discovered that the illegal act has been performed early. Therefore, even if it is replaced with a main board having a ROM in which an illegal game control program is stored, it can be discovered and dealt with early. Therefore, it can be avoided that the game is played in that state and the game store suffers a disadvantage.

  When the connecting portion 257 is cut with a tool such as a nipper and the sealed state is normally released, the spare one-way screw 281 stored in the screw storage portion 209 is taken out, and the three fixed portions 255b to 255b. The spare one-way screw 281 is inserted from the upper surface opening of the screw insertion portion 256 of any one of 255d (for example, the fixed portion 255b), and the tip of the screw portion 283 is attached to the mounting hole 259 (FIGS. 107 and 108 ( In the state inserted in a)), the spare one-way screw 281 is screwed clockwise with a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver. Then, one cap 265 is removed from the plurality of caps 265 connected to the cap suspension support body 245, and the cap 265 is fitted into the upper surface opening of the fixed portion 255b to form a groove or the like formed on the upper surface of the head 284. Coating. When the cap 265 is attached, the cap 265 is locked by locking a locking claw 267 provided at the lower end of the cap 265 to a step 266 formed on the inner surface of the fixed portion 255b (see FIG. 99). The upper surface opening of the adherend portion 255b is held so as to be closed.

  The cap 265 is provided with a locking claw 267 so as to protrude from the cap 265, but the cap 244 used for fixing first is not provided with the locking claw 267. In addition, as shown in FIG. 99, stepped portions 266 are formed on the inner surfaces of the fixed portions 255b to 255d used for the second and subsequent fixing, but the fixed portions used for the first fixing as shown in FIG. The step portion 266 is not formed in the portion 255a. That is, the shapes of the cap 244 and the fixed portion 255a used for the first fixing are different from the shapes of the cap 265 and the fixed portions 255b to 255d used for the second and subsequent fixing. Accordingly, the cap 265 cannot be attached to the fixed portion 255a. Therefore, in order not to leave the trace of opening the case cover, in order to conceal the illegal act, the joint by the one-way screw 280 is illegally released with a special tool or the like dedicated to one-way screw removal. Even if the joint portion is joined with the spare one-way screw 281 obtained from the used machine of the gaming machine after the cheating action is performed, the fixed portion 255a is further secured with the spare cap 265 obtained from the used machine of the gaming machine. It is difficult to cover the top surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult to conceal that fraud has been performed.

  In this embodiment, the shape of the cap 244 and the shape of the spare cap 265 are changed, and the shape of the fixed portion 255a and the shapes of the fixed portions 255b to 255d used for the second and subsequent fixing are changed. In this way, the storage portion is formed so that the other fixing portion covering member (cap 265 in this example) cannot be attached to one storage portion (fixed portion 255a in this example). The shape of the spare cap 265 is the same, and the shape of the fixed portion 255a is the same as the shapes of the fixed portions 255b to 255d used for the second and subsequent fixings. It is possible to realize that the fixing portion covering member forms the storage portion so that it cannot be attached to one storage portion. For example, the to-be-adhered part 255a is made into the shape which has the latching claw which protrudes similarly to the to-be-adhered parts 255b-255d. Further, the cap 244 has a shape in which a step portion is formed on the inner surface, like the spare cap 265. At the time of the first fixing, the cap 244 is attached to the fixed portion 255a (the engaging claw of the fixed portion 255a is engaged with the stepped portion of the fixed portion 255a), and heat welding or ultrasonic welding is performed. As a result, the cap 244 is fixed to the fixed portion 255a. Then, at the time of heat welding or ultrasonic welding, the shape of the stepped portion collapses, and the locking claw is deformed into a shape that cannot be engaged. Or, the stepped portion does not exist. In such a situation, even if a fraudulent act is performed after removing the cap 244 from the fixed portion 255a by some means and removing the one-way screw 280, it is obtained from, for example, a used machine of a gaming machine in order to conceal the fraud It is difficult to cover the upper surface of the adherend portion 255a with the spare cap 265. This is because the stepped portion that receives the locking claw 267 protruding from the cap 265 has already been deformed in the fixed portion 255a as described above. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal fraud. As a result, cheating can be made difficult.

  107 and 108 show an example in which the one-way screw 280 is used. However, in the case where the spare one-way screw 281 is used, the case main body is similar to the case where the one-way screw 280 is used. 201 and the case cover 202 can be fixed. However, since the color of the spare one-way screw 281 is different from the color of the one-way screw 280, even if the joint portion is joined with the spare one-way screw 281 obtained from a used machine of the gaming machine after cheating, , Cheating is easy.

  Further, since the case cover 202 is fixed to the case main body 201 so as not to be opened by the one-way screw 280, the connector restricting member 500 temporarily fixed to the outside of the case cover 202 is removed from the case cover 202. While being held undetachable, removal of the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c connected to the board side connectors 238a to 238c is restricted by contact with the upper plate 500a.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, in the sealed state in which the case cover 202 is fixed to the case body 201 so as not to be opened, the connector restricting member 500 has the lower plate 500c that is connected to the back surface 31b of the main board 31. By being arranged below the cover so as to cover, the upward movement is restricted by contact with the main substrate 31 attached to the back side of the case cover 202 fixed to the case body 201.

  In addition, the vertical plate 500 b continuously connected upward from the lower plate 500 c is sandwiched between the long side 220 d of the case cover 202 and the inner surface of the side wall 205 of the case main body 201, and the locking claw 501 is engaged with the engaging hole 502. By being stopped, sliding movement of the case main body 201 on the bottom plate 201a is restricted, and deformation of the upper plate 500a is also prevented. In particular, since the outer surface of the vertical plate 500b is held in close contact with the inner surface of the side wall 205 in the vertical direction, deformation of the vertical plate 500b to the outside is also prevented. That is, the lower plate 500c, the vertical plate 500b, the long side 220d of the case cover 202, and the side wall 205 constitute a restricting member holding means.

  By restricting the upward and horizontal movement of the connector restricting member 500, the connector restricting member 500 is prevented from being detached from the case cover 202, and is stably held in the substrate storage case 200. The upper surface 500a of the connector restricting member 500 held by the board storage case 200 covers the upper surface of the low covering surface portion 220a of the case cover 202, and the upper portion of the vertical plate 500b, the inclined covering surface portion 220c, and the case cover 202. The upper peripheral surface of the low covering surface portion 220a is covered by a part of the portion. Therefore, the board side connectors 238a to 238c and the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c are blocked from the outside. Accordingly, fraudulent acts on the connection portion of the connector are prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 106, since the upper plate 500a is disposed near the upper side of the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c connected to the board side connectors 238a to 238c, the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c are connected to the board side connectors 238a to 238a. When trying to pull out from 238c, the periphery of the extended portion of the wirings 291a to 291c on the upper surface of the main body of the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c is the periphery of the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c on the back surface of the upper plate 500a (contact regulation). Part). That is, since the movement of the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c in the removal / removal direction is restricted by the upper plate 500a, it is possible to connect the wiring on which unauthorized parts other than the authorized ones are connected to the board side connectors 238a to 238c. It can be effectively prevented.

  In addition, since the lower plate 500c is formed to have a size that can cover the back surface 31b of the main substrate 31, in the sealed state, it is possible to suppress an illegal act against the wiring pattern formed on the back surface 31b, and also the stability. improves. In this embodiment, the lower plate 500c is formed to have a size capable of covering the back surface 31b of the main board 31. However, the upward movement of the connector restricting member 500 is prevented from contacting the back surface 31b of the main board 31. As long as it has a length that can be regulated by contact, it does not have to be formed in a size that can cover the entire back surface 31b.

  Next, after the second fixed portion 212 and the first fixed portion 255 are fixed through a one-way screw 280 to form a sealed state, the main substrate 31 is taken out due to a failure or inspection of the main substrate 31. A case where the sealed state is released and the sealed state is set again will be described.

  It should be noted that a plurality of screw holes 211a to 211d and fixed portions 255a to 255d are formed so that they can be repeatedly sealed, for example, when the manufacturer ships the main board 31 to an amusement store or the like. In order to store the main substrate 31 in the substrate storage case 200 in a sealed state, after using one screw hole 211a to 211d and the fixed portions 255a to 255d, the main substrate 31 is mounted at the game store as described above. This is because the sealed state may be released in the case of replacement due to failure or when the main board 31 is taken out for inspection or the like. After that, when the sealing state is set again, the other screw holes 211a to 211d and the to-be-fixed portions 255a to 255d are used.

  In the case of resealing, when the case cover 202 is opened, one cap 265 is separated from the cap suspension 245 and removed, and the spare one-way screw 281 is removed from the screw storage portion 209. Take out the book. Then, the upper surface opening of the case body 201 is closed by the case cover 202. Here, the spare one-way screw 281 is inserted into any one of the fixed portions 255b to 255d whose connection portion 257 has not yet been cut, and is screwed into the screw hole 211b. The sealed portion 255 can be fixed to the sealed portion 255 to form a sealed state.

  As described above, since the plurality of screw holes 211a to 211d as the second fixed portion 212 and the fixed portions 255a to 255d as the first fixed portion 255 are provided, a part of the case main body 201 or the case cover 202 is provided. Even after the sealed state is released, the sealed state can be repeatedly configured a plurality of times without cutting the connecting portion 257 without destroying the substrate, and without replacing the substrate storage case 200.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by attaching the main board 31 to the back surface of the case cover 202, the board-side connectors 238a to 238c are opened to the outside of the case cover 202 via the connector openings 236a to 236c. The Further, in a state in which the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c are connected to the opened board side connectors 238a to 238c, the connector restricting member 500 is temporarily fixed to the outside of the case cover 202 and held in the board storage case 200, thereby wiring. The extraction of the side connectors 290a to 290c is restricted by the upper plate 500a as the contact restricting portion. Even if the case cover 202 is not formed with a large insertion port or the like for allowing a wiring side connector (not shown) opposite to the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c connected to the board side connectors 238a to 238c to pass therethrough, the case Since the connector restricting member 500 can be attached to the outside of the cover 202, the strength of the connector restricting member 500 is prevented from being reduced.

  Further, since the lower plate 500c is covered with the case main body 201 and the case cover 202 which are in a sealed state, the connector can be used unless the sealed state is released or the connector restricting member 500 or a part of the substrate storage case 200 is destroyed The holding state of the regulating member 500 cannot be released. Therefore, when a part of the substrate storage case 200 is destroyed or the sealed state is released and the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c are removed, the trace remains, and it is ensured that there is a possibility that fraud has been performed. Can be found.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the lower plate 500c arranged inside the case in the sealed state functions as a restriction member holding means, the connector restriction member 500 is attached to the case using a special holding member such as a one-way screw, for example. Without being held by the cover 202 or complicating the holding structure, the case cover 202 and the case main body 201 can be easily attached to the case cover 202 only by sealing them. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the wiring on which unauthorized parts other than the authorized ones are connected to the board side connectors 238a to 238c.

  In addition, part of the connector restricting member 500 is composed of a single upper plate 500a capable of abutting and restricting the plurality of wiring side connectors 290a to 290c, and therefore each of the plurality of wiring side connectors 290a to 290c. It is not necessary to individually form a plurality of contact restricting portions corresponding to. Further, since the plurality of wiring side connectors 290a to 290c can be regulated together, the labor of holding work is reduced.

  Furthermore, not only is the movement in the direction of removing the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c restricted, but the upper side of the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c is covered, so that the board side connectors 238a to 238c and the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c Unauthorized acts on the connection are difficult. In addition, since it is not necessary to form a large insertion opening or the like for inserting the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c into the connector restricting member 500, strength reduction is prevented.

  A part of the connector restricting member 500 includes a vertical plate 500b disposed in the gap portion 505 in a sealed state and a lower plate 500c whose movement in the disengagement direction is restricted by the main substrate 31. Therefore, without using a holding member such as a screw, the vertical plate 500b can be sealed by simply inserting the vertical plate 500b into the gap 505, and the vertical plate 500b can be locked by the locking action of the lower plate 500c as a locking portion. Movement in the removal direction is restricted and held in the case. Therefore, the mounting work of the connector restricting member 500 is facilitated.

  Since the connector restricting member 500 is formed with a locking claw 501 that can be engaged with a locking hole 502 formed in the case cover 202, the locking claw 501 is engaged with the engaging hole 502. The upper plate 500a of the connector restricting member 500 is not easily deformed or damaged. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the wiring board connectors 290a to 290c from being removed from the gap formed between the case cover 202 by deforming the upper plate 500a.

  Further, since the vicinity of the connector openings 236a to 236c on the mounting surface 31a of the main board 31 is covered with the low covering surface 220a, from the gap formed between the connector openings 236a to 236c and the board side connectors 238a to 238c. It becomes difficult to insert unauthorized devices. As a result, fraudulent acts on the main board 31 can be prevented.

  Further, since the recess 234 is formed in the case cover 202 and the connector restricting member 500 is attached to the recessed portion 234, the connector restricting member 500 does not protrude greatly from the case cover 202 in the attached state. Therefore, the connector restricting member 500 does not get in the way in the state of being disposed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like.

  In addition, since the connector restricting member 500 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, the visibility in the board storage case 200 is not impaired by the connector restricting member 500, which hinders monitoring of the main board 31. Never come.

  Further, by fixing at least one pair of screw holes 211a to 211d as the first fixed parts and the fixed parts 255a to 255d as the second fixed parts among the plurality by the one-way screw 280 as the fixing member, The substrate 31 can be in a sealed state. Further, by destroying the substrate storage case 200 or cutting the connecting portions 257 of the screw holes 211a to 211d that are fixed, the sealed state can be released and the case cover 202 can be opened. Further, even after the sealing portion is released by cutting the connecting portion or the like, the pair of unused screw holes 211a to 211d and the adherend portions 255a to 255d are fixed to each other by the spare one-way screw 281 and again the main The substrate 31 can be housed inside the case in a sealed state.

  Also, by opening the substrate storage case 200, the upper surface opening of the insertion hole 209c of the screw storage portion 209 is opened, so that the spare one-way screw 281 can be easily stored and taken out from the screw storage portion 209. Further, in the sealed state of the main substrate 31, the deviation of the spare one-way screw 281 stored in the screw storage portion 209 from the screw storage portion 209 is caused by contact with the lower end of the screw restriction rib 253 as the restriction portion. Be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main substrate 31 from being damaged by the deviating spare one-way screw 281.

  Furthermore, since the screw restricting rib 253 is provided downward from the upper wall rear surface 254 of the bulging portion cover 250a toward the upper surface opening of the insertion hole 209c of the screw storage portion 209, the screw storage portion 209 is disposed. However, it is not necessary to be limited by the shape of the case cover 202 or the case main body 201 or to form the case cover 202 or the case main body 201 according to the arrangement position of the screw storage portion 209. Therefore, the design of the substrate storage case 200 can be avoided from being complicated.

  Specifically, for example, when the distance from the head 284 of the spare one-way screw 281 housed in the screw housing portion 209 to the back surface of the case cover 202 is larger than the length of the spare one-way screw 281, the spare one-way screw 281. The screw 281 may deviate from the screw storage portion 209. Therefore, for example, if the portion corresponding to the screw storage portion 209 in the case cover 202 is to be as close as possible to the upper surface opening of the insertion hole 209c of the screw storage portion 209, the overall shape of the case cover 202 or the arrangement of the screw storage portion 209 is provided. The position must be redesigned. However, by providing the screw restricting rib 253 so as to extend from a predetermined position on the back surface of the case cover 202, it is not necessary to change the design of the entire shape of the case cover 202 or the position of the screw storage portion 209.

  Further, since the screw restricting ribs 253 are extended over the longitudinal direction of the upper wall back surface 254 so that the deviation of the three spare one-way screws 281 can be restricted, the strength of the bulging portion cover 250a is increased. Therefore, for example, when the case cover 202 is dropped and dropped on the floor or the like, the bulging portion cover 250a is not easily broken, and the protective action of the first adherent portion 255 provided on the side thereof is effective. Will increase.

  In addition, since the bulging portions 208a and 208b are provided on the front and rear sides of the second adherend portion 212 and the first adherent portion 255, these are compared with the case where they are provided only on one side. The second adherend 212 and the first adherent 255 are more effectively protected.

  Further, since the screw storage portion 209 provided in the bulging space S2 of the bulging portion 208a can collectively store a plurality of spare one-way screws 281, the screw holes 211 a to 211 d and the to-be-fixed portions Compared to storing the spare one-way screw 281 in the vicinity of each of 255a to 255d, not only can the structure of the case body 201 be simplified, but also the spare one-way screw 281 can be easily managed.

  Further, since the bulging portion 208a is formed on a part of the side wall 203 of the case body 201 and the second adherend portion 212 is provided on the side of the bulging portion 208a, the substrate storage case 200 is excessively placed on the floor. Thus, the screw holes 211a to 211d and the adherend portions 255a to 255d are prevented from being easily damaged. Further, since the spare one-way screw 281 can be stored in the screw storage portion 209 provided in the expansion space S2 formed inside the expansion portion 208a, the expansion portion 208a is effectively used. In addition, it is possible to store the main board 31 so that the spare one-way screw 281 does not get in the way when the main board 31 is stored or taken out.

  That is, the bulging portion 208a and the second adherend portion 212 are arranged linearly in the longitudinal direction of one side of the case body 201, and in particular, the screw holes 211a to 211d and the screw storage portion 209. Is arranged so as to be along one side, so that no irregularities are formed in the outer shape of the case body 201. As a result, the structure of the case body 201 can be simplified, and the storage property during storage and transportation is improved.

  In addition, the screw storage portion 209 is vertically aligned with the main substrate 31 in the bulging space S2 provided so as to project outward from the substrate storage space S1 inside the case body 201, that is, in the sealed state of the main substrate 31. Since the main substrate 31 is provided so as not to protrude into the bulging space S2, the main substrate 31 and the main substrate 31 can be removed when the spare one-way screw 281 is stored and taken out. There is no interference.

  Further, the spare one-way screw 281 includes a screw portion 283 that is an insertion portion that is inserted through the upper surface opening of the insertion hole 209 c of the screw storage portion 209, and a head portion 284 that is provided at one end of the screw portion 283. The screw storage portion 209 is configured so that the head 284 is held in a state of protruding from the upper surface opening of the insertion hole 209c in a state in which the spare one-way screw 281 is housed. The one-way screw 281 can be easily taken out from the screw storage portion 209.

  The main board 31 has a mounting surface 31a on which a plurality of electronic components and board-side connectors 238a to 238c are mounted, and a back surface 31b opposite to the mounting surface 31a, and the case cover 202 is connected to the connectors 238a to 238c. Connector openings 236a to 236c for opening the connection ports 238d of the connectors 238a to 238c to the outside of the case are formed at corresponding locations, and the main board 31 can be attached. Since 31a is covered with the case cover 202 and the back surface 31b is opposed to the case body 201, it is stored in a sealed state inside the substrate storage case 200. Therefore, even if the substrate storage case 200 is opened, the case It takes time to remove the main board 31 from the cover 202, and electronic components and board-side connectors 238a to 238 are used. It becomes difficult to perform an illegal act against the like.

  Next, another aspect of the connector restricting member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111. FIG. 109 is a perspective view showing a connector restricting member and a case cover according to another embodiment. 110 is a plan view showing the substrate storage case 200 to which the connector restricting member shown in FIG. 109 is attached. FIG. 111 is a cross-sectional view showing a DD cross section of the substrate storage case 200 shown in FIG. 110.

  The connector restricting member 500 of the above embodiment is attached to the substrate storage case 200 by the lower plate 500c disposed inside the case and the vertical plate 500b disposed in the gap portion 505 when the case main body 201 and the case cover 202 are sealed. Although held, the connector restricting member 520 of this embodiment is held on the case cover 202 by the fixing screw 522.

  Hereinafter, a difference between the connector restricting member 520 of this embodiment and the connector restricting member 500 of the above embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, components similar to those of the connector restricting member 500 of the above embodiment and the board storage case are denoted by the same reference numerals in FIGS. 109 to 111, and detailed description thereof is omitted. .

  Connector restricting member 520 is formed of a plate member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. As shown in FIG. 109, the connector restricting member 520 includes a top plate 520a that can cover the upper side of the low covering surface portion 220a, and a vertical plate 520b that extends downward from the outer end of the top plate 520a. It is formed in a substantially L shape. In other words, the connector restricting member 500 of the above embodiment is formed in a shape without the lower plate 500c, and the vertical width of the vertical plate 520b is formed to be shorter than the vertical width of the vertical plate 500b. ing.

  In the upper plate 520a, wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c and wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c are formed. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) screws in which a plurality of attachment holes 521 to which fixing screws 522 are attached are formed in the vertical plate 520b at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction of the end surface of the long side 202d of the case cover 202. It is formed at a location corresponding to the hole 523.

  The connector restricting member 520 formed in this way passes the wirings 291a to 291c through the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c in the center of the cutting tool of the above-described embodiment, and passes from the outside of the vertical plate 520b to each mounting hole 521. With the fixing screw 522 attached, the lower portion of the inner surface of the vertical plate 520b is brought into contact with the end surface of the long side 220d and placed outside the case cover 202, and the fixing screw 522 is screwed into the screw hole 523, thereby fixing the case cover. It is attached to the outside of 202.

  In this state, the connector restricting member 520 is held so as not to be detached from the case cover 202. Accordingly, the upper side of the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c is covered with the upper plate 520a, and the extraction of the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c from the board side connectors 238a to 238c is restricted.

  In addition, when the opening of the case main body 201 is closed (sealed state) by the case cover 202 to which the connector restricting member 520 is attached, as shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. The head of the fixing screw 522 is covered with the side wall 205 of the case main body 201. Therefore, the fixing screw 522 cannot be removed unless the sealed state of the case main body 201 and the case cover 202 is released or a part of the case is destroyed.

  Thus, the connector restricting member 520 of this embodiment also performs the same operation as the connector restricting member 500 of the above embodiment. Further, since the connector restricting member 520 is directly fixed to the case cover 202 by the fixing screw 522 and is stably held with respect to the case cover 202, rattling or the like with respect to the case cover 202 hinders connector restriction. Is prevented.

  In addition, since the head of the fixing screw 522 as the holding member is covered with the side wall 205 in the sealed state, the fixing screw 522 cannot be taken out from the mounting hole 523. Even if a special member is not used, it is possible to make it difficult to remove from the mounting hole 523.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 111, the end surface 520c of the upper plate 520a does not necessarily have to be in contact with or locked to the case cover 202. For example, you may adjoin so that the inclination coating | coated surface part 220c may be followed.

  Next, a connector restricting member 550 of still another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing the connector restricting member and the case cover of this embodiment. FIG. 113 is an enlarged longitudinal sectional view showing a main part of the board storage case to which the connector restricting member shown in FIG. 112 is attached.

  In the connector restricting members 500 and 520 of the above embodiments, the vertical plates 500b and 520b are disposed in the gap portion 505 formed in the sealed state of the case main body 201 and the case cover 202. In the connector restricting member 550 of the embodiment, the lower end of the vertical plate 550b is disposed on the upper surface of the low covering surface portion 220a.

  Hereinafter, a difference between the connector restricting member 550 of this embodiment and the connector restricting member 500 of the above embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, components similar to those of the connector restricting member 500 and the board storage case are denoted by the same reference numerals in FIGS. 112 and 113, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Connector restricting member 550 is formed of a plate member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. As shown in FIG. 112, the connector restricting member 550 is composed of an upper plate 550a that can cover the upper side of the low covering surface portion 220a, and a vertical plate 550b that extends downward from the outer end of the upper plate 550a. It is formed in an L shape. That is, it is formed in substantially the same shape as the connector restricting member 520 described above. However, the lower part of the vertical plate 550b is formed to be slightly thick.

  In the upper plate 550a, wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c and wiring insertion slits 504a to 504c are formed. A plurality of screw holes 551 into which the fixing screws 552 are screwed are formed at the lower end surface of the vertical plate 550b at a predetermined interval along the longitudinal direction of the recess 220e provided on the edge side of the low covering surface portion 202a of the case cover 202. It is formed at locations corresponding to a plurality of (three in this embodiment) mounting holes 220f formed every other.

  The connector restricting member 550 formed in this way passes the wirings 291a to 291c through the wiring insertion openings 503a to 503c and attaches the fixing screws 552 to the mounting holes 220f from the back side of the case cover 202. The vertical plate 550b is placed on the outer side of the case cover 202 with the lower end surface of the vertical plate 550b being in contact with the upper surface of the recess 220e, and the fixing screw 552 is screwed into the screw hole 551, thereby being mounted on the outer side of the case cover 202. .

  In this state, since the connector restricting member 550 is held so as not to be detached from the case cover 202, the upper side of the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c is covered with the upper plate 550a, and the board of the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c. Extraction from the side connectors 238a to 238c is restricted.

  Further, in a state (sealed state) where the opening of the case main body 201 is closed by the case cover 202 to which the connector restricting member 550 is attached, as shown in FIG. 113, the fixing screws 552 screwed into the screw holes 551 are inserted. The head is disposed inside the case and is covered with the case body 201 and the case cover 202. Therefore, the fixing screw 552 cannot be removed unless the sealed state of the case main body 201 and the case cover 202 is released or a part of the case is destroyed.

  Thus, the connector restricting member 550 of this embodiment also performs the same operation as the connector restricting member 500 described above. Further, since the case cover 202 is directly fixed to the case cover 202 by the fixing screw 552 and is stably held with respect to the case cover 202, rattling on the case cover 202 may hinder the regulation of the connector. Is prevented.

  Further, since the head of the fixing screw 552 is covered with the case main body 201 and the case cover 202 in the sealed state, the fixing screw 552 cannot be removed from the screw hole 551, and the fixing screw 552 can be made of the one-way screw or the like described above. Even if a special member is not used, it is difficult to remove from the screw hole 551.

  In each of the above embodiments, the substrate storage case is a case in which the main substrate 31 can be stored. However, the control substrate stored in the inside is not limited to the main substrate 31, for example, the payout control substrate 37 or the production effect. It may be a case for storing the control board 80 or the like.

  114 to 116 are block diagrams showing examples of the board configuration in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In FIGS. 114 to 116, in addition to the board (board on which an electric circuit or the like is mounted), an electrical component (for example, a switch or a solenoid) connected to another board with a wiring cable (harness: hereinafter referred to as a cable). ) Is also described. In the following description, the electrical components shown in FIGS. 114 to 116 are also handled in the same row as the substrate.

  Each board is electrically connected by a cable, the cable includes a harness-side connector, and the harness-side connector is connected to the board-side connector in each board to be connected. 114 to 116, ○ (solid line ○) indicates an installation location of the board-side connector, and in particular, a structure (hereinafter referred to as “connector seal”) that cannot be removed once the harness-side connector is inserted. "Stop" or "connector sealing structure"). However, the connector sealing structure may be employed only in a part of all the portions indicated by ◯. In addition, in FIGS. 114 to 116, there is an installation location of the board-side connector not marked with ○, but the connector sealing structure may not be adopted at that location. Although not explicitly shown in FIG. 114, it is not necessary to employ a structure that makes it impossible to remove the connector for the microcomputer verification terminal on the main board 31. This is because the board-side connector is not usually attached to the microcomputer verification terminal. In addition, in FIG. 114, it is preferable that the connector sealing structure is adopted even in a portion marked with a broken line.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, as shown in FIG. 114, each board-side connector provided on the main board 31 is provided with a special symbol display 8, an ordinary symbol display 10, or the like. 411, peripheral power supply relay board 412 that relays the power (electric power) supplied to the audio output board 70, peripheral command relay board (relay board shown in FIG. 97) 177, board external terminal board (information terminal board) 36 The harness side connector of the cable connected to the switch relay board 441, the first start port switch 13a, and the second start port switch 14a is connected. In place of the symbol board 411, a signal to the special symbol indicator 8, the normal symbol indicator 10, etc. is relayed (a signal for controlling the display state of the special symbol indicator 8, the ordinary symbol indicator 10, etc.). An output) design relay board may be used.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 116, the harness side connector of the cable connected from the main board 31 to the power supply board 910 and the payout control board 37 is also connector-sealed on the power supply board 910 and payout control board 37 side.

  In addition, it is preferable to adopt a connector sealing structure for detection switches for detecting game balls such as the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a for the following reason. That is, in a gaming machine, the detection switch generally has a structure in which a connector with wiring is provided so as to be able to be inserted and removed from a casing in which a detection unit is housed. If the connector is not sealed, there is a possibility that it is connected to an unauthorized substrate and used illegally. Therefore, a connector sealing structure is also adopted for the detection switch.

  For example, a member for sealing a connector with wiring is formed on the casing itself. The detection switch is generally small, and when it is difficult to apply special processing to the casing itself, a connector is sealed around the part of the detection switch that holds the casing itself (for example, the back side of the structure of the variable winning ball apparatus). A stop structure (see FIG. 117, etc.) is employed to seal a connector (corresponding to a board-side connector 601 described later) on the detection switch side. The connector on the detection switch side does not necessarily have to be mounted on the substrate.

  Each board-side connector provided on the switch relay board 441 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 16, a large winning opening door solenoid 21, a gate switch 32a, a count switch 23, a first normal winning opening switch (normal winning opening switch ( 1)) The harness side connector of the cable connected to 29a and the second normal winning port switch (ordinary winning port switch (2)) 29a is connected.

  Each board-side connector provided on the audio output board 70 includes an effect control board 80, a frame lamp relay board 431 on which a circuit for outputting a drive signal to a light emitter provided on the frame side, and an LED driver. A harness-side connector of a cable connected to the substrate 35 is connected. Each board-side connector provided on the peripheral command relay board 177 is connected to a harness-side connector of a cable connected to the effect control board 80. Note that the LED driver board 35 may be connected to the effect control board 80.

  Each board-side connector provided on the effect control board 80 is connected to a harness-side connector of a cable connected to the liquid crystal relay board A421 and the inverter board 424 that supplies power to the LCD module 423. The liquid crystal relay substrate A 421 is connected to the liquid crystal relay substrate B 422, and the LCD module 423 constituting the effect display device 9 is connected to the inverter substrate 424.

  Each board-side connector provided on the LED driver board 35 includes a lamp relay board 432 that relays a drive signal supplied to a light emitter installed on an accessory provided on the game board 6, and the game board 6. The harness side connector of the cable connected to the center right board | substrate 433 and the center upper board | substrate 434 which relay the drive signal supplied to the light-emitting body provided in is connected.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the center right substrate 433 is connected to the center upper right substrate 465 and the center base substrate 466, and the center upper substrate 434 is connected to the center left substrate 471 and the center middle substrate 472. The middle substrate 472 is connected to the center middle left substrate 473 and the center middle right substrate 474. In addition, the substrate 461 and the center lower right substrate 462 are connected to the lamp relay substrate 432 again. Center right substrate 433, center upper substrate 434, side substrate 461, center right lower substrate 462, center upper right substrate 465, center base substrate 466, center left substrate 471, center middle substrate 472, center middle left substrate 473 and center middle right substrate Reference numerals 474 are LED substrates provided on the decorative members of the game board 6, respectively.

  The frame lamp relay substrate 431 includes a front plate lamp upper substrate 457, a front plate relay substrate 450, a front plate lamp left substrate 451, an upper plate lamp relay substrate 452, an upper plate lamp left substrate 453, an upper plate lamp right substrate 454, and The left and right speakers 27 are connected. The front plate lamp right substrate 458, the speaker lamp left substrate 459, and the speaker lamp right substrate 460 are connected to the front plate lamp upper substrate 457. Front plate lamp left substrate 451, upper plate lamp relay substrate 452, upper plate lamp left substrate 453, front plate lamp upper substrate 457, front plate lamp right substrate 458, speaker lamp left substrate 459, and speaker lamp right substrate 460 are respectively The board of the LED or lamp provided in the game frame.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the power supply board 910 is also connected to the payout control board 37 and the power cord 911. Also, a payout relay board 71 is connected to the payout control board 37, and a payout sensor board 390, a payout count switch 310, and a payout motor 389 are connected to the payout relay board 71.

  Further, a door opening switch (1) 155, a door opening switch (2) 156, a relay board 482, a lending device connection terminal plate 483, and a plastic (plastic) frame relay board 491 are connected to the payout control board 37. The relay board 482 is connected to the frame external terminal plate 481, the ball break switch 187, and the full switch 48. A card unit 50 (not shown) and a balance display board 484 are connected to the lending device connection terminal plate 483. To the plastic frame relay board 491, a prize ball LED board 496, a ball cut LED board 497, and a launch control board 492 are connected. A firing motor 493, a single firing switch 494, and a touch sensor (touch ring) 495 are connected to the firing control board 492.

  Next, a structural example will be described in which when the harness-side connector is inserted into the board-side connector, the harness-side connector cannot be pulled out unless the member is destroyed. 117 to 121 are diagrams showing a first structure example. FIG. 117 is a perspective view showing a state before the cover member is attached after the harness-side connector is inserted. FIG. 118 is a perspective view showing a state after the cover member is attached. FIG. 119 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which the cover member is broken in order to remove the harness-side connector. FIG. 120 is a perspective view illustrating a state where the harness-side connector is removed after the cover member is broken. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating a cover member. 121A is a bottom view of the cover member as viewed from the bottom surface side, FIG. 121B is a top view showing the top surface of the cover member, and FIG. 121C is a front view of the cover member (a hole portion is visually recognized). (D) is a back view of the cover member as viewed from the back surface (surface opposite to the front surface) side, and (e) is a side view of the side surface of the cover member.

  As shown in FIG. 121, the bottom surface and the back surface of the cover member 613 (in particular, the bottom surface and the back surface of the covering portion 634) are open. That is, there is no bottom surface and no back surface. Therefore, the cover member 613 can cover the harness-side connector 602 and the board-side connector 601 and can take out the harness connected to the harness-side connector 602 to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the case cover 202 in the substrate storage case 200 is provided with rectangular standing plate portions 611 and 612 having a hole 610 at the center. FIG. 117 shows a state where the harness side connector 602 is inserted into the board side connector 601. The cover member 613 includes a covering portion 614 that covers the harness-side connector 602 and the board-side connector 601, and left and right engaging pin fixing portions 615 and 616. The engaging pin fixing portions 615 and 616 are provided with holes 619 at positions corresponding to the positions of the holes 610 in the standing plate portions 611 and 612 when the cover member is installed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 121, a partition 620 exists between the cover 614 and the left and right engaging pin fixing portions 615 and 616.

  As shown in FIG. 118, after the cover member 613 is installed, the engagement pins 621 and 622 are inserted into the holes 610 and 619. The distal ends of the engagement pins 621 and 622 have elasticity and are formed in an umbrella shape. Accordingly, the distal ends of the engagement pins 621 and 622 are narrowed when passing through the holes 610 and 619, and are widened when passing through the holes 610 and 619, so that the inner walls of the engagement pin fixing portions 615 and 616 are formed on the umbrella portion. The edges abut. Therefore, the engagement pins 621 and 622 are not removed. As a result, the cover member 613 cannot be removed from the case cover 202 by the standing plate portions 611 and 612 and the engaging pins 621 and 622 provided in the case cover 202. The partition portion 620 serves as a protective wall for preventing the distal ends (claw portions) of the engagement pins 621 and 622 from being cut off.

  In the cover member 613, a plurality of cut portions 617 and a plurality of cut portions 618 are provided between the covering portion 614 and the left and right engaging pin fixing portions 615 and 616.

  In order to disconnect the harness side connector 602 from the board side connector 601, the cover member 613 needs to be destroyed. For example, as shown in FIG. 119, a tool 625 such as a nipper is inserted into the notches 617 and 618, and the space between the notches 617 and between the notches 618 is cut. Then, the covering portion 614 is separated from the left and right engaging pin fixing portions 615 and 616. Therefore, the covering portion 614 can be removed. 120 shows a state where the harness-side connector 602 is removed from the board-side connector 601 after the covering portion 614 is removed.

  As described above, when the harness-side connector 602 is inserted into the board-side connector 601 and the cover member 613 is attached, the harness-side connector 602 cannot be removed unless the cover member 613 is destroyed. Further, by destroying the cover member 613, the harness side connector 602 can be detached from the board side connector 601, but in the state shown in FIG. Will leave a scar when it breaks. Therefore, after removing the harness-side connector 602 from the board-side connector 601, the cover member 613 is illegally attached to the harness-side connector 602 for the purpose of mounting an illegal board (for example, an illegal main board on which a microcomputer including an illegal ROM is mounted). Even if you destroy it, you can easily see that. Therefore, fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

  In addition, in a state where the covering portion 614 shown in FIG. 120 is removed, the tip portions of the engaging pins 621 and 622 existing inside the engaging pin fixing portions 615 and 616 can be cut with a tool or the like. Then, the engagement pin fixing portions 615 and 616 can be removed from the case cover 202.

  Since the engaging pin fixing portions 615 and 616 can be detached from the substrate after the cover member 613 is broken, a new cover portion 613 can be attached. That is, after the harness side connector 602 is remounted on the board side connector 601, the cover portion 613 can be attached again. Therefore, it is possible to apply a structure in which the harness-side connector 602 cannot be removed unless the cover member 613 is destroyed again after the cover member 613 is destroyed for the purpose of inspection or the like. Therefore, the substrate storage case 200 itself is not wasted.

  122 to 126 are diagrams showing a second structure example. FIG. 122 is a perspective view showing a state before the cover member is attached after the harness-side connector is inserted. FIG. 123 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cover member is broken in order to pull out the harness-side connector. FIG. 124 is a perspective view showing a state where the harness-side connector is removed after the cover member is broken. FIG. 125 is a perspective view showing a state where the engaging pin fixing portion is removed. FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating a cover member. 126A is a bottom view of the cover member as viewed from the bottom, FIG. 126B is a top view showing the top surface of the cover member, and FIG. 126C is a front view of the cover member (a hole portion is visually recognized). (D) is a back view of the cover member as seen from the back surface (surface opposite to the front surface), and (e) is a side view showing the side surface of the cover member.

  As shown in FIG. 126, the bottom surface of the cover member 633 (in particular, the bottom surface of the covering portion 634) and the back surface are open. That is, there is no bottom surface and no back surface. Therefore, the cover member 633 can cover the harness-side connector 602 and the board-side connector 601, and can take out the harness connected to the harness-side connector 602 to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 122, two umbrella parts 631 and 632 are provided on the case cover 202 in the substrate storage case 200. The umbrella parts 631 and 632 are formed integrally with the case cover 202 made of synthetic resin or the like. However, the umbrella parts 631 and 632 may be formed separately from the case cover 202, and the formed umbrella parts 631 and 632 may be attached to the case cover 202. Umbrella parts 631 and 632 perform the same function as the function of engagement pins 621 and 622 shown in FIG. FIG. 122 shows a state in which the harness side connector 602 is inserted into the board side connector 601. The cover member 633 includes a covering portion 634 that covers the harness-side connector 602 and the board-side connector 601, and left and right engagement pin fixing portions 635 and 636. The engagement pin fixing portions 635 and 636 are provided with holes 639 at positions opposite to the positions of the umbrella portions 631 and 632 when the cover member 633 is installed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 126, a partition 640 exists between the cover 634 and the left and right engaging pin fixing portions 635 and 636. The partition part 640 serves as a protective wall for preventing the tip end side (claw part) of the umbrella parts 631 and 632 from being cut off. As shown in FIG. 126, the planar shape of the hole 639 is a shape in which a convex portion is added to the edge of the approximately ellipse where the curvature is loose. The shape of the umbrella parts 631 and 632 viewed from above (the front end side) is a shape that fits the convex portion of the hole 639.

  As shown in FIG. 122, when the cover member 633 is installed, the umbrella parts 631 and 632 are inserted into the hole part 639. The umbrella parts 631 and 632 have elasticity. Therefore, the front end side of the umbrella parts 631 and 632 is narrowed when passing through the convex part in the hole part 639, and is widened when passing through the hole part 639, and the umbrella part 631, 636 is formed on the inner wall of the engagement pin fixing parts 635 and 636. The edges at 632 abut. Therefore, the cover member 633 is not removed from the umbrella parts 631 and 632. That is, the cover member 633 is in a state where it cannot be removed from the case cover 202.

  In the cover member 633, a plurality of cut portions 637 and a plurality of cut portions 638 are provided between the cover portion 634 and the left and right engaging pin fixing portions 635 and 636.

  In order to disconnect the harness side connector 602 from the board side connector 601, the cover member 633 needs to be destroyed. For example, as shown in FIG. 123, a tool 625 such as a nipper is inserted into the notches 637 and 638, and the space between the notches 637 and the notches 638 is cut. Then, the covering portion 634 is separated from the left and right engaging pin fixing portions 635 and 636. Therefore, the covering portion 634 can be removed. 124 shows a state where the harness-side connector 602 is removed from the board-side connector 601 after the covering portion 634 is removed.

  As described above, when the harness-side connector 602 is inserted into the board-side connector 601 and the cover member 633 is attached, the harness-side connector 602 cannot be removed unless the cover member 633 is destroyed. In addition, by destroying the cover member 633, the harness-side connector 602 can be detached from the board-side connector 601, but in the state shown in FIG. 124, the fracture surfaces of the left and right engagement pin fixing portions 635, 636 Will leave a scar when it breaks. Therefore, after removing the harness-side connector 602 from the board-side connector 601, the cover member 633 is illegally attached to the harness-side connector 602 for the purpose of mounting an unauthorized board (for example, an unauthorized main board on which a microcomputer including an unauthorized ROM is mounted). Even if you destroy it, you can easily see that. Therefore, fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 125, the planar shape of the hole 639 is a shape in which a convex portion is added to the edge of the approximately ellipse where the curvature is loose. And the shape which looked at the umbrella parts 631 and 632 from the top (front end side) is a shape which fits the convex-shaped part in the hole 639. FIG. When the engaging pin fixing portions 635 and 636 that are hexahedrons (for example, approximately cube) are rotated by 90 ° (for example, rotated in the direction a shown in FIG. 125), the umbrella portions 631 and 632 are substantially oval holes 639. It is possible to get out of it. That is, the engaging pin fixing portions 635 and 636 can be extracted from the umbrella portions 631 and 632 (for example, extracted in the direction b shown in FIG. 125) and removed from the substrate. In addition, unless the coating | coated part 634 is removed, the engagement pin fixing | fixed part 635,636 cannot be rotated. That is, unless the cover member 633 is destroyed, the engagement pin fixing portions 635 and 636 cannot be rotated.

  Since the engaging pin fixing portions 635 and 636 can be removed from the substrate after the cover member 633 is broken, a new cover portion 633 can be attached. That is, after the harness side connector 602 is remounted on the board side connector 601, the cover portion 633 can be attached again. Therefore, after the cover member 633 is destroyed for the purpose of inspection or the like, a structure in which the harness side connector 602 cannot be removed unless the cover member 633 is broken again can be applied. Therefore, the substrate storage case 200 itself is not wasted.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 122, 124 and 125, the bottom surfaces of the engaging pin fixing portions 635 and 636 are cut out in an arc shape on the side of the case cover 202 where the portion is high (upright portion). It is like a shape. Accordingly, when the engagement pin fixing portions 635 and 636 are rotated, the engagement pin fixing portions 635 and 636 can be smoothly rotated without hitting an upright portion of the case cover 202.

  127 to 129 are diagrams illustrating a third structure example. FIG. 127 is a perspective view showing a state before the cover member is attached after the harness-side connector is inserted. FIG. 128 is a perspective view showing a state in which processing for restricting removal of the cover member is performed. FIG. 129 is a perspective view showing a state after a process for restricting the removal of the cover member is performed.

  The upper part of the bottom surface and the back surface of the cover member 653 is open. That is, the bottom surface does not exist and the upper part on the back surface does not exist. Therefore, the cover member 653 can cover the harness-side connector 602 and the board-side connector 601 and can take out the harness connected to the harness-side connector 602 to the outside.

  In addition, two locking portions 655 that protrude outward are provided at the bottom of the back surface of the cover member 653. In the substrate storage case 200, a hole 652 is provided at a position corresponding to the locking portion 655. Further, on the front side of the cover member 653, an insulation lock engaging portion 654 having an insertion hole 657 in the center is provided. In the substrate storage case 200, an insulation lock engagement portion 650 having an insertion hole 651 in the center is provided at a position corresponding to the insulation lock engagement portion 654.

  As shown in FIG. 128, when the cover portion 653 is attached, the insulation lock engagement portion 654 on the cover member 653 side and the insulation lock engagement portion 650 on the board storage case 200 side come into contact with each other. In this state, the insertion hole 657 and the insertion hole 651 are opposed to each other. Then, as shown in FIG. 129, a string-like object (insulok) 661 is inserted into the insertion hole 657 and the insertion hole 651, and the tip thereof is inserted into a string fixing hole 662 provided in the middle of the insullock 661. Fixed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 129, the cover portion 653 cannot be removed from the substrate side unless the insulation lock 661 is released. Therefore, the harness side connector 602 cannot be pulled out from the board side connector 601. The insulation lock 661 is not a general-purpose product but a custom-made product. That is, it is generally difficult to obtain. A tag is formed on each of the insulation locks 661. A unique identification number (ID) is assigned to the tag. It is possible to make it difficult to forge the insurance lock 661 by a unique ID (managed by a manufacturer or the like). In order to make counterfeiting more difficult, the ID is not printed but formed at the time of mold molding. In addition, it is preferable that after the insulation lock 661 is released, the structure cannot be fixed even if the tip is inserted again into the string fastening hole 662. Therefore, once the insulation lock 661 is released, it cannot be returned to the original state (the state shown in FIG. 129) unless a new insulation lock 661 is obtained.

  Therefore, after removing the harness-side connector 602 from the board-side connector 601, the cover member 653 is illegally attached to the harness-side connector 602 for the purpose of mounting an illegal board (for example, an illegal main board on which a microcomputer including an illegal ROM is mounted). Even if is removed, this is easily understood. This is because the fixed insulation lock 661 does not exist.

  130 to 133 are diagrams illustrating a fourth structure example. FIG. 130 is a perspective view showing a state before the cover member is attached after the harness-side connector is inserted. FIG. 131 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which processing for restricting removal of the cover member is performed. FIG. 132 is a perspective view showing a state after a process for restricting the removal of the cover member is performed. FIG. 133 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cover member is broken in order to pull out the harness-side connector.

  The upper part of the bottom surface and the back surface of the cover member 673 is open. That is, the bottom surface does not exist and the upper part on the back surface does not exist. Therefore, the cover member 673 can cover the harness-side connector 602 and the board-side connector 601 and can take out the harness connected to the harness-side connector 602 to the outside.

  Mounting members 674 and 675 having a hole 672 in the center are provided on the front side of the cover member 673. Further, the board storage case 200 is provided with screw receiving members 670 and 671 having holes 678 in which screw grooves are cut.

  As shown in FIG. 131, when the cover member 673 is put on the harness side connector 602 and the board side connector 601, the mounting members 674 and 675 come into contact with the screw receiving members 670 and 671. The hole 672 is opposed to the hole 678. In this state, a one-way screw 679 is inserted into one of the two hole portions 672 and 678 and fixed with screws. FIG. 132 shows a state where the screw receiving member 670 is screwed. One of the screw receiving members 670 and 671 (for example, the screw receiving member 671) is reserved. As will be described later, after the screw receiving member 670 is destroyed, a new cover member 673 is put on, and a new one-way screw 679 is screwed to the spare screw receiving member 671, so that the connector sealing structure is again formed. Can be realized. Further, a part for storing the spare one-way screw 679 may be provided in the case cover 202 or the like, and the spare one-way screw 679 may be stored there.

  In the state shown in FIG. 132, since the one-way screw 679 cannot be removed with a screw driver, the harness-side connector 602 cannot be removed unless the cover member 673 is destroyed. Further, by destroying the cover member 673, the harness side connector 602 can be detached from the board side connector 601. As shown in FIG. 130, the base portions (sides close to the main body of the cover member 673 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape) 677 of the mounting members 674 and 675 are formed flat. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 133, when the root portion 677 is cut with a tool 625 such as a nipper, the cover member 673 is separated from the board storage case 200, and the harness side connector 602 can be pulled out from the board side connector 601. Become.

  When the root portion 677 is cut, a scar at the time of fracture remains on the fracture surface of the root portion 677. Therefore, after removing the harness-side connector 602 from the board-side connector 601, the cover member 673 is illegally attached to the harness-side connector 602 for the purpose of mounting an illegal board (for example, an illegal main board on which a microcomputer including an illegal ROM is mounted). Even if you destroy it, you can easily see that. Therefore, fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

  As described above, after the harness side connector 602 is attached to the board side connector 601, the cover members 613, 633, 653, 673 are covered and the cover members 613, 633, 653, 673 cannot be removed. By doing so, fraud can be effectively prevented.

  As described above, after the harness-side connector 602 is attached to the board-side connector 601, the application location of the structure for preventing the connection from being released is indicated by ◯ in the examples shown in FIGS. Although it is a place, it may be applied to all of the places indicated by ◯, or may be applied to any number of places (including one place).

  Further, when applied, it is preferably applied at a connector installation position (in both the main board 31 and the other board) on another board that is directly electrically connected to the main board 31 with a cable. Connector on both the other substrate (referred to as the second substrate) connected to 31 (referred to as the first substrate) and the further substrate (referred to as the third substrate) connected to the second substrate. The connector sealing structure described above (sealing between the board-side connector 601 and the harness-side connector 602) is also applied at the installation position (installation position of the connector to which the cable connecting the first board and the second board is connected). More preferably. Disconnect the connector on the third board and replace the first board with an unauthorized board (including the second board or exchange with an unauthorized board including functions realized by the second board). This is because an illegal act such as connecting to a substrate is also considered. The substrate corresponding to the first substrate is not limited to the main substrate 31 and may be another substrate.

  Connector sealing structure with connector restricting member 500 shown in FIGS. 98 and 103, etc., connector sealing structure with connector restricting member 520 shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, and connectors shown in FIGS. 112 and 113 Even in the connector sealing structure by the restriction member 550, the connector restriction member 500 cannot be released unless the connector restriction members 500, 520, and 550 or a part of the board storage case 200 are destroyed. Therefore, although the first to fourth structural examples described above can be applied as the connector sealing structure to each of the first board, the second board, and the third board, the connector restricting member 500 shown in FIGS. You may apply the connector sealing structure by.

  In addition, when the connector sealing structure is also adopted for the second substrate and the third substrate so that the main substrate 31 cannot be connected to the second substrate or the third substrate, the second substrate or the third substrate controls the effect. In the case of the board 80 or the design board 411, even if the main board 31 is replaced with an unauthorized board, a regular effect is not executed. Further, when the second board or the third board is the payout control board 37, regular payout control is not executed. Other boards will not perform their regular functions. As a result, when the gaming machine is observed from the outside, it is easily grasped that an abnormal operation is performed. That is, if the connector sealing structure is also adopted for the second substrate and the third substrate, it can be easily found even if the main substrate 31 is replaced with an unauthorized substrate. In other words, if the illegal substrate cannot be connected to the second substrate or the third substrate, for example, when the second substrate or the third substrate is the effect control substrate 80, effects such as image display, sound, light emission, etc. If the second board or the third board that is not executed is the payout control board 37, the payout is not executed even if there is a prize. If the second board or the third board is the symbol board 411, the start prize is received. Even when the symbols do not change even when the second substrate and the third substrate are other substrates, a phenomenon occurs in which the effects and notifications are not normally performed. Therefore, since the illegal board is easily recognized from the outside due to the phenomenon, it is expected that the fraudulent will connect all the boards and the illegal board as much as possible to the board connected to the main board 31. Is done. Therefore, it is meaningful to seal the connectors of the second substrate and the third substrate.

  For example, in the configuration illustrated in FIGS. 114 to 116, the main board 31, the design board 411, the peripheral power supply relay board 412, the peripheral command relay board 177, the panel external terminal board 36, the first start port switch 13 a, and the second start Paying attention to the mouth switch 14a, the power supply board 910, the payout control board 37, the audio output board 70, and the effect control board 80, the main board 31 includes the main board 31 and other boards (design board 411, peripheral power supply relay board 412, A plurality of board-side connectors 601 for connecting the peripheral command relay board 177, the board external terminal board 36, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the power supply board 910, and the payout control board 37) are mounted. However, the harness side connector 602 connected to the other board is inserted into each board side connector 601 after the harness side connector 602 is inserted. The withdrawal disabling means for disabling the pull-out side connector 602 (sealing means, etc.), a harness-side connector 602 is disabled withdrawal.

  Also, other boards (design board 411, peripheral power supply relay board 412, peripheral command relay board 177, panel external terminal board 36, first start port switch 13a, second start port switch 14a, power supply board 910, payout control board 37), the board-side connector 601 for connecting the main board 31 is mounted, but after the harness-side connector 602 connected to the main board 31 is inserted into each board-side connector 601, the harness side The harness-side connector 602 cannot be pulled out by the pull-out disable means (first pull-out disable means by a sealing means or the like) for making the connector 602 undrawn.

  The audio output board 70 and the effect control board 80 are mounted with board-side connectors 601 for connecting other boards (peripheral power supply relay board 412 and peripheral command relay board 177). After the harness side connector 602 to be connected to another board (peripheral power supply relay board 412 or peripheral command relay board 177) is inserted into the connector 601, the undrawable means (sealing) for making the harness side connector 602 undrawn. The harness-side connector 602 cannot be pulled out by the second pulling-in disabling means by the stopping means or the like.

  In the configuration illustrated in FIGS. 114 to 116, each switch for detecting a game ball may be the switch member itself, or may be a substrate on which the switch member is mounted.

  In each of the above structures, one cover member 613, 633, 653, 673 is used, but the number of cover members is not limited to one. For example, after attaching the harness-side connector 602 to the board-side connector 601, the connector may be covered with a plurality of cover members so that the cover members cannot be opened unless they are destroyed. Further, after the connector is covered with the cover member, the cover member may be covered with another member (for example, one having the structure of the above cover members 613, 633, 653, 673).

  In the above description, the structure using the cover members 613, 633, 653, and 673 as an example of a structure in which the harness-side connector 602 cannot be removed from the board-side connector 601 (undrawable means) is described. In order to prevent a connector (for example, a male connector) inserted into a connector (for example, a female connector) provided on a circuit board or an electrical component (for example, a male connector) from being removed from the board-side connector 601. Is not limited to such a structure. You may use the drawing-impossible means by the following structures.

(A) The connector itself has a structure that cannot be pulled out once another connector is attached.
(B) For example, when both connectors are connected, an unreleasable member for locking both connectors is provided internally (so that it cannot be operated manually).
(C) Use a connector with a lock. Passage, the connection of both connectors can be released by manually operating the lock part, but once another connector is attached to the lock part, the lock part can also be unlocked by operating it manually. A disabling disabling member is provided.

  In the above description, the sealing means for preventing the joint between the harness side connector 602 and the board side connector 601 from being opened (the harness side connector 602 inserted into the board side connector 601 is prevented from being removed). For example, the engagement pin, the insulation lock, the engagement pin, or the one-way screw is illustrated as the means), but the sealing means is not limited thereto. For example, the following can be used.

(1) Rivet (2) Member to be joined by heat welding or high-frequency welding (3) Adhesive by ultraviolet curable resin or the like (4) Engagement parts (in this case, an adhesive is applied to the engagement part, Inject adhesive or weld.)

  Further, when using the above-described (1) to (4) or engaging pins, when the harness-side connector 602 is removed from the board-side connector 601, the connector itself is not destroyed as in each of the above structures. Instead, the structure described in (1) to (4) or the engagement pin may be destroyed, or a part of them may be destroyed.

  Any one of the structures using the above (A) to (C) and the cover members 613, 633, 653, and 673, the above (1) to (4), the engagement pin, the insulation lock, and Any sealing means of the screws can be combined arbitrarily.

  Moreover, in the above description, a metal or a synthetic resin may be used as the material of the sealing means for preventing the joint portion between the harness side connector 602 and the board side connector 601 from being opened. .

  Further, in the above description, the number of times that can be sealed (the number of times the cover members 613, 633, 653, and 673 can be used) is one, but a structure that can be used a plurality of times may be employed. For example, in order to make the number of caulking (using one-way screws) employed in the substrate storage case 200 a plurality of times, a plurality of (for example, four) mounting locations for the one-way screws are provided. When adopting a structure that can be used multiple times, it is not necessary to prepare a spare member for resealing.

  When the number of sealable times is set to a plurality of times, it is preferable to have a structure that allows easy confirmation of opening (releasing the seal by breaking or the like). For example, in a structure that is opened by cutting, it is preferable to adopt a structure in which the cut surface is on the upper surface side so that the cut portion can be immediately recognized.

  Further, when the number of sealable times is set to a plurality of times, it is preferable to attach a history sticker in the vicinity of the board-side connector in order to cope with regular opening. The history sticker is provided with, for example, an “inspector” field and an “inspection date” field that are entered when the history seal is opened. When an inspector or the like opens for inspection, enter his / her name in the “inspector” column and enter the date of destruction in the “inspection date” column. It can be determined that fraud has been performed when the box is opened despite the absence of these entries.

  Furthermore, the member used for sealing preferably has a special shape so that it can be easily confirmed that the member has been opened.

  In the first to fourth structural examples described above, the sealing means for sealing the joint portion between the harness side connector 602 and the board side connector 601 so as not to be opened is used. If the sealing function regarding a connector is given, the number of sealing means will decrease and cost will not increase.

  In addition, in the first to fourth structures described above, or other structures using a cover member, a cover is provided so that an illegal act can be easily detected even if an illegal act is performed on a sealed connector. The member is preferably made of a transparent material.

  Moreover, it is preferable that the color of the sealing means is a conspicuous color such as a fluorescent color so that attention is paid to whether or not it is opened.

  FIG. 134 is a block diagram illustrating another example of the circuit configuration of the main board 31. Note that only a part is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 134, an interrupt button 361 for interrupting the game control process by the game control microcomputer 560 in accordance with an operation by a game shop clerk or the like is mounted on the main board 31. The interrupt button 361 outputs a game control process interrupt signal to the game control microcomputer 560 in response to being pressed.

  The main board 31 is also provided with an LED circuit 60 that provides a drive signal to the state notification LED 61 for notifying the gaming state of the gaming machine in accordance with the control of the gaming control microcomputer 560. The state notification LED 61 is provided on the main board 31. Other configurations not shown are the same as those shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, the status notification LED 61 is used as a light emitter for status notification, but a light emitter other than the LED may be used. The number of light emitters is not limited to one, and a plurality of light emitters may be used for notification. Further, a notification may be provided by a dot matrix display, a 7-segment display, a liquid crystal display, an EL (electroluminescence) display device, or the like. Moreover, you may use alerting | reporting means (for example, a speaker, a buzzer, etc.) other than a light-emitting body.

  Next, the “spoofing substrate” will be described. The “spoofing board” means an illegal circuit board that executes illegal control such as “spoofing” to generate a big hit on the main board of a pachinko machine.

  There is a case where an illegal act of illegally generating a big hit is performed by exchanging a ROM storing a control program for causing the microcomputer to execute various processes. Therefore, in order to prevent the ROM from being replaced, the ROM is built into the microcomputer to be a one-chip microcomputer, and a predetermined calculation is performed based on the data stored in the ROM, and the result of the calculation confirms whether the ROM is a legitimate ROM. I was trying to check.

  However, the one-chip microcomputer itself has been counterfeited and replaced with a regular microcomputer, and fraudulent acts that illegally generate big hits have been performed. Correspondingly, a board box that stores the main board is sealed so that a trace is left when the microcomputer is replaced, and a gaming machine that can be seen that the board box has been opened is used. It came to be able to.

  However, a fraudulent act in which an unauthorized circuit board is attached to the wiring between the start port switch and the main board and the start prize is illegally generated at the timing of the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment random number has been performed. Correspondingly, the initial value of the jackpot determination random number is changed to shift the timing coincident with the jackpot determination value, or the hardware random number updated at high speed is used.

  Thereafter, an act of illegally generating a big hit by replacing the board box storing the main board with a board on which an illegal circuit is mounted has been performed. Correspondingly, a verification machine installed outside the main board is connected to the microcomputer, and the verification machine has a function to check whether it is a legitimate microcomputer, making it easy to find illegal circuit boards. I tried to become.

  However, while the regular main board is left in the gaming machine, only the power is supplied and the verification function of the regular microcomputer is utilized, while other main board functions such as winning and jackpot are executed instead of the main board. The “board” was installed on the back side of the main board, and fraudulent acts that illegally generated big hits occurred.

  FIG. 135 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a state in which an impersonation board is installed in a gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 135, the spoofing board 31X includes a main board 31 and other electric component control boards that exchange signals with the main board 31 (in this embodiment, the effect control board 80 and the payout control board 37). It is installed between. The other electrical component control board that exchanges signals with the main board 31 exchanges signals with the spoofing board 31X instead of the main board 31. As an example, power supply power is supplied to the main board 31 from the spoofing board 31X.

  The spoofing board 31X is generally installed by removing all the connectors of the regular main board 31 and hiding them behind the board box. Since it is discovered as soon as the connector on the main board 31 side is removed, the connector on the mating board connected to the main board 31 is removed. As a result, an abnormality of the main board 31 is hardly detected visually. Then, all the electrical components connected to the main board 31 are connected to the spoofing board 31X. Further, wiring for supplying power from the spoofing board 31X to the regular main board 31 is connected. Therefore, since the verification function (function to output an authentication signal) of the game control microcomputer 560 operates, when verification is performed using the verification machine 365, the authentication target becomes the main board 31 instead of the spoofing board 31X. Therefore, the collation result is OK.

  Then, the impersonation substrate 31X is hidden behind the main substrate 31. The main board 31 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine is a single-sided mounting for the purpose of easily discovering whether an illegal circuit is mounted on the board itself, and the surface mounting parts cannot be used. It is relatively large. Therefore, if the control board having the same performance as the main board 31 is mounted on both sides and is made of the surface mounting components, the control board can be made smaller than the regular main board 31. In other words, an “spoofed substrate” having performance equivalent to that of the main substrate 31 can be made smaller than the main substrate 31. For this reason, the “spoofed substrate” can be easily installed hidden behind the main substrate 31.

  FIG. 136 is a front view showing a simplified game control board box that accommodates the main board 31 as already described. The main board 31 is accommodated in the game control board box on the back of the gaming machine. That is, the main board 31 is housed in a game control board box as a housing means, and is attached to the gaming machine in the form of a game control unit in which they are combined. The game control board box has a structure in which a box body 31A in which the main board 31 is accommodated is covered with a lid portion 31B. The lid 31B is fixed to the box body 31A with a one-way screw and other screws (not shown) screwed into one mounting hole in each of the mounting portions 31D and 31E. The one-way screw is a screw that rotates only in the screwing direction, and is an example of a fixing unit that makes the game control board box unopenable. Therefore, once tightened, the screw cannot be removed. The game control board box has a “caulking structure” in which a joint portion between the box body 31A and the lid portion 31B is firmly fastened by, for example, a metal fitting such as a screw. In the example shown in FIG. 136, three one-way screw attachment portions are provided on each of the left and right sides.

  When the main board 31 is to be exposed by removing the lid 31B from the box body 31A, it is necessary to cut off the one-way screw attachment portions (attachment portions with the lid portion 31B) in the attachment portions 31D and 31E. Therefore, the number of times the main board 31 is exposed can be found from the cutting history of the mounting portion. When the actual number of times of cutting is larger than the cutting history (number of times) of the attachment portion known by the administrator or the like, the lid 31B is illegally removed and the main board 13 is exposed, and the game control micro It can be seen that the computer may have been replaced with an unauthorized microcomputer. Since the attachment portions 31D and 31E are each provided with three attachment holes, the lid portion 31B can be removed up to three times.

  Further, in order to prevent unauthorized removal of the lid portion 31B, sealing seals 31F and 31G on which holograms are printed are attached between the lid portion 31B and the box body 31A. When the seal seals 31F and 31G are peeled off, the hologram remains partially on the lid portion 31B and the box body 31A, so that it can be seen at a glance. This also shows that the lid 31B was illegally removed from the box body 31A to expose the main board 31.

  Further, the surface of the lid portion 31B has a region 366 printed with special fluorescent ink that emits fluorescence when irradiated with ultraviolet rays. The printing in the region 366 is not visible in a normal state, but when the ultraviolet ray is irradiated, the printed content in the region 366 is fluorescent and the printed content is visually recognized. The presence of the area 366 and the print contents of the area 366 are not disclosed.

  When the game control board box is replaced with a fake (fake game control board box equipped with a fraudulent game control microcomputer), the area 366 does not exist in the fake game control board box. The authenticity of the game control board box can be determined. This is because even if the false game control board box is irradiated with ultraviolet rays, the printed content in the region 366 does not emit light.

  In this embodiment, the area 366 printed with the special fluorescent ink is provided on the surface of the game control board box, but on the surface of the game control microcomputer 560 accommodated in the game control board box, Printing may be performed with special fluorescent ink.

  Further, instead of printing with the special fluorescent ink, a change may be made to a predetermined portion of the game control board box. For example, the shapes of the three attachment holes in the attachment portions 31D and 31E may be different from each other. In that case, the shape looks the same at first glance, but changes so that the difference can be seen when measured with a measuring instrument. Further, the positions of the three mounting holes are not provided at regular intervals, but may be at irregular intervals. In that case, it appears to be equally spaced at first glance, but changes to such an extent that it can be seen that it is unequal when measured with a measuring instrument. Furthermore, when the game control board box is provided with a plurality of heat radiation holes, the shapes of the holes may be different from each other. In that case, the shape looks the same at first glance, but changes so that the difference can be seen when measured with a measuring instrument. In addition, it is not announced that there is a difference in the interval of holes or the shape of holes. In addition, the game control board box or the main board or the game control microcomputer 560 performs special processing that cannot be seen at first glance (for example, a mark or the like is placed at a position that is difficult to see). You may do it.

  If the game control board box is configured in this way, when the game control board box is replaced with a fake game control board box, the fake game will be used unless it is known that there is a difference in the original hole interval or hole shape. It is hard to think of making a difference in hole spacing, hole shape, etc. in the control board box. Also, it's hard to think of doing the same special processing that is done on the original game control board box. That is, when it is replaced with a fake game control board box, there will be no difference in the hole interval, hole shape, etc., or there will be no special processing, so the hole interval or hole The true / false of the game control board box can be determined by measuring the shape of the game or the presence or absence of special processing.

  In this embodiment, a model name sticker 31a and an inspection history sticker 31b are attached to the lid 31B. The inspection history seal 31b is provided with an “inspector” field and an “inspection date” field that are filled in when the main board 31 is inspected, repaired, or exchanged. In this example, the gaming machine A management number is also listed. The gaming machine management number is, for example, a unit number of a gaming control board box (a number uniquely assigned to each gaming control unit).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 136, a hole (opening) for projecting the interruption button 361 is provided in the lid part 31B, and the pressing operation part of the interruption button 361 is exposed from the hole. ing.

  The connector portion of the main board 31 is exposed outside the lid portion 31B. In the example shown in FIG. 136, a connector 31C for inputting / outputting identification information is illustrated. However, the main board 31 is also mounted with other connectors for connection with other boards.

  As described above, the main board 31 is accommodated in the board box sealed by the unsealing fixing means, and the pressing operation part of the interruption button 361 is installed in the opening provided in the board box. Since it is configured, a game control process interruption signal from the interruption button 361 can be surely input to the main board 31 when an impersonation board is installed. Therefore, when an impersonation board is installed, a game control processing interruption signal from the interruption button 361 is input to the impersonation board, and the game is prevented from being interrupted even though the impersonation board is installed. be able to.

  FIG. 137 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a mounting state of the interruption button 361 mounted on the main board 31 and an installation state of the state notification LED 61. FIG. 137 shows a cross section of the main board 31 and the lid 31B of the game control board box when the interrupt button 361 and the status notification LED 61 are mounted on the main board 31 housed in the game control board box. . As shown in FIG. 137, the interrupt button 361 is mounted on the board of the main board 31 in a state where the button pressing operation part is exposed from the hole (see FIG. 136) provided in the lid part 31B of the game control board box. Is done. Therefore, even if the main board 31 is sealed in the game control board box, the interrupt button 361 can be pressed. The interrupt button 361 only needs to be provided on the main board 31, and is positioned so as to protrude from the hole provided in the lid portion 31B of the game control board box or in the game control board box facing the hole. It may be.

  Further, it is desirable that the gap between the hole provided in the lid portion 31B of the game control board box and the pressing operation portion of the interruption button 361 be as narrow as possible. In other words, the hole provided in the lid portion 31B of the game control board box is formed so as to be largely blocked by the interrupt button 361 in order to ensure the sealed state of the game control board box. For example, the inner wall of the hole provided in the lid portion 31B of the game control board box may be in a state where the outer wall of the pressing operation portion of the interruption button 361 is in a pressable operation state. Further, a cover made of a flexible material that covers the interruption button 361 does not come off unless it is broken in a state where the hole provided in the lid portion 31B of the game control board box is closed and the interruption button 361 can be pressed. You may make it install so. In this way, if the gap between the hole provided in the lid 31B of the game control board box and the pressing operation part of the interruption button 361 is made as narrow as possible, or if it is completely closed by the cover, the game control board box Since it is impossible to change the wiring of the main board 31 unless the circuit board is destroyed, it is possible to prevent the signal from the main board 31 from being taken out and output to the outside of the spoofed board or the like.

  In general, the lid 31B of the game control board box is transparent (in some cases, it may be colored, but even in that case, the inside of the game control board box can be visually recognized from the outside). The lighting state of the state notification LED 61 installed on the board 31 can be viewed from the outside of the game control board box. Further, in this embodiment, the state notification LED 61 is installed on the main board 31, but may be installed in a place other than the main board 31 in the game control board box.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 138 shows that the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) executes when power supply to the gaming machine is started and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becomes high level. It is a flowchart which shows the main process to perform. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the CPU 56 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, and then performs a main process after step S1. To start. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device indicates the interrupt address. Set to mode. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S4). By the processing in step S4, CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized). The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also includes an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 804.

  Next, the CPU 56 outputs an authentication signal (board ID uniquely given to the main board 31) to the verification terminal 364 (step S81), and sets the RAM 55 in an accessible state (step S5).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in step S41 and step S42, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), This is a portion where data indicating the number of payout prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, an initial value is set to a flag (a flag indicating a gaming state) for selectively performing processing according to a control state such as a special symbol process flag or a normal symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 110 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification prohibition flag (step S44) and sets a value corresponding to the prohibition period value in the prohibition period timer (step S45). The prohibition period value is a value indicating a period during which an abnormal winning notification described later is prohibited. The abnormality notification prohibition flag is a flag indicating that notification of an abnormal winning is prohibited, and is maintained in the set state until the prohibition period timer times out. Therefore, the start of the abnormal winning notification is prohibited for a predetermined period after the initialization notification is started in the variable display device 9.

  Further, the CPU 56 reads data from the random number generation circuit 506 (step S14A), sets the data read from the random number generation circuit 506 as an initial value in a counter for generating random 1 (a big hit determination random number). The data read from the random number generation circuit 506 is stored as an initial value in the random 1 initial value buffer in the RAM 55 (step S14B). The CPU 56 further reads the data from the random number generation circuit 506, sets the read data as an initial value in a counter for generating random 5 (normal random number for symbol determination), and the data read from the random number generation circuit 506 Is stored as an initial value in a random 5 initial value buffer in the RAM 55 (step S14C). Note that a plurality of random number generation circuits 506 corresponding to each of the counters for generating random numbers (a big hit determination random number and a normal symbol determination random number) may be provided.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls itself a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the gaming machine. In the process of sending a command signal to control other microcomputers, or the game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, in a period during which interruption is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps S16 to S19, the CPU 56 performs steps S85 and S139 shown in FIG. The timer interruption process of steps S20 to S36 is executed. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 determines whether or not a game control process interruption signal from the interruption button 361 is input (step S85). If no game control process interruption signal is input (N in step S85). Then, the processing after step S20 is executed. If the game control process interruption signal is inputted, the state of the game control process interruption signal is monitored until the game control process interruption signal is not inputted, and the execution of the processes after step S20 is interrupted.

  In step S20, the CPU 56 executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-off signal is turned on). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board 910 detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the state determination is performed (switch processing). : Step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S33 and S34.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process for notifying an abnormal winning when it detects that a game ball has won a prize at a time other than the regular time (step S23: abnormal winning notifying process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating a random number for determination such as a random number for determining a special symbol or a normal symbol per unit determination (determination random number update process: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether or not to generate a big hit in response to the variable display of a special symbol based on the winning (start winning) of the game ball to the first start opening 15a or the second start opening 15b For judgment)
(2) Random 2: Determine the special symbol's off symbol (stop symbol) (for determining off symbol)
(3) Random 3: Determines the special symbol stop symbol when generating a big hit (for big hit symbol determination)
(4) Random 4: Determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination)
(5) Random 5: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(6) Random 6: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the random 1 initial value)
(7) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the random 5 initial value)
(8) Random 8: Determine gaming state (high base state / low base state, high probability state / low probability state) and jackpot type (sudden probability change big hit, 15R big hit) (for game state determination)

  In step S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 139, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) big hit determination random number, (3) big hit symbol determination random number, and (5) normal symbol determination determination. The counter is incremented (added by 1) to generate the random number and the gaming state determining random number of (8). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the game effect, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (8) are also used. In this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a software random number generated based on a program by the game control microcomputer 560. However, as the big hit determination random number, hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560 is used. Alternatively, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 may be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, a process is performed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a process corresponding to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 110 (effect control command control process: step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning port switches 29a and 30a (step). S31). Specifically, it is mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning port switches 29a and 30a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S32: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 performs variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, when the start flag for normal symbol variation is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the normal symbol variation rate every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a state notification LED control process for controlling the lighting state of the state notification LED 61 in accordance with the gaming state (step S34A).

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S36), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S34 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  The determination random number and the display random number are counted up regularly (every 2 ms in this embodiment) by the CPU 56, and returned to the minimum value (for example, 0 or 1) when the count value exceeds the maximum value.

  Since the count value of the counter is periodically counted up, for example, when a count-up cycle or a cycle in which the counter count value makes one round is detected by any means, for example, a timing for generating a random value that matches the jackpot determination value Will be recognized. Then, it is possible to frequently generate “hit” by playing a game aimed at the timing at which a random number value that matches the jackpot determination value is generated. In some cases, an illegal board is attached to a gaming machine in order to aim at a timing at which a random number value that matches the jackpot value is generated. Such a fraudulent board introduces a signal output to the outside from the circuit part that performs game control, detects the start timing of the circuit part that performs game control based on the signal, and the random value that matches the jackpot determination value is The timing of occurrence is detected. Then, the unauthorized board can send a predetermined signal (start winning signal) to the circuit portion that controls the game so as to synchronize with the timing, and illegally generate a “hit”. As a result, there is a disadvantage in the game store where the gaming machine is installed.

  In order to prevent fraudulent acts due to fraudulent signals that aim to generate random numbers that generate “big hits”, the count value advances one round (for example, 631 if one of 631 types of random numbers is to be generated). In this case, it has been proposed to set a random value to the counter instead of returning the count value to a specific value (for example, 0). If such counter control is performed, it is difficult to aim at the generation of a random value that causes a “big hit” from the outside (see, for example, JP-A-11-70252). Hereinafter, setting a random value to the counter when the count value makes one round is referred to as changing the initial value of the counter.

  However, in the method described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-70252, the initial value of the counter is not changed unless the count value of the counter for generating a random number makes one round.

  Generally, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the CPU 56 initializes the count value of the counter to a specific value (for example, 0), so that the count value of the counter is changed after the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Until one round, it becomes possible to aim at the generation timing of the random value that causes the “big hit”. Even when power supply to the gaming machine is not started, the CPU 56 sets the count value of the counter to a specific value (when a reset signal is given to the CPU 56 and the CPU 56 starts control from the initial state again). For example, since it is initialized to 0), it is possible to aim at the generation timing of a random value that causes “big hit” until the count value of the counter makes one round after the power supply to the gaming machine is started. End up.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the counter when the count value of the counter has made one round, and also executes an initialization process (steps) that is executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started. In S10 to S15), data read from the random number generation circuit 506 is set as an initial value in a counter for generating a big hit determination random number (see step S14B in FIG. 138). In addition, data read from the random number generation circuit 506 is set as an initial value in a counter for generating a random number for determination per ordinary symbol (see step S14C in FIG. 138). Note that the CPU 56 executes the processes of steps S14B and S14C not only when the power supply to the gaming machine is started but also when the reset signal is input and the initialization process is executed.

  The random number generation circuit 506 is a circuit that generates a random number based on white noise (white noise). Random numbers based on white noise are uniform random numbers. The uniform random number is a random number in which the appearance probabilities of all the numerical values included in the section (numerical range) are the same in a predetermined section (for example, a numerical range such as 0 to 630 and 0 to 1023). . That is, each numerical value in the numerical value range is a random number generated randomly and at a similar rate.

FIG. 141 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the random number generation circuit 506. However, FIG. 141 shows a configuration example in the case where the numerical range is 2 ⁴ = 16 (0 to 15). A random number generation circuit 506 illustrated in FIG. 141 is a circuit that generates an M-sequence (maximum length sequences) code as an example of a random number based on white noise. A circuit that generates an M-sequence code (M-sequence random number) is often used in communication systems and the like as a circuit that generates a random number that can be regarded as white noise, that is, a digital random number based on white noise. A circuit that generates an M-sequence code generates 0 and 1 randomly. Further, the period of the generated pattern is theoretically maximum. Therefore, when a circuit that generates an M-sequence code is configured to serially output data, a bit (0 or 1) output from the circuit is continuously input from an arbitrary point in time, and n (positive In the case of (integer) bit data, the numerical value indicated by the n-bit data (any of 0 to 15 when n = 4) is the same as the numerical value indicated by the n-bit data output thereafter. There is randomness (the same numerical value appears without regularity in time), and each numerical value can be regarded as a random number.

  The random number generation circuit 506 calculates an exclusive OR of the shift register 509 that shifts data based on the clock signal input to the clock input terminal 510, and the output of the last stage and the output of the middle stage of the shift register 509. And an exclusive OR circuit 507. The output of the exclusive OR circuit 507 is input to the first stage of the shift register 509. Further, the output of the final stage of the shift register 509 is output from the output terminal 508. In this embodiment, the data is input from the output terminal 508 to the game control microcomputer 560.

  The game control microcomputer 560 receives serial signal data from the shift register 509, but data obtained by dividing the input data every 4 bits (0 to 15 in decimal) is random. It is a random number.

In the example shown in FIG. 141, since the number of stages of the shift register 509 is 4, the numerical range is 2 ⁴ = 16 (0 to 15), but the numerical range is 2 ¹⁰ = 1024 (0 to 1023). If desired, the number of stages of the shift register 509 may be set to 10. Further, when the numerical range handled by the game control microcomputer 560 is 631 (0 to 630: random 1), for example, data input from the random number generation circuit 506 in which the number of stages of the shift register 509 is 10 Is divided every 10 bits, and when the data represented by 10 bits (any one of 0 to 1023 in decimal number) exceeds 630, it may be replaced with an arbitrary numerical value. If the numerical range of random 1 is, for example, 0 to 511, the output of the random number generation circuit can be used as it is by using a random number generation circuit having nine stages of shift registers.

  In addition, when the numerical range handled by the game control microcomputer 560 is 14 in the case of 1 to 13 (in the case of random 5), for example, data input from the random number generation circuit 506 in which the number of stages of the shift register 509 is 4 Is divided every 4 bits, and when the data represented by 4 bits (0 to 15 in decimal number) is a numerical value exceeding 0 or 13, it may be replaced with an arbitrary numerical value. If the numerical range of random 5 is, for example, 0 to 15, the output of the random number generation circuit can be used as it is by using a random number generation circuit having four stages of shift registers. However, since the circuit for generating the M-sequence code illustrated in FIG. 141 outputs 0 and 1 at random, for example, a random number generation circuit 506 in which the number of stages of the shift register 509 is 4 is used for game control. The microcomputer 560 may input data having an arbitrary number of consecutive bits (may be other than 4), and use a numerical value indicated by the input data as a random value (in this example, an initial value set in a counter).

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 is configured such that serial signal data is input from the random number generation circuit 506. For example, the random number generation circuit 506 and the game control microcomputer 560 A serial-parallel converter may be provided between the two, and the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured such that data by a parallel signal is input as data indicating a random value. Further, a serial-parallel converter may be provided in front of the output terminal 508 inside the random number generation circuit 506.

  In this embodiment, in the initialization process, the data read from the random number generation circuit 506 is set as an initial value in a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number (see step S14B in FIG. 98). Data read from the random number generation circuit 506 is set as an initial value in a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination (see step S14C in FIG. 98), but after step S14B is executed, step S14C is executed. Since the processing time (for example, on the order of microseconds) by the CPU 56 elapses until the above processing is executed, if the frequency of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal 510 is high (for example, on the order of MHz), the processing time Since the output of the random number generation circuit 506 changes, a big hit determination random number is generated. Never the same value in the counter for generating a counter and normal symbol per determining random number for is set. When one random number generation circuit 506 is used, as an example, when an initial value is set in a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number, the data is sequentially serially output from the random number generation circuit 506. It is only necessary to input 10 bits (0 to 1023 in decimal number), and in order to generate a random number for determination per normal symbol, 4 bits (4 bits consecutive from serially output data from the random number generation circuit 506) What is necessary is to input 0 to 15 in decimal). As described above, a plurality of random number generation circuits 506 corresponding to each of the counters for generating random numbers (random hit determination random numbers, normal symbol determination random numbers) may be provided.

  The random number generation circuit 506 operates asynchronously with the game control microcomputer 560 (for example, the operation clock signal of the game control microcomputer 560 and the clock signal input to the clock input terminal 510 have a frequency). Therefore, when power supply to the gaming machine is started or when a reset signal is given to the gaming control microcomputer 560 (when gaming control is started), the gaming control is started. The time until the microcomputer 560 starts the process of step S14B is not constant. This is because a reset circuit that generates a reset signal is generally a circuit including a capacitor, and outputs a reset signal when the voltage of the capacitor reaches a predetermined value by charging the capacitor (specifically, the reset signal is set to a high level). This is because the charging speed of the capacitor changes according to environmental conditions such as temperature. Even when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the reset signal is given to the gaming control microcomputer 560 from the reset circuit that generates the reset signal. Since the time from when the game control microcomputer 560 starts the game control to when the process of step S14B starts is not constant, for example, a reset signal is continuously given to the game control microcomputer 560. However, the initial value set in the counter is not constant.

  In this embodiment, a random number generation circuit 506 that generates an M-sequence code as a random number based on white noise is illustrated. However, as a random number generation circuit based on white noise, fluctuation of current flowing in a resistor, a semiconductor element, or the like is illustrated. A circuit that generates random numbers based on noise (corresponding to analog white noise) (see, for example, JP-A-2001-344094), a circuit that generates random numbers based on other thermal noise, and an oscillation circuit are used. An oscillating circuit type random number circuit or the like can also be used. These circuits are configured to obtain random numbers by, for example, digitizing a level (current value, etc.) of analog white noise that changes at random.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the determination random number update process (step S23) executed in the game control process shown in FIG. In the determination random number update process, the CPU 56 increments the value of the counter for generating random 1 (big hit determination random number) (step S201). If the counter value for generating random 1 exceeds the maximum value (630 in this example) (step S202), the count value is returned to 0 (step S203). Hereinafter, a counter for generating random n (n: 1, 2,...) May be referred to as a random n counter.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value of the random 1 counter matches the value stored in the random 1 initial value buffer as an initial value (step S204). If they do not match, the count value remains unchanged. If they match, random 6 (random 1 initial value determination random number) is extracted (step S205). That is, the count value of the counter for generating random 6 is input. Then, the extracted value is stored as an initial value in the random 1 initial value buffer (step S206), and the extracted value is set in the random 1 counter (step S207). Therefore, at this time, the initial value of the random 1 counter is changed.

  Next, +1 is added to the value of the counter (random 5 counter) for generating random 5 (normal random number for symbol determination) (step S211). If the value of the random 5 counter exceeds the maximum value (13 in this example) (step S212), the count value is returned to 1 (step S213).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value of the random 5 counter matches the value stored in the random 5 initial value buffer as an initial value (step S214). If they do not match, the count value remains unchanged. If they match, random 7 (random 1 initial value determination random number) is extracted (step S215). That is, the count value of the counter for generating random 7 is input. The extracted value is stored as an initial value in the random 5 initial value buffer (step S216), and the extracted value is set in the random 5 counter (step S217). Therefore, at this time, the initial value of the random 5 counter is changed.

  FIG. 143 is executed once in the game control process shown in FIG. 139 (step S24), and the remaining surplus time in the main process shown in FIG. 138 (after the end of the game control process, the next 2 ms timer It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process for initial values (step S18) repeatedly performed by the time until an error occurs.

  In the initial value random number update process, the CPU 56 increments the value of the counter for generating random 6 (random 1 initial value determination random number) (step S231). If the value of the random 6 counter exceeds the maximum value (step S232), the count value is returned to 0 (step S233). The maximum value is 630 as in the case of random 1.

  Further, the counter value for generating random 7 (random 5 initial value determining random number) is incremented by 1 (step S234). If the value of the random 7 counter exceeds the maximum value (step S235), the count value is returned to 1 (step S236). The maximum value is 13 as in the case of random 5.

  FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a counter value for generating random 1 (big hit determination random number) that is changed by the determination random number update processing illustrated in FIG. 142. In this example, the first value of random 1 is 451. That is, an example is shown in which the data read from the random number generation circuit 506 is “451” in the process of step S14B shown in FIG. In FIG. 144, the point in time when the process of step S14B is executed is indicated by A. Since “451” is initially stored in the initial value buffer for random 1 as the initial value, the count value advances to “450”. When the count value is incremented by 1 and becomes 451, the count value is processed in step S204. Is detected to match the initial value. Then, random 6 (random 1 initial value determination random number) is extracted in the process of step S205. This time point is indicated by B in FIG.

  Here, it is assumed that the count value of the counter for generating the random 6 at that time is “19”. Then, “19” is extracted as random 6, the value is stored (step S206), and the value is set in the counter for generating random 1. Therefore, from this time point, the counter for generating random 1 advances from the initial value “19”.

  When the value of the counter for generating random 1 advances to “19”, it is detected in step S204 that the count value matches the initial value. Then, random 6 is extracted by the process of step S205. This time point is indicated by C in FIG. It is assumed that the count value of the counter for generating random 6 at that time is “195”. Then, “195” is extracted as random 6, the value is stored (step S206), and the value is set in the counter for generating random 1. Therefore, from this point, the counter for generating random 1 advances from the initial value “195”.

  Then, when the value of the counter for generating random 1 advances to “195”, it is detected in step S204 that the count value matches the initial value. Then, random 6 is extracted by the process of step S205. This time point is indicated by D in FIG. Assume that the count value of the counter for generating random 6 at that time is “n”. Then, “n” is extracted as random 6 and the value is stored (step S206), and the value is set in the counter for generating random 1. Therefore, from this point, the counter for generating random 1 advances from the initial value “n”. In FIG. 144, an asterisk (☆) indicates a position where the count value is “3 (deemed to be a big hit determination value)”. The position of the star is different for each lap.

  As described above, every time the value of the counter for generating random 1 makes one round (631 counts), a new initial value is set as the count value, and thereafter the counter advances from that value. A counter (counter for generating random 6) for determining an initial value of a counter for generating random 1 (a jackpot determining counter) is a surplus time of game control processing executed by the CPU 56 (game control processing is The time is counted up until the next 2 ms timer interrupt occurs). The extra time varies depending on the progress of the game, and is a random period. As a result, since the generated random 6 value is also a random value, the initial value of the jackpot determination counter also changes randomly.

  Further, the initial value of the counter for generating random 1 for the first round (in the uppermost case in FIG. 144) is determined based on the output of the random number generation circuit 506 that generates a random number based on white noise. As described above, the output of the random number generation circuit 506 becomes a different value when the game control microcomputer 560 executes the process of step S14B in the initialization process. That is, when the initialization process is executed a plurality of times, the initial value of the counter for generating random 1 is different in each execution. For example, even if a fraudulent act such as resetting the gaming control microcomputer 560 is performed, the fraudulent person cannot recognize the initial value of the counter for generating the random 1, and as a result, the random 1 This means that the timing matching the jackpot determination value cannot be grasped. In other words, every time the value of the jackpot determination counter makes one round after the second lap, the counter starts to increment from a random initial value, so that it is illegal to aim at the timing when random 1 matches the jackpot determination value. In addition to making it difficult to send a simple start winning signal to the main board 31, it is also possible to make it difficult to aim at the timing at which the random 1 matches the big hit determination value even in the first round.

  In this embodiment, the initial value of the normal symbol determining random number is further controlled to be random. FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a counter value for generating random 5 (normal symbol determination random number) that changes by the determination random number update process illustrated in FIG. 142. In this example, the first value of random 5 is 8. That is, an example is shown in which the data read from the random number generation circuit 506 is “8” in the process of step S14C shown in FIG. In FIG. 145, the point in time when the process of step S14C is executed is indicated by A. Since “8” is initially stored in the initial value buffer for random 5 as the initial value, the count value advances to “7”, and when the value is incremented by 1 and becomes 8, the count value is processed in step S214. Is detected to match the initial value. Then, random 7 (random 5 initial value determination random number) is extracted in the process of step S215. This time point is indicated by B in FIG.

  Here, it is assumed that the count value of the counter for generating the random 7 at that time is “3”. Then, “3” is extracted as random 7 and the value is stored (step S 216), and the value is set in the counter for generating random 5. Therefore, from this point of time, the counter for generating the random number 5 advances from the initial value “3”.

  When the value of the counter for generating random 5 advances to “3”, it is detected in step S214 that the count value matches the initial value. Then, random 7 is extracted by the process of step S215. This time point is indicated by C in FIG. Assume that the count value of the counter for generating random 7 at that time is “6”. Then, “6” is extracted as the random number 7, the value is stored (step S216), and the value is set in the counter for generating the random number 5. Therefore, from this point, the counter for generating random 5 advances from the initial value “6”.

  When the value of the counter for generating random 5 advances to “6”, it is detected in step S214 that the count value matches the initial value. Then, random 7 is extracted by the process of step S215. This time point is indicated by D in FIG. Assume that the count value of the counter for generating random 7 at that time is “k”. Then, “k” is extracted as the random number 7, the value is stored (step S216), and the value is set in the counter for generating the random number 5. Therefore, from this time point, the counter for generating random 6 advances from the initial value “k”. In FIG. 145, an asterisk (☆) indicates a position where the count value is “11 (determined as a hit determination value)”. The position of the star is different for each lap.

  As described above, every time the value of the counter for generating random 5 makes one round (14 counts of 1 to 13), a new initial value is set as the count value. Thereafter, the counter increments from that value. I will do it. A counter (counter for generating random 7) for determining an initial value of a counter for generating random 5 (ordinary symbol determination counter) is a surplus time for game control processing executed by the CPU 56 (game control). The time is counted up after the processing is completed until the next 2 ms timer interrupt is generated). The extra time varies depending on the progress of the game, and is a random period. As a result, the generated random 7 value also becomes a random value, so that the initial value of the normal symbol per-determination counter also changes randomly.

  Further, the initial value of the counter for generating random 5 in the first round (in the uppermost case in FIG. 145) is determined based on the output of the random number generation circuit 506 that generates a random number based on white noise. As described above, the output of the random number generation circuit 506 becomes a different value when the game control microcomputer 560 executes the process of step S14C in the initialization process. That is, when the initialization process is executed a plurality of times, the initial value of the counter for generating random 5 is different in each execution. For example, even if a fraudulent act such as resetting the game control microcomputer 560 is performed, the fraudulent person cannot recognize the initial value of the counter for generating the random 5, and as a result, the random 5 It means that the timing that matches the hit judgment value cannot be grasped. In other words, every time the value of the counter for normal symbol judgment after the second lap makes one round, the counter is started again from a random initial value, aiming at the timing when random 5 matches the hit judgment value. In addition to making it difficult to send an illegal winning signal to the main board 31, it is also possible to make it difficult to aim at the timing at which the random 5 matches the judgment value per ordinary symbol even in the first round.

  In this embodiment, as a counter whose initial value is set based on the output of the random number generation circuit 506 that generates a random number based on white noise, a counter for generating random 1 and a random 5 are generated. Although the counter is exemplified, the counter is not limited to the counter in which the initial value is set based on the output of the random number generation circuit 506. Control similar to the above-described control for the counter for generating random 1 and the counter for generating random 5 with respect to the counter for generating a random number for game state determination (random 8) for determining the type of jackpot May be performed. Furthermore, a random number for determining whether or not to shift to the probability variation state (random number for probability variation determination), and a random number for determining whether or not to change to the time shortening state (random number for time shortening determination: also referred to as a normal symbol probability variation determination random number) In the gaming machine using the above, the same control as the above-described control for the counter for generating random 1 and the counter for generating random 5 may be performed on the counter for generating the random numbers.

  Further, in this embodiment, only the first round of the count value of the counter for generating random numbers is determined based on the output of the random number generation circuit 506 that generates random numbers based on white noise. Also when the initial value is updated, the initial value may be determined based on the output of the random number generation circuit 506, and the determined initial value may be set in the counter.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the count value of the counter for generating random 1 and the count value of the counter for generating random 5 are stored in the backup RAM. If the counter value is restored, the count value of those counters is restored to the count value when the power supply is stopped, but even if the counter value is stored in the backup RAM, the random number generation circuit The initial value may be determined based on the output of 506, and the determined initial value may be set in the counter. In other words, regardless of whether data is stored in the backup RAM, the initial value may be determined based on the output of the random number generation circuit 506, and the determined initial value may be set in the counter. The same applies to random numbers for probability variation determination, random numbers for time reduction determination, and the like.

  In the technical field of the gaming machine according to the present invention, there is a conventional technique that uses a random number generation circuit that generates a random number based on white noise (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-42227). A technique for generating software random numbers by focusing on the first round of the counter for generating software random numbers as in the present invention, instead of using the random number generated by the random number generation circuit in place of random 1 etc. As for the initial value, a technique for setting the initial value based on the data read from the random number generation circuit is not disclosed in, for example, the above-mentioned publication.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game using a game ball and shifting a gaming state to a specific gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. A numerical value updating unit for determination that updates a numerical value for determination (for example, random 1) within a predetermined numerical value range, and a numerical value updating unit for determination according to satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of a start prize) Based on the extracted numerical value and a predetermined determination value, a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a state where a variable winning ball apparatus that establishes a starting prize is open, Means for determining whether or not to shift to a probable change state, a short time state), and further, when a random number generation circuit 506 that generates a hardware random number based on white noise and game control is started, Since the initial value setting means is provided for setting the initial value of the judgment numerical updating means on the basis of the read data from several generating circuit 506, it becomes possible to more effectively prevent abuse.

  FIG. 146 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state related to a high probability state (probability variation state) and a high base state in this embodiment. Such gaming states include high probability / high base state (a gaming state that is a high probability state and a high base state), low probability / high base state (a low probability state, and a high base state). A certain gaming state), a high probability / low base state (a gaming state that is a high probability state and a low base state), and a low probability / low base state (a low probability state and a low base state) Gaming state).

  In the high probability state, the probability of determining the jackpot is higher than in the low probability state (normal state). For example, it is 10 times. Specifically, in the high probability state, the number of determination values determined to be a big hit when it matches the value of the random number for jackpot determination is 10 times that in the normal state. In the high base state, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is higher than in the low base state. That is, the second start port 15b is easily opened, and a start winning is easily generated. Specifically, in the high base state, the number of determination values determined to be a hit when it matches the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is larger than that in the normal state. When winning is determined for the normal symbol, as described above, the display result (stop symbol) of the normal symbol variable display is set as the winning symbol, and the variable winning ball device (start winning device) 15 is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined time). (Open time) will be open and the base will go up. Further, instead of increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol, or in addition to increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol, the start winning device 15 The number of times of opening or the time of opening may be increased, or the number of times and the opening time of the start winning device 15 may be increased.

  FIG. 146 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the background mode in this embodiment. The background mode represents the mode (specifically, the type) of the background (the screen of the ground other than the design and the character image) on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The background mode includes a normal mode, a normal high probability mode, a high accuracy high base mode, and a low accuracy high base mode.

  The normal mode is a mode used when the gaming state is a low base state, and allows the player to recognize that there is a low probability of a high probability state or no possibility of a high probability state. It is a mode that can be. The normal high probability mode is a mode that is used when the gaming state is in the low base state, and is a mode that allows the player to recognize that the probability of the high probability state is high. The high-accuracy high-base mode is a mode used in a high probability / high base state. The low probability high base mode is a mode used in a low probability / high base state.

  FIG. 147 is a state transition diagram illustrating an example of how the gaming state transitions. As shown in FIG. 147, in this embodiment, a transition to the high probability / high base state can be made from the other three gaming states. The transition to the low probability / high base state can be made only from the high probability / high base state. To the high probability / low base state, transition can be made from two gaming states other than the high probability / high base state. A transition to a low probability / low base state can be made from a high probability / low base state. In FIG. 147, an arrow from the low probability / high base state to the low probability / low base state is shown, but the transition rate is 0%. Hereinafter, “transition” may be referred to as “transition”.

  The transition of the gaming state can transition when a big hit occurs. Even if a big hit occurs, the gaming state may not change. In addition, although not explicitly shown in FIG. 147, if a variable display of a special symbol that does not make the display result a big hit symbol in the low probability / high base state is continuously performed a predetermined number of times, the gaming state becomes low probability / low base You may control so that it may change to a state.

  The numerical value “%” shown in FIG. 147 indicates the ratio of what kind of jackpot the game state transitions to or the same game state is maintained. For example, if a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, the gaming state transitions to a high probability / high base state at a rate of 10 (3 + 7)%, of which 3% is a big hit per 2R jackpot. When it occurs, it transitions to a high probability / high base state, and when a big hit of 15R jackpot occurs at a rate of 7%, it transitions to a high probability / high base state. 2R jackpot is a jackpot game in which the jackpot game is executed such that the jackpot is opened twice, and 15R jackpot is a jackpot game in which the jackpot is opened up to 15 times at the maximum Is a big hit.

  Note that the 2R big hit is also called a sudden probability change big hit. In the 2R jackpot game, the big winning opening is opened twice, but the opening time is very short (for example, 0.5 seconds). In addition, the gaming state after the big hit game is controlled to a high probability state. Therefore, the player feels as if the gaming state suddenly becomes a high probability state (probability variation state).

  When it is decided to win, a lottery using a random number (game state determination random number) is performed in order to determine how to change the gaming state. The gaming state determination random number takes one of the values 0 to 599. In the lottery, the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines that the gaming state determination random number value is the gaming state (the gaming state to be changed to that state, that is, If it matches the determination value determined in accordance with the game state after the transition) and the type of jackpot, it is decided to make a transition to the game state. The determination value is determined according to each of the four gaming states (the gaming state at that time). In addition, for each of the four gaming states, a determination value is determined for each type of jackpot.

  FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state (the gaming state after transition) and the jackpot type when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, and the number of determination values as an example. The number of each determination value is determined so as to be consistent with each ratio shown in FIG. Specifically, determination values for the number of determination values are set in the ROM 54 as a table. 148 illustrates the number of determination values when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, but the determination values for other gaming states are also consistent with the ratios shown in FIG. 147. A number is defined.

  FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol, a decorative symbol, and an effect symbol used in this embodiment. In FIG. 149, “EXT” indicates the EXT data of the second byte in the effect control command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative pattern of 2-byte configuration. “Variation time” indicates the variation time (variable display period of identification information) of special symbols, decorative symbols, and effect symbols. Note that the variation pattern indicates the variation time of the special symbol, decorative symbol, and effect symbol, etc., but the variation of the ornament symbol and the effect symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol. May be expressed as a variation pattern, a decorative pattern variation pattern, and a production pattern variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 149, when the shortening variation is not performed, the variation patterns # 1 to # 4 are used, and when the shortening variation is performed, the variation patterns # 5 to # 8 are used. In this embodiment, variation patterns # 5 to # 8 of shortening variation are used when the value of the total number of pending storages is a predetermined value (for example, 4) or more.

  Note that the variation patterns # 2 to # 4 and the variation patterns # 6 to # 8 are a case where the stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol, and a case where the stop symbol is an off symbol but a reach effect is executed on the effect display device 9. The variation pattern used. The variation pattern # 1 and the variation pattern # 5 are variation patterns that are used when the stop symbol is an off symbol and the reach display is not executed in the effect display device 9.

  When receiving the effect control command indicating the variation pattern, the effect control microcomputer 110 performs variable display of the decoration symbol on the ornament symbol display for a time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the received effect control command. The effect design is variably displayed, and the effect display device 9 performs a type of display effect corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the received effect control command. At the same time, an effect using the effect parts such as the lamp, the LED, and the speaker 27 is performed. That is, the variation pattern indicates the variation time and the aspect of the effect.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 110 will be described. FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram showing a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 150, in this embodiment, the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 177 with eight signal lines of the effect control signals D0 to D7. Further, between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, a signal line of the effect control INT signal for transmitting the capture signal (effect control INT signal) is also wired.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 151, the 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 110 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control microcomputer 110, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a signal that triggers the acquisition of effect control command data.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 110 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the production control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable means that, for example, the first byte and the second byte of the production control command data respectively. Accordingly, the production control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. The effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG.

  FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 110. In the example shown in FIG. 152, commands 8001 (H) to 8008 (H) are variable patterns of decorative symbols and effect symbols that are variably displayed on the decorative symbol display and effect display device 9 in response to variable display of special symbols. Is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 110 receives any of the commands 8001 (H) to 8008 (H), the decoration design display and the production display device 9 start variable display of the decoration design and the production design. Control.

  Commands 8C00 (H) to 8C07 (H) are effect control commands (effect designating commands) indicating whether or not to make a big hit, types of big hits (2R big hit, 15R big hit), and gaming state. In addition, the production control microcomputer 110 determines the display result of the decorative design and the production design in response to the reception of the commands 8C00 (H) to 8C07 (H), so that the commands 8C00 (H) to 8C07 (H) are displayed. This is called a result specific command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the special symbol variable display (variation) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 110 terminates the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbol and the effect symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, designates power-on. Send a command.

  Command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (low base state background designation command) indicating that the gaming state is set to the low base state or the low base state is continued. The command 9501 (H) is an effect control command (high base state background designation command) indicating that the gaming state is changed to the high base state or the high base state is continued. The low base state background designation command and the high base state background designation command are referred to as a background designation command or a gaming state designation command. In response to the reception of the gaming state designation command (background designation command), the presentation control microcomputer 110 sets the background on the display screen of the presentation display device 9 as the background corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the gaming state designation command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A000 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start 1 designation command: fanfare designation command). A001 (H) is an effect control command (a big hit start 2 designation command: a sudden probability variation designation command) that designates that a sudden probability variation screen is to be displayed.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of the big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A300 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot end designation command: an ending designation command) for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game.

  The effect control microcomputer 110 (specifically, the effect control CPU 111) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 152, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56). In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special prize opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that a game ball has won the first start port switch 13a or the second start port 15b for detecting that the game ball has won the first start port 15a. If the second start port switch 15b is on, that is, if a start winning is generated, start port switch passing processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed.

  The processes in steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is ready to start the variable display of the special symbol, it checks the number of reserved memories (the number of start winning memories). If the number of reserved memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win. If it is determined to be a big hit, a big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to step S301. It should be noted that determining whether or not to win is also determining whether or not the display results of the special symbol and the decorative symbol are to be the jackpot symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is determined. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from when the variable display is started until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variable symbol variation display time. Decide to do. In addition, a command that can specify the variation time is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 110, the variation of the special symbol is started, and the variation time timer that measures the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302. It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 110 controls the effect display device 9 so that the change of the decorative pattern is started when the command that can specify the change time transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command, which is a command that can specify the display result of the decorative design, to the effect control microcomputer 110 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. Update to a value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the special symbol display 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command for instructing stop of the variation of the decorative symbol to the effect control microcomputer 110 is performed. If the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 110 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for opening the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening open process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 110, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 110 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Also, a process for setting a flag (for example, a probability change flag) indicating the gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process (step S312). In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 outputs an authentication signal (a board ID uniquely given to the main board 31) to the verification terminal 364 (step S1110). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the reserved storage number is 4 which is the upper limit value (step S1111). If the number of reserved memories is 4, the process is terminated.

  When the number of reserved memories is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the reserved memory number counter indicating the number of reserved memories by 1 (step S1112). Also, software random numbers (counter values for generating big hit determination random numbers, etc.) are extracted and stored as extracted random number values in a storage area in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved storage number counter. Processing is executed (step S1113). In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the reserved storage number are secured. Further, a counter for generating a jackpot determining random number and the like and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. In step S1113, random values 1 to 4 and 8 (see FIG. 140) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

  Next, the normal symbol process (step S28) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, when the game control microcomputer 560 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S1105), the game switch microcomputer 560 performs the gate switch passage process (step S1106). Execute. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes one of the processes shown in steps S1100 to S1104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  Normal symbol normal processing (step S1100): The game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where normal symbol variation can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S1100) The normal symbol display 10 is in a state in which the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, and the start winning device 15 is not being opened or closed based on the fact that the normal symbol display 10 hits and displays the symbol. In the case of ()), the value of the gate passing memory number is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol variation time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S1101).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step S1101): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, stops the variation of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10, The normal symbol stop symbol display time is set in the symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S1102).

  Normal symbol stop processing (step S1102): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol. To do. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S1100). If the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric release pre-processing (step S1103).

  Normal symbol release pre-processing (step S1103): If the game control microcomputer 560 is before the first release, the release count counter is set to the release count, and the solenoid 16 is driven to start the normal electric accessory (start). The winning device 15) is opened. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “4”) indicating the process during normal electric release (step S1104A). If it is not before the first opening, that is, after the second or later opening, the closing time is measured, and when the closing time has elapsed, the value of the normal symbol process flag is processed in the normal electric opening process (step S1104). The value is updated (specifically, “4”).

  Processing during opening of ordinary electric accessory (step S1104): The game control microcomputer 560 measures the opening time, and when the opening time elapses, stops the driving of the solenoid 16 and closes the ordinary electric accessory. When the last release is completed, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S1100). If the final release has not ended, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric release pre-processing (step S1103).

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the gate switch passage processing. In the gate switch passage processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example) (step S1121). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by 1 (step S1122). Note that the LED of the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for normal symbol determination (random 5) and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passing gates. (Step S1123).

  In this embodiment, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 157A and the timing diagram of FIG. 157B, the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal state is 30.0 seconds, The normal symbol variation time is 1.0 seconds. Further, the opening time, closing time, and opening frequency in the normal state are 0.3 seconds, 1.0 second, and 2 times, and the opening time, closing time, and opening frequency in the probability variation state are 1.2 seconds, 1.5 seconds and 3 times. Further, the time-short state is the same as the case of the probability variation state.

  FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the lighting state of the state notification LED 61 mounted on the main board 31 and the gaming state. When the special symbol and the decorative symbol do not change and when the big hit game is not being played, as shown in FIG. 158 (A), the lighting state is always on. That is, it is a lighting continuation state. In each of FIGS. 158 (A), (B), and (C), the upper row indicates the lighting state of the state notification LED 61 (lit, extinguished, or blinking), and the lower row indicates The timing for switching on and off is shown. 158 (A), (B), and (C), the state of the state notification LED 61 that is displayed in black is lit.

  When the special symbol and the decorative symbol are fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 158 (B), lighting for 2 seconds and turning off for 2 seconds are repeated. That is, it blinks at intervals of 2 seconds. Hereinafter, blinking at intervals of 2 seconds is referred to as slow blinking. During the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 158 (C), lighting for 0.5 seconds and turning off for 0.5 seconds are repeated. That is, it blinks at 0.5 second intervals. Hereinafter, flashing at intervals of 0.5 seconds is referred to as high-speed flashing.

  Note that the relationship between the lighting state of the state notification LED 61 and the gaming state shown in FIG. 158 is an example, and is at least during a symbol variation, during a big hit game, during a symbol variation and during a big hit game (hereinafter referred to as a normal state). If the blinking mode (notification mode) is different, a notification mode different from the notification mode shown in FIG. The notification mode includes a lighting continuation mode and a flashing mode, but in a normal state, the condition that the light is turned off is a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or less. That is, it is a condition that the period during which no notification is made does not become long. In other words, it is a condition that control is performed so as to avoid a state in which notification is not made over a predetermined time when power is supplied to the main board 31. Since power is supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 and the status notification LED 61 in a state where power is supplied to the main board 31, the status notification LED 61 can perform notification, but the period during which it is turned off is long. This is because it cannot be distinguished from a state in which power is not supplied to the main board 31 (a state in which an impersonation board may be mounted). In this embodiment, when power is supplied to the main board 31, the state notification LED 61 is informed by being continuously lit or in a blinking state. Further, in order to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to recognize the notification mode of the state notification LED 61, the notification mode may be made more complicated.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game state that changes the state of notification of the state notification means (in this example, the state notification LED 61) is divided into “during symbol variation”, “during big hit game”, and “normal state”. The gaming state in which the notification mode is different is not limited to these, and various states are conceivable. For example, “Status of number of reserved memory”, “Opening / closing state of variable winning device”, “High probability state (probability changing state)”, “Variation shortening state of special symbol or normal symbol”, “Open extension of variable winning device The notification mode may be varied depending on the “state”.

  Further, in this embodiment, “lighting” and “blinking” are illustrated as different notification modes, but the different notification modes are not limited thereto. For example, the notification modes may be different by changing colors using full-color LEDs or the like. You may make it let.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the state notification LED control process in step S34A (see FIG. 139). In the state notification LED control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a big hit game is being played (step S901). Whether or not the jackpot game is in progress can be confirmed, for example, by checking whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating that the jackpot game is being played (in this embodiment, 5, 6 or 7: see FIG. 153). .

  If it is during the big hit game, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the blinking timer for determining the turn-on time and turn-off time for blinking is 0 (step S902). If it is 0, the lighting state of the state notification LED 61 is switched (step S903). That is, when the state notification LED 61 is turned on, the state notification LED 61 is turned off, and when the state notification LED 61 is turned off, the state notification LED 61 is turned on. In order to turn on or turn off the status notification LED 61, a value (for example, 1) corresponding to lighting is output to an output port that outputs a signal reaching the status notification LED 61 via the LED circuit 60, or is turned off. A corresponding value (for example, 0) is output. When a value corresponding to lighting is output to the output port, the lighting state flag in the RAM 55 is set to 1, for example, and when a value corresponding to lighting is output to the output port, The lighting state flag is set to 0, for example. With such control, the CPU 56 can determine whether or not the state notification LED 61 is lit based on the lighting state flag. Then, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the blinking timer (step S904).

  If the value of the blinking timer is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the blinking timer by 1 (step S905).

  If it is not during the big hit game, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the special symbol and the decorative symbol are changing (step S906). Whether or not it is changing can be confirmed, for example, by checking whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating that it is changing (in this embodiment, refer to 3: FIG. 153). If it is changing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the blinking timer is 0 (step S907). If it is 0, the lighting state of the state notification LED 61 is switched (step S908). That is, when the state notification LED 61 is turned on, the state notification LED 61 is turned off, and when the state notification LED 61 is turned off, the state notification LED 61 is turned on. Then, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to 2 seconds in the blinking timer (step S909).

  When the value of the blinking timer is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the blinking timer by −1 (step S910).

  If the special symbol and the decorative symbol are not changing, the state notification LED 61 is turned on (step S911).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 is configured to interrupt the game control process in response to the input of the game control process interrupt signal (interrupt operation signal) from the interrupt button 361. For example, a game store clerk or the like can intentionally interrupt the game control process. Then, when the intentional interruption is impossible, it can be determined that an illegal circuit board (impersonation board) is installed, and the illegal circuit board can be easily found.

  In this embodiment, as an example of interrupting the game control process, the case where the loop process is performed according to the control program while the game control process interrupt signal is input has been described. However, the interrupt operation signal is input. It is only necessary to stop the game, and various methods for stopping the game can be taken. For example, the game control process may be interrupted by a known or publicly known method such as stopping the power supply to the gaming machine (that is, turning off the power). Further, for example, the processing of the CPU 56 may be stopped (system reset) so as to “interrupt the game control processing”, or the output of all control signals output from the game control microcomputer 560 may be stopped. The “game control process may be substantially interrupted”.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the game control board box that accommodates the main board 31, a state notification LED 61 that changes the notification mode according to the gaming state is provided. As shown in FIG. 135, when the impersonation board 31X is installed and power is supplied from the impersonation board 31X to the main board 31, the CPU 56 of the main board 31 is operating, so that the collator 365 is used. When collation is performed, the verification target is OK because the authentication target is the main board 31 instead of the spoofing board 31X. However, the variation of the special design and the decorative design is controlled by the microcomputer mounted on the spoofing substrate 31X. Therefore, the CPU 56 of the main board 31 that is not controlling the fluctuation does not recognize that the special symbol and the decorative symbol are fluctuating, and therefore does not cause the state notification LED 61 to blink. Therefore, when mounted on the spoofing substrate 31X, the state notification LED 61 continues to be lit during the symbol variation (it remains in the normal state notification mode), so that the state notification LED 61 blinks. It is inspected that an illegal board is installed depending on whether or not. For example, it is possible to easily inspect whether or not an illegal substrate is installed by starting a change in the design by inserting a game ball into the first start port 15a. The big hit game is controlled by a microcomputer mounted on the spoofing board 31X. Therefore, during the big hit game, the CPU 56 of the main board 31 does not recognize the big hit game state, and therefore does not blink the state notification LED 61. Therefore, when mounted on the spoofing substrate 31X, the state notification LED 61 continues to be lit during the symbol variation (it remains in the normal state notification mode), so that the state notification LED 61 blinks. It is inspected that an illegal board is installed depending on whether or not.

  Further, when the spoofing board 31X is installed and no power is supplied to the main board 31, the state notification LED 61 is not lit. As described above, in this embodiment, when power is supplied to the main board 31, the state notification LED 61 is lit in the normal state. Therefore, in the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned on, whether or not the unauthorized board is installed can be easily confirmed by whether or not the state notification LED 61 is lit.

  In the above embodiment, the game control process is interrupted using the interrupt button 361 to discover whether or not the impersonation board is installed. However, without using the interrupt button 361, the following is performed. You may make it discover whether the impersonation board | substrate is installed as shown.

  It should be noted that here, the detailed description of the parts having the same configurations and processes as those of the above embodiment is omitted, and the parts different from the above embodiments and the parts of which are not described in the above embodiments. Will be described.

  FIG. 160 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the main board 31 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 160, the main board 31 has an unpaid excess LED 362 that is turned on when the number of game balls that have been paid out exceeds a predetermined number, and a winning notification lamp 363 that is turned on when a winning occurs. Is installed. In addition, an LED circuit 60 that provides a drive signal to the state notification LED 61 for notifying the gaming state of the gaming machine is provided. The state notification LED 61 is provided on the main board 31. Other configurations not shown are the same as those shown in FIG.

  Next, payout control signals transmitted and received between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 will be described. FIG. 161 shows the contents of the payout control signal output from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370 and the payout control signal input to the game control microcomputer 560 from the payout control microcomputer 370. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of control signals are transmitted and received (two-way communication) between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 in order to perform various controls relating to payout control and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the power confirmation signal rises (turns on when the main board 31 rises (when the game control microcomputer 560 enters a state in which the progress of the game can be controlled after the start of power supply). This is a signal (connection confirmation signal for the main board 31) for notifying the payout control board 37 that the main board 31 has risen. The power supply confirmation signal indicates that the prize ball payout is permitted. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 can prevent the payout control microcomputer 370 from paying out a prize ball by turning off the power confirmation signal. If the payout control microcomputer 370 detects that the power supply confirmation signal is turned off during the payout of the prize ball, the payout control microcomputer 370 completes the number of prize balls to be paid out at that time. At this point, the system shifts to a state in which the prize ball payout process is not executed.

  The payout REQ signal is a signal (that is, a trigger signal for a prize ball payout request) that becomes an output state (= ON state) when a prize ball payout request is made. The payout REQ signal is stopped (off state) when a reception confirmation signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 is turned on.

  The payout number signal is a signal (prize ball number command) that is output to designate the number of game balls (for example, 1 to 15) that make a payout request. The payout number signal is received when the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) detects that the reception confirmation signal is turned on in the prize ball standby state or after the payout REQ signal is transmitted. It is also used as an error signal indicating a reception confirmation signal error that is output when it is detected that the confirmation signal has not been turned on, or when it has been detected that the confirmation signal has not been turned off after transmission of the payout REQ signal is stopped. . Specifically, if the payout number signal is 1E (H), it indicates a reception confirmation signal error. Further, the payout number signal is turned on when the CPU 56 detects that the payout operation in-progress signal is turned on in the prize ball standby state or after the reception confirmation signal is turned off. It is also used as an error signal indicating a signal error during payout operation that is output when it is detected that the state has not been reached. Specifically, if the payout number signal is 1F (H), it indicates a signal error during payout operation.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for the payout control microcomputer 370 to turn on when the payout control board 37 rises and to notify the game control microcomputer 560 that the payout control board 37 has risen. In other words, this is a signal for notifying that the payout control microcomputer 370 can execute the winning ball payout process. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 370 turns off the connection confirmation signal when an error relating to payout of the game ball occurs. The reception confirmation signal is a signal that is turned on when the payout control microcomputer 370 receives a payout number signal in response to the payout REQ signal being turned on. The payout operation in-progress signal is a signal that is turned on when the payout control microcomputer 370 starts the prize ball payout process and is turned off when the number of prize balls paid out by the payout number signal is completed.

  FIG. 162 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of the payout control signal shown in FIG. 161. 162, among the payout control signals, the power supply confirmation signal, the payout REQ signal, and the payout quantity signal are output by the CPU 56 via the output circuit 67, and the payout control microcomputer 370 via the input circuit 373A. Is input. Of the payout control signals, the connection confirmation signal, the reception confirmation signal, and the payout operation in-progress signal are output by the payout control microcomputer 370 via the output circuit 373B, and the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 68. Is input. Each of the power supply confirmation signal, the payout REQ signal, the connection confirmation signal, the reception confirmation signal, and the payout operation in-progress signal is 1-bit data, and is transmitted through one signal line (signal path). The payout number signal is composed of 5-bit data and is transmitted through five signal lines (signal paths).

  FIG. 163 is a timing chart showing an example of how to output the payout control signal. As shown in FIG. 163, based on the winning detection switch detecting the winning of the game ball, the CPU 56 turns on the payout REQ signal and pays out the output state of the payout number signal according to the win. A state corresponding to the number of prize balls is set. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a, four prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is selected by any one of the prize port switches 33a and 39a. Is detected, 7 prize balls are paid out. When a game ball is detected by the V count switch 22 or the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are paid out. As described above, since the payout number signal is composed of 5 bits, the lower 5 bits of the award ball number commands of 00 (H) to 0F (H) expressed in 8 bits are paid out. The number signal is transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37. Therefore, it is possible to designate 0 to 31 prize balls by the number-of-payout signal, but in this embodiment, 1F (H) and 1E (H) are used for error notification. Therefore, in practice, it is possible to specify the number of prize balls from 0 to 29. However, in this embodiment, up to 15 (0F (H)) is used for specifying the number, and therefore, it may be expressed as “payout number signal from 00 (H) to 0F (H)” hereinafter. .

  When the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the receipt of the payout REQ signal, the payout control microcomputer 370 inputs the payout number signal and transmits (turns on) the reception confirmation signal. When the CPU 56 confirms reception of the reception confirmation signal, the CPU 56 stops transmission of the payout REQ signal (sets to an off state). When confirming that the payout REQ signal is turned off, the payout control microcomputer 370 drives the payout motor 289 so that the number of award balls specified by the payout number signal is paid. When driving is started, a payout operation in-progress signal is transmitted (ON state). When the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms that the number of award balls specified by the payout number signal has been paid based on the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301, the payout control microcomputer 370 stops transmitting the payout operation in-progress signal. (Turn off). When the CPU 56 confirms that the payout operation in-progress signal has been turned off, the CPU 56 sets the payout number signal to an off state (all 0).

  The CPU 56 may set the state of the payout number signal to the off state when the payout REQ signal is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 163, when a new winning is detected when the payout REQ signal and the payout number signal are on, the payout REQ signal is turned on and the payout number signal is output based on the win. Specifically, when the CPU 56 detects a new winning when the payout REQ signal is in the ON state, the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning is stored in the total winning ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 55. Add to content. Then, when the content of the total winning ball number storage buffer is not 0 when the payout REQ signal is turned off, the CPU 56 receives an award of the number of winning balls indicated by the content of the total winning ball number storage buffer up to 15. In order to instruct ball payout, the payout REQ signal is turned on and a payout quantity signal is output.

  FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports related to a switch for detecting a winning of a game ball in the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 164, the bits 1 to 5 of the input port 0 are respectively detected by the count switch 23, the winning port switch 30a, the winning port switch 30a, the first starting port switch 13a, and the second starting port switch 14a. A signal is input. The input port 0 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing each 1-byte buffer formed in the RAM 55 used in the switch process of step S21 in the game control process. The port buffer before two times is a buffer in which the switch on / off determination result of the previous time (assumed to be 4 ms before) is stored. The previous port buffer is a buffer in which the switch on / off determination result of the previous time (2 ms before) is stored. As described above, in the switch-on buffer, when a switch on is detected, 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch, and when a switch off is detected, 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch. It is a buffer. The previous data is a buffer area that is temporarily used when the switch process is executed. The previous-time port buffer, the previous port buffer, the switch-on buffer, and the previous data are formed in the RAM 55. The bit arrangement of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer two times before the second corresponds to the bit arrangement of the input port 0. In other words, information corresponding to each of the switch detection signals assigned to bits 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 164 is set in bits 1 to 5 of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart illustrating a processing example of the switch processing in step S21 in the game control processing. In the switch process, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the content of the previous port buffer to the previous data (step S331). Further, the exclusive OR of the contents of the port buffer and the previous data is taken twice before (step S332). Then, the result of the exclusive OR operation is set as the previous data (step S333). At this stage, in the previous data, the bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. In addition, the contents of the previous port buffer are set in the port buffer two times before (step S334).

  Then, input port 0 data is input (step S335), and the input data is set in the previous port buffer (step S336). The processes in steps S334 and S336 correspond to a preparation process when the switch process is executed next time (after 2 ms).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 takes the logical product of the data input from the input port 0 and the previous data (step S337). At this stage, in the previous data, a bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the previous port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. That is, among the detection signals of the seven switches, the bit corresponding to the detection signal changed from the state before 2 ms from the state before 4 ms (from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”). Is “1”. Therefore, when the logical product of the previous data and the data input from the input port 0 is taken in step S337, the bit that is “1” in the data input from the input port 0 and 2 ms before The bit whose state has changed from the state 4 ms before becomes “1”. That is, as a result of the logical product operation, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the current state is the on state and has been detected to have changed from the off state to the on state during the previous switch processing (2 ms before) is “ 1 ”. In other words, the bit corresponding to the detection signal that has changed from the off state to the on state and then detected the on state twice in succession is “1”. Note that “continuously twice” means “both the switch process executed at a certain time and the switch process executed 2 ms after the switch process”.

  The game control microcomputer 560 stores the result of the AND operation in the switch-on buffer (step S338). In the switch-on buffer, after changing from the off state to the on state, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the on state is detected twice consecutively is “1”. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can confirm that the detection signal of the switch corresponding to the bit which is “1” in the switch-on buffer is surely turned on. Note that “definitely” means that the ON state has been detected twice in succession, that is, it can be considered that the ON state has continued for 4 ms, so it is determined that the ON state of the detection signal is not due to noise or the like. It can be done.

  FIG. 167 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prize ball processing in step S30. In the prize ball process, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball number addition process (step S1201) and a prize ball control process (step S1202). Then, the contents of the output port 0 buffer among the output port buffers formed in the RAM 55 are output to port 0 (step S1203). The contents of the output port 0 buffer are updated in the prize ball control process. The output port 0 is an output port for outputting each of the payout control signals in the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG.

  In the prize ball number adding process, a prize ball number table shown in FIG. 168 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “6”) is set in the head address of the winning ball number table, and then the lower address of the switch-on buffer, and each switch of the winning opening that will pay out the winning ball by winning. The switch input bit determination value and the number of winning balls are sequentially set corresponding to each switch of the winning opening. The switch input bit determination value is a value corresponding to a bit to which the detection signal of each switch at the input port 0 is input. The upper address of the switch-on buffer is a fixed value (for example, 7F (H)). In the prize ball number table, the same data is set in each of the lower addresses of the six switch-on buffers. The input port 0 is an output port for inputting a detection signal of a switch that detects a winning associated with award ball payout in the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the award ball number adding process in step S1201. In the winning ball number adding process, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the winning ball number table in the pointer (step S351). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (step S352). Next, the switch-on buffer is loaded into the register (step S353).

  Then, the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S354), and the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer and the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the switch input bit determination value) is calculated (step S355). . Further, the value of the pointer is increased by 1 (step S356).

  If the calculation result in step S355 is not 0, that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the process proceeds to step S361A. If the calculation result in step S355 is 0, that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is not on, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S359). If the number is not 0, the process returns to step S354 (step S360).

  In step S361A, the CPU 56 turns on the winning notification lamp 363 for a predetermined period, assuming that a winning has occurred.

  Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the switch input bit determination value used in the process of step S355 is a count switch input bit determination value. That is, it is confirmed whether or not it is confirmed in step S361 that the count switch 23 is turned on (whether or not the switch to be inspected is the count switch 23).

  When the switch input bit determination value is the count switch input bit determination value, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S362B). That the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more means that the processing after the pre-opening process of the big winning opening in step S305 is executed in the special symbol process. In other words, it means that a big hit game is being played. Here, during the big hit game, it is a period from the start of the big hit display to the end of the big hit end processing. In other words, the value of the special symbol process flag being 5 or more indicates that there is a possibility that control for opening the big prize opening may be performed when the game control is normally executed. .

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more, the CPU 56 sets the prize ball number table data (in this case, the prize ball number) pointed to by the pointer as the prize ball addition value (step S364). The ball addition value is added to the contents of the 16-bit total award ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S365). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S357 and S358). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  The state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 is a state where the big hit game is not executed and the control for opening the big winning opening is not executed. When it is detected that the count switch 23 is turned on in such a state, it means that an abnormal prize has occurred at the big prize opening or that the detection signal from the count switch 23 has a noise over a long period (over 4 ms). Means that you got on. Therefore, when it is detected that the count switch 23 is turned on while the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the control for adding the prize ball addition value to the total prize ball number storage buffer is not executed. To do. That is, the prize ball payout based on the count switch 23 being turned on is not executed (the processes in steps S364 and S365 are skipped). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  When the switch input bit determination value is not the count switch input bit determination value (N in step S362A), the CPU 56 determines whether the switch input bit determination value used in the process of step S355 is the second start port switch input bit determination value. It is confirmed whether or not (step S363A). That is, it is confirmed in step S361 whether or not the second start port switch 14a has been turned on (whether or not the switch to be inspected is the second start port switch 14a).

  When the switch input bit determination value is the second start port switch input bit determination value, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 or more (step S363B). That the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 or more means that in the normal symbol process, the normal electric accessory release pre-processing in step S103 or the normal electric accessory release in-process in step S104 is executed. To do. That is, it means that the movable piece 13 of the ordinary electric accessory (start winning device 15) is being opened and closed.

  When the switch input bit determination value is not the second start port switch input bit determination value and when the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 or more, the CPU 56 stores data (in the award ball number table pointed to by the pointer ( In this case, the number of prize balls is set to the prize ball addition value (step S364), and the prize ball addition value is added to the contents of the 16-bit total prize ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S365). ). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S357 and S358). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  The state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 or more is a state where the movable piece 13 of the start winning device 15 is not opened (a state where the start winning device 15 is not opened). In such a state, it is detected that the second start port switch 14a is turned on. This means that an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start port 15b or a detection signal from the second start port switch 14a has been detected for a long time. This means that noise (over 4 ms) was riding. Therefore, when it is detected that the second start port switch 14a is turned on in a state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is less than 3 (N in step S363B), a prize ball addition value is stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer. The control to add is not executed. That is, the prize ball payout based on the fact that the second start port switch 14a is turned on is not executed (steps S364 and S365 are skipped). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  In the above processing, the CPU 56 determines whether or not an abnormal winning a prize winning has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag. However, when the winning prize opening is not actually opened. When it is detected that the count switch 23 is turned on, the prize ball payout based on the count switch 23 being turned on may not be executed. However, when configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag as in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data. As a result, the determination process is simplified. Since the big winning opening is opened or closed over a plurality of rounds, it is determined whether or not the abnormal winning has occurred by judging whether or not the actual winning opening is controlled. To be complicated.

  In addition, since there is a certain distance between the entrance of the big prize opening and the position where the count switch 23 is installed, it is judged whether or not the control for actually opening the big prize opening is performed and whether or not an abnormal prize has occurred. In determining whether or not, it is necessary to consider a game ball that may have won a prize winning slot immediately before closing after performing a control for closing the prize winning opening. That is, it is necessary to consider the time for the game ball to flow from the entrance of the big prize opening to the position where the count switch 23 is installed. In other words, it is necessary to start the determination as to whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred after a certain period of time has passed since the control for actually closing the special winning opening is performed. This also complicates the processing.

  However, as in this embodiment, when it is configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred after the end of the big hit ending process, it is counted from the entrance of the big winning opening. It is not necessary to consider the time during which the game ball flows until the switch 23 is installed. This is because the game ball that has won the winning prize immediately before closing has reached the installation position of the count switch 23 during the processing period of the big hit ending process after the closing of the winning prize opening. In this embodiment, during the processing period of the jackpot end process, that is, the period in which the jackpot end display is performed on the effect display device 9, the game ball that has won the winning prize opening reaches the installation position of the count switch 23. It is set longer than the time.

  In addition, the CPU 56 determines whether or not an abnormal winning to the second starting port 15b has occurred based on the value of the normal symbol process flag (see step S363B), but the starting winning device 15 is actually opened. When the start winning device 15 is in the closed state when the start winning device 15 repeats the opening / closing operation based on the opening pattern according to the gaming state in the process of opening the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. When it is detected that the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the prize ball payout based on the second start port switch 14a being turned on may not be executed. However, when it is configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the normal symbol process flag as in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data. As a result, the determination process is simplified. For example, when the start winning device 15 is opened or closed a plurality of times (two or three times in this embodiment) as in the case of the probability changing state, the start winning device 15 is actually opened. If it is determined whether or not the control is performed and it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred, the processing becomes complicated, but the processing can be simplified by determining based on the normal symbol process flag.

  Further, since there is a certain distance between the entrance of the second start port 15b and the installation position of the second start port switch 14a, it is determined whether or not the control for actually opening the start winning device 15 is being performed. When determining whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred, it is necessary to consider a game ball that may have won the second starting port 15b immediately before closing after performing control for closing the start winning device 15. . That is, it is necessary to consider the time during which the game ball flows from the entrance of the second start port 15b to the installation position of the second start port switch 14a. Therefore, it is preferable that the timing for determining the abnormal winning is delayed from the timing for closing the start winning device 15.

  For example, in the processing during the opening of the ordinary electric accessory, the time from when the start winning device 15 is finally closed until the game ball winning the second start port 15b reaches the installation position of the second start port switch 14a. Long delay processing (create delay time by software). Thereafter, the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 4 to 0. By such control, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that an abnormal winning has occurred due to the winning of the game ball immediately before the start winning device 15 is closed.

  As a method of delaying the timing for determining an abnormal winning than the timing for closing the start winning device 15, a predetermined time is set in the delay timer when the value of the normal symbol process flag is changed from 4 to 0, and each timer interrupt (2 ms) Every time) the delay timer is counted down. When it is determined in the award ball number addition process that the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 or more, it is determined whether or not the delay timer is 0. When the delay timer is 0, the processing of steps S364 and S365 is performed. May be skipped and the process may proceed to step S359. Even with such a configuration, the timing for determining an abnormal winning can be delayed from the timing for closing the movable piece 13 of the starting winning device 15 (closing the starting winning device 15).

  It should be noted that, even in the determination of an abnormal winning to the big winning opening, the timing for determining the abnormal winning by the same method can be delayed from the timing for closing the big winning opening (specific variable winning ball apparatus 20). Specifically, when the value of the special symbol process flag changes from 7 to 0, a predetermined time is set in the delay timer, and the delay timer is counted down every timer interrupt (every 2 ms). When it is determined in the award ball number addition process that the value of the special symbol process flag is not 5 or more, it is determined whether or not the delay timer is 0. When the delay timer is 0, the processing in steps S364 and S365 is performed. Is skipped and the process proceeds to step S359.

  In addition, when the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 in Step S362B (N in Step S362B) or in the case where the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 or more in Step S363B (N in Step S363B), the prize ball is paid out. The prohibition control may not be performed. As will be described later, when it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred, the CPU 56 transmits an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command or an abnormal winning notification 2 designation command to the effect control microcomputer 110, and the effect control microcomputer 110 This is because it is considered that the occurrence of the abnormal winning is notified, and it is considered that the payout of the winning ball based on the abnormal winning can be minimized.

  FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control processing in step S1202. In the prize ball control process, the CPU 56 executes any one of steps S231 to S236 according to the value of the prize ball process code.

  FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing a standby process (step S231) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is zero. In the standby process, the CPU 56 checks the value of the prize ball timer (step S241A). When the value of the prize ball timer is not 0, the value of the prize ball timer is decremented by 1, and the process is terminated (step S242A). When the value of the prize ball timer is not 0, for example, when the award ball number signal is turned off after confirming that the payout operation in progress signal is turned off at the time of communication of the previous payout control signal, This is the case where a predetermined value is set in the prize ball timer in order to insert a waiting time until the payout REQ signal is turned on.

  If the value of the prize ball timer is 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the power confirmation signal is turned off (step S243A). When the power confirmation signal is turned off, the process is terminated. . Therefore, when the power confirmation signal is turned off, the payout REQ signal is not output. The CPU 56 can grasp the output state of the power confirmation signal from the state of bit 6 of the output port 0 buffer. Further, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the connection confirmation signal via the input port (step S243B). If the connection confirmation signal is off, the process is terminated. Therefore, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the process is not shifted to the payout number signal transmission process (see FIG. 172) (specifically, the output value during payout REQ in step S254 described later is output to the output port 0 buffer). In this case, the payout REQ signal is not output.

  If the connection confirmation signal is on, the state of the reception confirmation signal is confirmed via the input port (step S244). Since the reception confirmation signal should not be turned on in the standby state, when the reception confirmation signal is on, the CPU 56 determines that a communication error has occurred. Then, the prize ball abnormal state output value (00 (H) or 1E (H)) is set in the output port 0 buffer, and the process is terminated (step S247). When the prize ball abnormal state output value is set in the output port 0 buffer, the contents of the output port 0 buffer are output to port 0 in step S1203 (see FIG. 167), whereby a power supply confirmation signal and a payout REQ signal are output. Turns off. By such control, when the reception confirmation signal is turned on during the award ball waiting, the power confirmation signal is turned off. Even if a value other than 0 is stored in the total winning ball number storage buffer, the state does not shift to a state in which a payout command signal is output. That is, it is prohibited to turn on the payout command signal.

  Further, the case where 1E (H) is set as the prize ball abnormal state output value corresponds to the case shown in FIG. 152, and the case where 00 (H) is set as the prize ball abnormal state output value is shown in FIG. Corresponds to the indicated case. When 1E (H) as a prize ball abnormal state output value is set, 1E (H) is output as a payout number signal, and when 00 (H) as a prize ball abnormal state output value is set, the number of payouts 00 (H) is output as a signal. However, at this stage, normally, the payout quantity signal is 00 (H) before the prize ball abnormal state output value is set.

  If the reception confirmation signal is not on, the CPU 56 checks the state of the payout operation in-progress signal via the input port (step S245). Since the payout operation in-progress signal should not be turned on in the standby state, when the payout operation in-progress signal is on, the CPU 56 determines that a communication error has occurred. Then, the prize ball abnormal state output value (00 (H) or 1F (H)) is set in the output port 0 buffer, and the process is terminated (step S246). By such control, when the payout operation in-progress signal is turned on during the award ball payout standby, the power supply confirmation signal is turned off. Even if a value other than 0 is stored in the total winning ball number storage buffer, the state does not shift to a state in which a payout command signal is output. That is, it is prohibited to turn on the payout command signal.

  If no communication error has occurred, the prize ball standby output value (40 (H)) is set in the output port 0 buffer (step S248). When the prize ball waiting output value is set in the output port 0 buffer, the payout REQ signal is turned off by outputting the contents of the output port 0 buffer to port 0 in step S1203, and the power supply confirmation signal Turns on. However, if the control related to communication has been normally continued, at this stage, the payout REQ signal is already in the off state and the power supply confirmation signal is in the on state. The processing in step S248 is valid when the communication error state is recovered (specifically, when the connection confirmation signal from the payout control board 37 returns to the on state).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the contents of the total winning ball number storage buffer (step S249). If the value is 0, the process ends. If not, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 1 (step S250), and the process ends.

  FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the payout quantity signal transmission process (step S232) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 1. In the payout number signal transmission process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value (“15” in this example) (step S251). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is equal to or greater than the prize ball command maximum value, the prize ball command maximum value is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S252). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the maximum value of the prize ball command, the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S253).

  Thereafter, the output value during payout REQ (60 (H)) is set in the output port 0 buffer (step S254). When the output value during payout REQ is set in the output port 0 buffer, the content of the output port 0 buffer is output to port 0 in step S1203, so that the payout REQ signal is turned on, and the power supply confirmation signal The on state is maintained. Further, the contents of the winning ball number buffer are set in the lower 5 bits of the output port 0 buffer (step S255). Further, a value (2500 in this example) corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) for monitoring that the reception confirmation signal is turned on is set in the prize ball timer (step S256). Thereafter, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 2 (step S257), and the process is terminated. Note that 5 seconds is a sufficient time to complete one payout process (for example, payout of up to 25 game balls), and the payout control means is performing the ball lending process. This is a time considering a period during which the payout REQ signal is not confirmed. When it is allowed to continuously execute a plurality of ball lending processes (for example, paying out 25 game balls at a time), a predetermined time for monitoring that the reception confirmation signal is turned on Is determined in consideration of the maximum number of ball lending processes executed continuously.

  In this embodiment, the maximum prize ball command value is “15”. Accordingly, a payout number signal designating a payout number of “15” at the maximum is transmitted to the payout control board 37.

  FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the reception confirmation signal ON waiting process (step S233) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 2. In response to the reception confirmation signal being turned on in the reception confirmation signal ON waiting process (step S261), the CPU 56 determines the contents of the prize ball number buffer (the payout control micro) from the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer. The number of prize balls paid out commanded to the computer 370 is subtracted (step S262). Then, the payout REQ signal output bit of the output port 0 buffer is reset (step S263). When the payout REQ signal output bit of the output port 0 buffer is reset, the payout REQ signal is turned off by outputting the contents of the output port 0 buffer to the port 0 in step S1203. Since the payout REQ signal, which is a signal, is turned off, the payout command signal is turned off.

  Further, a value corresponding to a predetermined time (100 ms as an example) for monitoring that the reception confirmation signal is turned off is set in the prize ball timer (step S264). Also, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 3 (step S265), and the process is terminated.

  If the reception confirmation signal is not on, the value of the prize ball timer is decremented by 1 (step S266). If the value of the prize ball timer is not 0, the process is terminated. When the value of the prize ball timer becomes 0 (step S267), the CPU 56 determines that a communication error has occurred. The prize ball abnormal state output value (00 (H) or 1E (H)) is set in the output port 0 buffer (step S268). When the prize ball abnormal state output value is set in the output port 0 buffer, the contents of the output port 0 buffer are output to port 0 in step S1203 (see FIG. 167), thereby turning off the power confirmation signal and the payout REQ signal. It becomes a state. Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 0 corresponding to the standby process (step S269), and the process ends.

  FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the reception confirmation signal OFF waiting process (step S234) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 3. In the reception confirmation signal off waiting process, the CPU 56 determines whether the payout operation in-progress signal is turned on in response to the reception confirmation signal being turned off (step S271). ) Is set in the prize ball timer (step S272). Also, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 4 (step S273), and the process is terminated.

  If the reception confirmation signal is not OFF, the value of the prize ball timer is decremented by 1 (step S275). If the value of the prize ball timer is not 0, the process is terminated. When the value of the prize ball timer becomes 0 (step S276), the CPU 56 determines that a communication error has occurred. The prize ball abnormal state output value (00 (H) or 1E (H)) is set in the output port 0 buffer (step S277). Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 0 corresponding to the standby process (step S278), and the process ends.

  FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing a payout operation signal on wait process (step S235) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 4. In the payout operation signal on waiting process, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the payout operation in-progress signal is turned off in response to the payout operation in-progress signal being turned on (step S281). Is set to the prize ball timer (step S282). Also, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 5 (step S283), and the process is terminated.

  When the payout operation in-progress signal is not on, the value of the prize ball timer is decremented by 1 (step S285). If the value of the prize ball timer is not 0, the process is terminated. When the value of the prize ball timer becomes 0 (step S286), the CPU 56 determines that a communication error has occurred. Then, the prize ball abnormal state output value (00 (H) or 1F (H)) is set in the output port 0 buffer (step S287). When the prize ball abnormal state output value is set in the output port 0 buffer, the contents of the output port 0 buffer are output to port 0 in step S1203 (see FIG. 167), thereby turning off the power confirmation signal and the payout REQ signal. It becomes a state. Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 0 corresponding to the standby process (step S288), and the process ends.

  FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the payout operation signal off waiting process (step S236) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 5. In the payout operation signal off waiting process, the CPU 56 sets a delay time value (10 corresponding to 20 ms as an example) in the prize ball timer in response to the payout operation signal being turned off (step S291). (Step S294), the payout number signal output bit (lower 5 bits) of the output port 0 buffer is set to 0 (Step S297), the value of the prize ball process code is set to 0 (Step S298), and the process is terminated. . In this case, the communication between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is normally completed. The delay time value is set to provide a waiting time until the payout REQ signal is turned on next time.

  If the payout operation in-progress signal is not in the OFF state, the value of the prize ball timer is decremented by 1 (step S292). If the value of the prize ball timer is not 0, the process is terminated. When the value of the prize ball timer becomes 0 (step S293), the CPU 56 determines that a payout error has occurred. Then, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification command transmission request (step S295), and resets the power check signal output bit of the output port 0 buffer (step S296). Further, the payout number signal output bit (lower 5 bits) of the output port 0 buffer is set to 0 (step S297), the value of the winning ball process code is set to 0 (step S298), and the process is terminated. When an abnormality notification command transmission request is set, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 110.

  As described above, the gaming control microcomputer 560 controls to stop paying out the game ball (for example, power supply confirmation) when an abnormality (communication error) in communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 occurs. Signal off). The game control microcomputer 560 stops paying out the game balls until the abnormality in communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 is resolved. That is, even if a new event (game ball winning or the like) occurs, processing corresponding to the new event is not performed, for example, a newly generated event is stored. When the communication abnormality is resolved (for example, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on), the game control microcomputer 560 resumes communication.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 subtracts a value corresponding to the payout number specified by the payout command signal from the prize game medium number data stored in the prize game medium number storage means (in this example, the total prize ball number storage buffer). The predetermined condition for executing the subtraction processing is when the reception confirmation signal is received from the payout control microcomputer 370, specifically, when the reception confirmation signal is turned on. When the reception confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 370 has not yet paid out the number of prize balls instructed by the payout command signal. The total number of winning balls after the reception confirmation signal is turned on (for example, when the paying-in operation signal is turned off, that is, when the number of paying balls designated by the payout number signal is completed). If the storage buffer is subtracted, a large number of prize balls will be paid out illegally by fraudulent actions such as restoring the power supply after illegally stopping the power supply of the gaming machine during the prize ball payout. End up. For example, when 15 prize ball payouts are instructed by a payout command signal, when 10 prize ball payouts are made, if the power supply is restored after illegally stopping the power supply of the gaming machine, Since the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer are not subtracted at all, it is assumed that the 10 prize balls are not paid out even though 10 prize balls are actually paid out. Control will continue.

  However, in this embodiment, when the reception confirmation signal is turned on, that is, when the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the payout command signal and transmits the reception confirmation signal, Since the subtraction process is executed, the above fraud can be prevented.

  The game control means and the payout control means perform two-way communication with respect to the prize ball payout control, and the game control means stores the prize game medium number storage means in response to receiving a signal corresponding to the reception confirmation signal. A gaming machine that performs a subtraction process for subtracting a value corresponding to the number of payouts specified by a payout command signal from the prize game medium number data that has been made is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-65676).

  FIG. 177 is a timing chart showing how to output the payout control signal described in JP-A-2004-65676. As shown in FIG. 177, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-65676, the game control means has been turned off after the BUSY signal corresponding to the reception confirmation signal is turned on. Accordingly, a subtraction process is performed to subtract a value corresponding to the payout number designated by the payout command signal from the prize game medium number data stored in the prize game medium number storage means.

  However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-65676, the game control means performs a payout command signal until the payout control means completes the designated number of prize balls even after performing the subtraction process. (In particular, the payout REQ signal) is kept on. Then, when the power supply is restored after the power is cut off in the state where the on-state of the payout command signal is maintained (for example, time T shown in FIG. 177), the game control means, when the control state is stored The payout command signal is turned on again by the recovery process. In that case, the payout control means restarts the prize ball payout process from the beginning (for example, the first one when receiving 15 prize ball payout instructions). If it is paid out as a prize ball, double payout will be made. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the subtraction process is performed, the payout command signal is turned off, that is, since the payout command signal is turned off earlier, duplicate payout is performed and excessive payout balls are paid out. The possibility of being done is reduced.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the abnormal winning notification process in step S23. In the abnormal winning notification process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not an abnormal notification prohibition flag is set (step S451). The abnormality notification prohibition flag is set in the main process that is executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started (see step S44 in FIG. 138). If the abnormality notification prohibition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S455. When the abnormality notification prohibition flag is set, the value of the prohibition period timer set in step S45 is decremented by 1 (step S452). When the value of the prohibition period timer becomes 0, that is, when the prohibition period timer times out, the abnormality notification prohibition flag is reset (steps S453 and S454).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S455). When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (Y in step S455), the game is in a big hit game. If it is in such a state, there is a possibility that a game ball will win the big prize opening, so the process proceeds to the process of step S261 without performing the process of confirming the abnormal winning to the big prize opening.

  The state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 is a state where no big hit game is played. In this state, if there is a game ball winning at the big winning opening, it can be determined that the winning is an abnormal winning. Therefore, an abnormal winning confirmation process for the special winning opening shown below is performed.

  That is, if the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S456). Then, the CPU 56 calculates the logical product of the contents of the loaded switch-on buffer and the count switch input bit determination value (01 (H), see FIG. 168) (step S457). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 01 (H), that is, when the count switch 23 is on, the logical product operation result is 01 (H). When the count switch 23 is not turned on, the operation result of the logical product is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the result of the logical product is not 0, it is determined that an abnormal winning at the special winning opening has occurred, and control is performed to transmit an abnormal winning notification 2 designation command to the effect control board 80 (steps S458A and S459). If the logical product operation result is 0, it is determined that no abnormal winning in the big winning opening has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S461.

  In step S461, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 or more (step S461). The state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 or more is a state where the normal electric accessory (start winning device 15) is opened and closed. In such a state, since there is a possibility that a game ball will win the second start opening 15b, the abnormal winning notification process is terminated without performing the process of confirming the abnormal winning to the second start opening 15b.

  A state in which the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 or more (a state of less than 3) is a state in which the normal electric accessory (start winning device 15) is not opened or closed. If there is a game ball winning in the second starting port 15b in such a state, it can be determined that the winning is an abnormal winning. Therefore, the confirmation process of the abnormal winning to the 2nd starting opening 15b shown below is performed. Note that it may be determined whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is 4 in the process of step S461. In that case, since the determination result is “Y” only in the open state in the opening / closing operation, it is possible to determine more precisely whether or not the start winning device 15 is in the closed state.

  That is, if the value of the normal symbol process flag is less than 3, the CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S462). Then, the CPU 56 calculates the logical product of the content of the loaded switch-on buffer and the second start port switch input bit determination value (80 (H), see FIG. 168) (step S463). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 80 (H), that is, when the second start port switch 14a is on, the logical product operation result is 80 (H). When the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 0 (00 (H)).

  When the result of the logical product is not 0, a game ball wins the second start port 15b even though the second start port 15b is in a state other than the open state (including the state of a predetermined interval period). This is the case. In this case, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the winning cumulative number counter (step S464A), and checks whether or not the value of the winning cumulative number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 in this example) ( Step S464B). If the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred to the second start port 15b, sets an abnormal winning notification flag (step S464C), and displays the abnormal winning notification 1 on the effect control board 80. Control to transmit the specified command is performed (step S465). If the result of the logical product is 0 (Y in step S464), or if the value of the winning cumulative number counter is not equal to or greater than a predetermined value, it is determined that no abnormal winning has occurred in the second start port 15b. Then, the abnormal winning notification process is terminated without performing control for transmitting the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command.

  When the count switch 23 is turned on in the state where the big hit game is not performed by the processing as described above, an abnormal winning notification 2 designation command is transmitted. The abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is also transmitted when the second start port switch 14a is turned on when the start winning device 15 is not opened or closed (the second start port 15b is in a state other than the open state). . In this embodiment, when the value of the winning cumulative number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 in this example), the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred at the second start port 15b, but step S464 is performed. When the determination process is “N”, it may be immediately determined that an abnormal winning to the second start port 15b has occurred.

  In addition, the process of steps S451 to S453 prohibits the start of abnormality notification when the effect control microcomputer 110 is performing initialization notification. The effect control microcomputer 110 continues to execute the initialization notification until the period corresponding to the prohibition period has elapsed since the start of the abnormality notification.

  In the process of step S455, the CPU 56 determines whether or not an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag. Therefore, since it can be determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data, the determination process can be simplified. Further, as described above, since the big hit ending process is executed for a predetermined time after the specific variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed, the game ball that has won the big winning opening immediately before the specific variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed is specially selected. After the value of the symbol process flag has returned to 0, it is prevented from being detected by the count switch 23, and an error is not notified even though it is a regular winning.

  Further, in the process of step S461, the CPU 56 determines whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred at the second start port 15b based on the value of the normal symbol process flag. Therefore, since it can be determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data, the determination process can be simplified. Further, as described above, as a method of delaying the timing for determining an abnormal winning from the timing for closing the start winning device 15, the start winning device 15 is closed a predetermined time before the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 4 to 0. However, when an abnormal winning determination is made when the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 4 to 0, the game ball won in the second starting port 15b immediately before the starting winning device 15 is closed. The normal symbol process flag value is prevented from being detected by the second start port switch 14a after the value has returned to 0, and no error is reported in spite of the regular winning. .

  Further, in this embodiment, when a winning occurs, the winning notification lamp 363 mounted on the main board 31 is lit for a predetermined period, so when an impersonating board is installed. Even if a winning occurs, the winning notification lamp 363 can be prevented from being turned on, and it is possible to easily find out that the impersonation board is installed. Furthermore, when the winning notification lamp 363 is wired so that the detection signal of the winning detection switch (for example, the start opening switch 14a) is input not only to the spoofing board but also to the regular main board 31 so that the winning notification lamp 363 does not light up. Even so, since communication between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is not performed, the total number of unpaid prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer managed by the main board 31 is subtracted. The total number of unpaid prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined abnormality determination number, and it is possible to easily find out that a spoofed board is installed. In the present invention, a signal according to the game progress is recognized by the game control microcomputer 560. Therefore, the present invention is not limited to the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a. The winning notification lamp 363 may be turned on for a predetermined period by a detection signal from the gate switch 32a, the count switch 23, the winning opening switch 29a, 30a, or the like.

  The unpaid excess LED 362 mounted on the main board 31 is housed in a board box (see FIG. 136) sealed by a fixing means that cannot be opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the unpaid excess LED 362 from being driven by a signal from the unauthorized board.

  Next, the operation of the payout control means (the payout control microcomputer 370 and the I / O port) will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the payout control microcomputer 370 in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine and the reset signal to the payout control microcomputer 370 becoming high level. . In the main process, the payout control microcomputer 370 first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control microcomputer 370 first sets the interruption prohibition (step S721). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S722), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S723). Further, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets (initializes) the built-in device register (step S724), and sets (initializes) the CTC and PIO (step S725), and then can access the RAM. The state is set (step S726).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Therefore, in the built-in device register setting process in step S724 and the process in step S725, register setting for setting the channel to be used to timer mode, register setting for permitting interrupt generation, and setting an interrupt vector. The register is set. The interrupt by the channel is used as a timer interrupt. For example, when it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register).

  The interrupt vector set for the channel set to the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interruption process, a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including at least a process of driving the ball payout device 97 in response to a command signal related to award ball payout from the main board, and in response to a ball lending request, A process for driving the program may be included.

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 370. Therefore, an interrupt process based on counting up the built-in CTC can be used. Also, an interrupt processing start address can be set according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC.

  The interrupt based on CTC channel 3 (CH3) count-up is an interrupt that occurs when the CPU internal clock (system clock) counts down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt. . Specifically, a clock obtained by dividing the operation clock of the payout control CPU 371 is supplied to the CTC, the register value is subtracted by the input of the clock, and when the register value becomes 0, a timer interrupt occurs. For example, the register value of CH3 is subtracted at 1/256 period of the system clock. Since the subtraction is performed based on the divided clock, the initial value of the register does not increase.

  Next, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs a RAM clear process (step S727). Also, initial values are set in the flags and counters of the RAM area (step S728). The processing in step S728 includes processing for setting a prize ball unpaid number counter initial value (for example, 0) in the prize ball unpaid number counter and processing for turning on a connection confirmation signal (specifically, RAM The process of setting bit 4 of the output port 1 buffer formed in the The contents of the output port buffer are reflected in the output of the output port when the output process in step S760 described later is first executed. The main process is started in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine, and when the output process in the payout control process is executed for the first time, a connection confirmation signal is output to the output port (turns on) Therefore, the connection confirmation signal is turned on when power supply to the gaming machine is started and the payout process can be executed.

  Then, the CTC register provided in the payout control microcomputer 370 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated (step S729). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt generation interval is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since interruption is prohibited in step S721 of the initial setting process, interruption is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S730). Thereafter, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of a timer interrupt is entered.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the loop process in the main process, when it is detected that the timer interrupt flag is set, the payout control process in step S750 and subsequent steps is executed.

  In step S750 shown in FIG. 180, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs excitation pattern output processing for the firing motor 94 (output of the patterns of the firing motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0). In the firing motor control process in step S752, the excitation pattern is stored in the excitation pattern buffer that is the RAM area. In step S750, the payout control microcomputer 370 stores the contents of the excitation pattern buffer in the lower 4 bits of the output port 0. Process to output to.

  Next, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs an input determination process (step S751). The input determination process includes a process of checking the status of the detection signals of the payout number count switch 301 and the error release switch 375. Specifically, switch timers (payout number count switch timer, error release switch timer) corresponding to each of them are formed in the RAM, and when it is detected in the switch check process that they are on, the corresponding switch timer The value of the switch timer is incremented by one, and when it is detected that the switch is off, the corresponding switch timer value is cleared.

  Next, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes a firing motor control process (step S752). In the firing motor control process, the patterns of the firing motors φ1 to φ4 are stored in the excitation pattern buffer. When the firing motor 94 should be disabled, the patterns of the firing motors φ1 to φ4 that do not rotate the firing motor 94 are stored in the excitation pattern buffer. Also, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes a payout motor control process (step S753). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the patterns of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 50 (step S754). Next, main control communication processing for communicating with the CPU 56 is executed (step S755). Furthermore, a control for paying out a ball in accordance with a ball rental request from the card unit 50 and a control for paying out a ball for controlling the payout of the number of prize balls indicated by the number-of-payout signal from the main board are performed. It executes (step S756).

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S757). Further, an information output process for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S758). Further, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 374 according to the result of the error processing, and a display control process for lighting the prize ball LED 51 and the ball out LED 52 is executed (step S759). In the display control process, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs control for lighting the prize ball LED 51 when the payout operation in-progress signal is on. Further, when the payout operation in-progress signal is turned off, control for turning off the prize ball LED 51 is performed.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents of the output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). However, since the lower 4 bits (fire motors φ1 to φ4) of output port 0 are executed in step S750, the output of the lower 4 bits of output port 0 is not performed in the output process. The output port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are a payout motor control process (step S753), a prepaid card control process (step S754), a main control communication process (step S755), and an information output process (step S758). And updated in the display control process (step S759).

  FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the dispensing motor control process in step S753. In the payout motor control process, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes any one of steps S1521 to S1526 according to the value of the payout motor control code.

  In the payout motor normal process (step S1521) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 0, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets the pointer to the head address of the table stored in the ROM. The payout motor normal process setting table stores a payout motor excitation pattern table in which data of excitation patterns (payout motors φ1 to φ4) of each step for rotating the payout motor 289 at the time of ball payout is sequentially set. Yes.

  In the payout motor start preparation process (step S1522) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 1, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs bits 4 to 4 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0. Processing such as setting the initial value of the excitation pattern to 7 is performed.

  In the payout motor slow-up process (step S1523) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 2, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs the constant speed process in order to smoothly start the payout motor 289. The output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0 by reading the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table at a time interval longer than the time interval and gradually approaching the time interval in the case of constant speed processing. Set to bits 4-7. At the time of reading, the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table at the address pointed to by the pointer are read and the value of the pointer is incremented by one.

  In the payout motor constant speed process (step S1524) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 3, the payout control microcomputer 370 periodically reads the content of the payout motor excitation pattern table and outputs the output port 0. Set to bits 4-7 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state.

  In the payout motor brake process (step S1525) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 4, the payout control microcomputer 370 stops the payout motor 289 more smoothly than in the case of the constant speed process. Bit 4 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0 by reading out the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table at a long interval and gradually away from the time interval in the case of constant speed processing. Set to ~ 7.

  In the ball biting payout motor brake process (step S1526) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 5, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs the payout motor 289 in the case of rotation for releasing the ball biting. In order to smoothly stop the discharge, the payout motor at a longer interval than the rotation of the payout motor 289 for releasing the ball bite and at a time interval gradually moving away from the time interval in the case of constant speed processing. The contents of the excitation pattern table are read and set to bits 4 to 7 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of output port 0.

  FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the main control communication process in step S755. In the main control communication process, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes any one of steps S1531 to S1535 depending on the value of the main control communication control code if the power confirmation signal is on (step S1251). To do.

  If the power supply confirmation signal is off, if the payout number signal indicates 1F (H), the payout operation in-progress signal error bit is set in the error flag (steps S1252 and S1253), and the connection confirmation signal is turned off. Put it in a state. If the payout number signal indicates 1E (H), the reception confirmation signal error bit in the error flag is set (steps S1254 and S1255), and the connection confirmation signal is turned off (step S1258). If the payout quantity signal does not indicate 1F (H) or 1E (H), and if the winning ball payout operation is in progress (step S1256), the payout operation in progress signal error bit in the error flag is set (step S1257). The connection confirmation signal is turned off (step S1258). Whether or not a prize ball payout operation is in progress is determined by whether or not a prize ball in-motion flag formed in the RAM is set. When the connection confirmation signal is turned off in step S1258, the connection confirmation signal output bit (bit 4: see FIG. 170) of the output port 1 buffer formed in the RAM is reset, and in the output process of step S760, By outputting the contents of the output port 1 buffer to port 1, the connection confirmation signal is actually turned off.

  The processing of steps S1252 and S1253 corresponds to the processing of step S287 executed by the CPU 56 (when 1F (H) is used as the prize ball abnormal output value). The processes of steps S1254 and S1255 correspond to the processes of steps S268 and S277 executed by the CPU 56 (when 1E (H) is used as the prize ball abnormality output value). The processing in steps S1256 and S1257 corresponds to the processing in step S296 executed by the CPU 56. In this embodiment, the payout operation signal error bit is set in both steps S1253 and S1257. However, the payout control microcomputer 370 indicates that the payout operation in-progress signal is not turned on. Whether it is determined as a communication error when it is detected (in the case of step S287) or whether it is determined as a communication error when it is detected that the payout operation in-progress signal has not been turned off (in the case of step S296) can be distinguished. The error bit to be set may be changed between S1253 and step S1257.

  FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing a standby process (step S1531) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 0. In the standby process, when the error bit is on, the payout control microcomputer 370 ends the process without executing the subsequent processes (step S1541). In step S1541, if any one of the bits in the error flag is set, it is determined that the error bit is set.

  The payout control microcomputer 370 executes the subsequent processing if the BRDY signal (unit operation signal), which is a signal output by the card unit 50 in response to the operation of the ball lending switch, is on. The process is terminated (step S1542). That the BRDY signal is on means that a ball lending request is generated from the card unit 50 or that a ball lending process is in progress. That is, when a ball lending request is generated or a ball lending process is in progress, communication with the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 does not proceed.

  If the conditions of steps S1541 to S1542 are not satisfied and the power supply confirmation signal is on, the payout control microcomputer 370 checks whether or not the payout REQ signal is on (steps S1543 and S1544). ). If it is in the on state, the award ball number indicated by the payout number signal is set in the award ball unpaid number buffer which is a RAM area for temporarily storing (step S1545), and the reception confirmation signal is turned on. To perform the process (step S1546). Specifically, the bit corresponding to the reception confirmation signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the on state. Further, a value corresponding to a predetermined time (100 ms as an example) for monitoring that the payout REQ signal is turned off is set in the main control communication control timer (step S1547). Then, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 1 (step S1548), and the process ends.

  The payout control microcomputer 370 does not execute the process of step S1546 if the payout number signal indicates 0 as the number of prize balls in step S1545. When the payout REQ signal is turned on, the CPU 56 does not transmit a payout number signal indicating 0 as the number of prize balls, and is in a state where the payout number signal indicates 0 during standby for paying out the prize balls (invalid Command output state), the payout REQ signal is in an on state and the payout number signal is in a state indicating 0. This means that the payout REQ signal is turned on between substrates due to noise or the like. It is thought that it has become. Accordingly, in such a situation, it is preferable that the payout control microcomputer 370 does not turn on the reception confirmation signal by not executing the process of step S1546.

  FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing a payout REQ signal OFF waiting process (step S1532) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 1. In the payout REQ signal OFF waiting process, if the payout REQ signal is in the OFF state (step S1551), the payout control microcomputer 370 receives a prize ball which is a RAM area for temporarily storing the number of prize balls indicated by the payout number signal. The contents of the unpaid-out number buffer are set in the winning ball unpaid-out number counter (step S1552). Further, a process for turning off the reception confirmation signal is performed (step S1553). Specifically, the bit corresponding to the reception confirmation signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the off state. Then, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 2 (step S1554), and the process ends. In response to the execution of the process in step S1553, a prize ball payout process is started in a payout operation start waiting process (see FIG. 189) described later.

  If the payout REQ signal is not in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 370 subtracts 1 from the value of the main control communication control timer (step S1555). If the value of the main control communication control timer is not 0, the process is terminated (step S1556). When the value of the main control communication control timer becomes 0, a payout REQ signal does not turn off even if a predetermined time elapses after the reception confirmation signal is transmitted (turned on), and a communication error occurs. Judge. Then, a process for turning off the reception confirmation signal and the connection confirmation signal is performed (step S1557). Specifically, the bit corresponding to the reception confirmation signal and the connection confirmation signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the OFF state. Further, bit 4 (payout REQ signal error bit) of the error flag is set (step S1558). Then, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 0 (step S1559), and the process ends.

  FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the payout operation start waiting process (step S1533) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 2. In the payout operation start waiting process, the payout control microcomputer 370, when the prize ball operating flag indicating that the prize ball payout process is being performed is turned on (1: set state) (step S1561), Processing for turning on the payout operation in-progress signal is performed (step S1562). Specifically, the bit corresponding to the payout operation in-progress signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the on state. Then, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 3 (step S1563), and the process ends.

  FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing a payout operation in-progress process (step S1534) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 3. In the payout operation process, the payout control microcomputer 370 determines that the number of award balls specified by the payout number signal when the award ball operation flag is off (0: reset state) (step S1571). Assuming that the payout process is completed, a process for turning off the payout operation in-progress signal is performed (step S1572). Specifically, the bit corresponding to the payout operation in-progress signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the OFF state. Further, a value corresponding to a predetermined time (100 ms as an example) for monitoring that the payout number signal is turned off (all 5 bits are 0) is set in the main control communication control timer (step S1573). Then, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 4 (step S1574), and the process ends.

  FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing a payout number signal OFF waiting process (step S1535) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 4. In the payout number signal OFF waiting process, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets the value of the main control communication control code to 0 corresponding to the standby state (step S1582) when the payout number signal is in the OFF state (step S1581). ), The process is terminated. At this time, the communication between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 related to one prize ball payout is normally completed.

  If the payout number signal is not in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 370 subtracts 1 from the value of the main control communication control timer (step S1583). If the value of the main control communication control timer is not 0, the process is terminated (step S1584). When the value of the main control communication control timer becomes 0, the payout number signal does not turn off even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the transmission of the payout operation signal is stopped (turned off). It is determined that a communication error has occurred. Then, a process for turning off the connection confirmation signal is performed (step S1585). Specifically, the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the off state. Also, bit 5 (payout number signal error bit) of the error flag is set (step S1586). Then, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 0 (step S1582), and the process ends.

  FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the winning ball lending control process in step S756. In the winning ball lending control process, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms that the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on (step S1601). The counter value is decremented by 1 (steps S1602 and S1604), and if the ball is not being lent, the value of the unsold prize ball counter is decremented by 1 (steps S1602 and S1603). Thereafter, any one of steps S1610 to S1612 is executed according to the value of the payout control code.

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the payout start waiting process (step S1610) executed when the payout control code is 0. In the payout start waiting process, if the error bit is set, the payout control microcomputer 370 does not execute the subsequent processes (step S1621). The error bit in the error flag includes a main control unconnected error bit. The main control unconnected error is set when the power supply confirmation signal from the main board 31 is turned off when the winning ball is not paid out. Accordingly, the payout control microcomputer 370 starts substantial control on condition that the power supply confirmation signal is turned on after power supply to the gaming machine is started.

  On the other hand, if the BRDY signal is not in the ON state, the process for paying out a prize ball after step S1631 is executed. If the BRDY signal is on and the BRQ signal (ball lending request signal) which is a ball lending request signal is on, the ball lending operation flag is set (steps S1623 and S1624). Then, “25” is set in the unpaid ball lending number counter (step S1625), and “25” is set in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S1626). The BRQ signal is a signal output from the card unit 50 when a predetermined delay time has elapsed from the time when the BRDY signal is output.

  The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S768). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer.

  Thereafter, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets a value (specifically “1”) corresponding to the payout motor start preparation process (step S1522) as the payout motor control code for selecting the process executed in the payout motor control process. ) Is set (step S1627), the value of the payout control code is set to 1 (step S1628), and the process ends.

  In step S1631, the payout control microcomputer 370 checks whether or not the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is zero. If the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is 0, the process is terminated. In the award ball unpaid number counter, in step S1552 in the payout REQ signal OFF waiting process of the main control communication process, that is, when the payout REQ signal from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 is turned off. , A value other than 0 (the number indicated by the payout number signal) is set. If the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is not 0, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is set in the payout motor rotation count buffer (step S1633). Then, a winning ball moving flag is set (step S1635), and the process proceeds to step S1627.

  FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing payout motor stop waiting processing (step S1611) executed when the payout control code is 1. In the payout motor stop waiting process, the payout control microcomputer 370 checks whether or not the payout operation is completed (step S1641). The payout control microcomputer 370 sets a flag to that effect when, for example, the payout motor brake process (step S1525) in the payout motor control process ends, and the payout operation ends by checking the flag in step S1641. It can be confirmed whether or not.

  When the payout operation is completed, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets the payout passing monitoring time in the payout control monitoring timer (step S1642). The payout passing monitoring time is a time that has a margin in the time from when the last payout ball is paid out by the payout motor 289 until it passes through the payout number count switch 301. Then, the value of the payout control code is set to 2 (step S1643), and the process ends.

  191 to 193 are flowcharts showing the payout passing waiting process (step S1612) executed when the value of the payout control code is 2. In the payout passing waiting process, when a prize ball is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is zero. If the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is not 0, and if there is no error state, re-payout operation of game balls corresponding to insufficient payout (the number of game balls indicated by the value of the award ball unpaid number counter) To the upper limit of 2 times. In the re-payout operation, when it is detected by the payout number count switch 301 that the game ball is actually paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally. In this embodiment, when the payout REQ signal is received, the payout motor 289 is rotated so that the number of game balls set in the award ball non-payout number counter is paid out. If the value of the number counter is not 0, the payout has not been completed normally.

  Further, when the ball lending is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the ball lending unpaid-out counter is 0. If the value of the unsold ball counter is not 0, if the error is not in an error state, an attempt is made to re-pay the remaining ball lending (corresponding to the unsold ball counter). In this embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out in one ball lending and payout operation is 25 (fixed value), and the payout motor 289 is rotated so that 25 game balls are paid out. Therefore, when the value of the unpaid ball lending counter is not 0, the payout has not been completed normally.

  In the payout passing waiting process, the payout control microcomputer 370 first checks the value of the payout control timer, and if the value is 0, the process proceeds to step S1653 (step S1650). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0, the value of the payout control timer is decremented by 1 (step S1651). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0 (step S1652), that is, if the payout control timer has not timed out, the process is terminated. Note that the process in step S1650 is a process that takes into consideration the fact that a retry operation for game ball payout, which will be described later, is started. When the process of step S806, which will be described later, is executed, a retry operation is started through a route that moves from step S1650 to S1653.

  If the payout control timer has timed out (step S1652), it is confirmed whether or not a ball lending payout process (ball lending operation) has been executed (step S1653). Whether or not the ball lending operation has been executed is confirmed by whether or not the ball lending operation in progress flag in the payout control state flag formed in the RAM is set. When the ball lending operation is not executed, that is, when the prize ball payout process (prize ball operation) is executed, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the value of the award ball unpaid number counter ( Step S1654). If the value of the award ball unpaid-out counter is 0, it is assumed that the award ball payout processing has been completed normally, and 1 bit during re-payout operation, 2 bits during re-payout operation, The operating flag and the ball lending operating bit are reset (step S1655), the payout control code is set to 0 (step S1656), and the process ends.

  The “payout control state flag” includes a re-payout operation 1 bit indicating whether or not the first re-payout operation is being executed, and a re-payout operation indicating whether or not the second re-payout operation is being executed. A multi-bit configuration including a middle 2 bits, a winning ball operating flag indicating whether or not a winning ball payout operation is being performed, and a ball lending operating bit indicating whether or not a ball lending operation is being performed Flag.

  If the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is not 0, the payout control microcomputer 370 has an error flag for an error not related to communication (here, 1 bit of a payout switch abnormality detection error, an abnormality of the payout switch) On the condition that any one of the detection error 2 bits and the payout case error bit or a plurality of bits) is not set (step S1659), the payout operation is executed. If any one or more of the payout switch abnormality detection error 1 bit, the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 bits and the payout case error bit is set, the re-payout operation is not executed.

  In order to execute re-payout processing (control for performing re-payout operation), the payout control microcomputer 370 first checks whether or not 2 bits are set during re-payout operation (step S1662). If not set, it is confirmed whether or not 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S1663). If 1 bit is not set during the re-payout operation, 1 bit during the re-payout operation is set to execute the first re-payout operation (step S1665), and the award ball unpaid number counter is stored in the payout motor rotation number buffer. Alternatively, the value of the unpaid ball lending number counter is set (step S1666). The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S768). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer. In step S1666, the value of the unpaid ball lending number counter is also handled because step S1666 is also used in the re-payout process in the ball lending payout process. In step S1666, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets the value of the award ball unpaid number counter in the repayment process in the prize ball payout process, and the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter in the repayment process in the ball lending payout process. Set. Thereafter, the payout control code is set to 1 (step S1667), and the process is terminated.

  In step S1663, when it is confirmed that 1 bit during re-payout operation is set, the payout control microcomputer 370 resets 1 bit during re-payout operation to execute the second re-payout (step S1663). S1669), 2 bits are set during re-payout operation (step S1670). Then, control goes to a step S1666.

  If it is confirmed in step S1662 that 2 bits are set during the re-payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 370 does not pay out the game balls for the shortage of payout even if the re-payout process is executed twice. As a result, the payout case error bit in the error flag is set (step S1672). At that time, 2 bits are reset during the re-payout operation (step S1671). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, if the game ball payout shortage is not resolved even after performing the predetermined payout operation (two times in this example) in the repayout process (corrected payout process), the game ball payout operation is defective. The payout count switch non-passing error bit (payout case error bit) is set.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the prize game medium payout control means in the payout control means confirms that the payout of the prize game medium has not been completed based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 as the payout detection means. When it is detected, the control is performed so that the payout means pays out the insufficient amount of prize game media up to a predetermined number of times (in this example, twice). In this embodiment, if the prize game medium is not paid out even if the retry operation for paying out the prize game medium is performed twice, the payout case error bit is set and an error is being generated. (Step S1672), the payout case error bit may be set when it is detected for the first time that the payout of the premium game medium is not completed. Note that “retry operation (or“ retry ”,“ retry operation processing ”) means that the actual number of payouts is equal to the number of game balls paid out in spite of execution of a normal payout process. This is an operation to be executed when the number is small, and means an operation for re-executing the payout process (that is, a re-payout operation) in order to pay out unpaid game balls separately from the normal payout process.

  In the prize ball lending control process, the error bit is checked to determine whether or not to perform a payout operation (one prize ball payout or one ball lending). The payout start shown in FIG. Only in the waiting process. In the payout motor stop waiting process shown in FIG. 190 and the payout passing wait process shown in FIG. 191, the error bit is not checked. Note that the error bit is also checked in step S1658 and the like in the payout passing waiting process, but this check is for determining whether or not to perform a re-payout operation. This is not to determine whether or not to start the lending of the ball. Therefore, after the process of step S1626 or S1633 is performed and the game ball payout process is started, the payout process is not interrupted even if an error occurs. In other words, when an error occurs, the game ball payout process is continued until a point at which the game ball can be cut well (at the time when one prize ball payout or one ball lending ends). The error bit in the error flag checked in step S1621 includes an error bit indicating that the power supply confirmation signal from the main board 31 has been turned off. Therefore, even when the power supply confirmation signal is turned off, the game ball payout process is stopped at a time when the turn is good. In addition, one-time prize ball payout or one-time ball rental means that a non-zero value is set in the prize ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter, and the number of unpaid prize balls or the ball lending unpaid It means a game ball payout process until the value of the number counter becomes zero.

  When the power confirmation signal is turned off, similarly to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, if the payout is interrupted and the payout is resumed when recovered from the error state, the data (unpaid game) However, according to the present invention, the payout process is stopped at a time when the payout of the predetermined number of premium game media is completed and the cut-off time is good. Therefore, it is not necessary to manage such data, and the control can be simplified.

  When it is confirmed in step S1653 that the ball lending / dispensing process (ball lending operation) has been executed, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms whether or not the value of the lending / unpaid number counter is 0 (step). S1657). If it is 0, it is determined that the ball lending / dispensing process has been completed normally, and the process proceeds to step S1655.

  If the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter is not 0, an error flag (specifically, any one of a payout switch abnormality detection error 1 bit, a payout switch abnormality detection error 2 bit, and a payout case error bit) On the condition that no bit or a plurality of bits) is set (step S1658), the re-payout process is executed. If the error flag is set, the re-payout process is not executed.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control microcomputer 370 first checks whether or not 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S1676). If not set, it is confirmed whether or not 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S1677). If 1 bit during re-payout operation is not set, 1 bit during re-payout operation is set to execute the first re-payout operation (step S1679), and the process proceeds to step S1666.

  In step S1677, when it is confirmed that 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs a process for executing the re-payout operation again. Specifically, 1 bit is reset during the re-payout operation (step S1681). Then, 2 bits are set during the re-payout operation (step S1865), and the process proceeds to step S1666.

  In step S1676, when it is confirmed that 2 bits during re-payout operation are set, the payout control microcomputer 370 resets 2 bits during re-payout operation (step S1686), and sets the payout case error bit in the error flag. Set (step S1688). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, in the case where the shortage of game balls is not solved even if two re-payout operations are continuously performed in the re-payout processing (corrected payout processing) related to the ball lending processing, As a failure, a payout count switch non-passing error bit (payout case error bit) is set.

  As described above, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines that the total number of unpaid award balls stored in the total award ball number storage buffer exceeds a predetermined abnormality determination number, the unpaid excess LED 362 is set. Since it is configured to be lit to notify the occurrence of an abnormality, the communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 is communicated with the microcomputer mounted on the unauthorized board by the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality by the unpaid excess LED 362. In this case, it is possible to notify that the illegal board is being executed.

  In this embodiment, when a winning occurs, the winning notification lamp 363 mounted on the main board 31 is lit for a predetermined period. Therefore, when a spoofing board is installed, the winning is not received. Even if it occurs, the winning notification lamp 363 can be prevented from being turned on, and it is possible to easily find out that the impersonation board is installed. Furthermore, when the winning notification lamp 363 is wired so that the detection signal of the winning detection switch (for example, the start opening switch 14a) is input not only to the spoofing board but also to the regular main board 31 so that the winning notification lamp 363 does not light up. Even so, since communication between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is not performed, the total number of unpaid prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer managed by the main board 31 is subtracted. The total number of unpaid prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined abnormality determination number, and it is possible to easily find out that a spoofed board is installed. In the present invention, since the signal by the game progress is recognized on the main board 31, not only the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a, for example, other winning detection The winning notification lamp 363 may be turned on for a predetermined period by a detection signal from the switches (gate switch 32a, count switch 23, winning port switches 29a, 30a, etc.).

  The unpaid excess LED 362 mounted on the main board 31 is housed in a board box (see FIG. 136) sealed by a fixing means that cannot be opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the unpaid excess LED 362 from being driven by a signal from the unauthorized board.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described.
FIG. 194 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 110 (specifically, effect control CPU 111) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 110 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). .

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 110 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the production control microcomputer 110 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control microcomputer 110 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 110 first analyzes the received effect control command, and executes a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control microcomputer 110 executes effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed. In addition, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol) is executed (step S706). Furthermore, notification control processing for performing notification using an effect device such as the effect display device 9 is executed (step S708). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer in the form of a ring buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 152) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  196 and 197 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 111 checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 111 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S1711). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 111 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S1712). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S1713). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S1714), the effect control CPU 111 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S1715). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S1716).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S1717), the effect control CPU 111 stores the display result specifying command in a display result specifying command storage area formed in the RAM (step S1718). . Then, a display result specifying command reception flag is set (step S1719).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S1721), the effect control CPU 111 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S1722).

  If the received effect control command is one of the jackpot start 1-2 designation commands (step S1723), the effect control CPU 111 sets the jackpot start 1-4 designation command reception flag (step S1724).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command indicating an authentication signal (board ID) (step S1725), the effect control CPU 111 stores the board ID indicated by the command and the ROM or RAM in the effect control microcomputer 110. Collation processing is performed by collating the stored board ID of the main board 31 to determine whether or not they match (step S1726). And a collation result is alert | reported by performing predetermined display on the production | presentation display apparatus 9 (step S1727).

  If it is determined that the board ID received by the matching process matches the stored board ID, the effect control CPU 111 displays, for example, “match OK” to the effect display device 9 in the process of step S1727. indicate.

  If it is determined that the board ID received by the matching process and the stored board ID do not match, the effect control CPU 111 displays, for example, “matching NG” in the process of step S1727. 9 is displayed.

  If the collation result is not collation OK, the production control CPU 111 controls the operation to be stopped (steps S1728 and S1729). Note that the operation stop state means a state in which substantial control for effect control is stopped, such as a system reset state or a state where the effect control process is not executed.

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S1731), the effect control CPU 111 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S1732A). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols. In addition, an initial notification flag is set (step S1732B), and a value corresponding to the initial notification period value is set in the period timer (step S1732C). The initial notification period is a period in which initialization notification is performed in response to reception of the initialization designation command. The effect control CPU 111 ends the initialization notification when the initial notification period elapses. The initial notification period is the same as the prohibition period set by the game control microcomputer 560 in step S45. Therefore, the abnormality notification designation command is not received when the initialization notification is performed.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S1733), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S1734).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command (step S1741), the effect control CPU 111 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag (step S1742). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S1743), the effect control CPU 111 sets a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (step S1744).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command (step S1745), the effect control CPU 111 sets an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command reception flag (step S1746).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal winning notification 2 designation command (step S1747), the effect control CPU 111 sets an abnormal winning notification 2 designation command reception flag (step S1748).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 111 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S1749). Then, control goes to a step S1711.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the board ID to the verification machine 365 via the verification terminal 364, and transmits the board ID to the presentation control microcomputer. The microcomputer determines whether or not to authenticate the main board 31 based on the board ID. When it is determined that the main board 31 is not authenticated, the microcomputer notifies that the main board 31 is not authenticated and controls to stop the operation. For example, a game store clerk is allowed to transmit a board ID to the production control microcomputer (for example, power-on again, game ball to start winning port (start port)), It can be easily found that an illegal circuit board is installed. That is, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a function of mutually monitoring the ID of the game control microcomputer 560 and the IDs of microcomputers on other boards. If the microcomputer on the other board cannot receive the regular ID of the game control microcomputer 560, the spoofing board may be performing the game control process in place of the main board 31. In this embodiment, a microcomputer on another substrate (in this example, a production control microcomputer) detects the presence of a spoofed substrate.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer determines whether or not to authenticate the main board 31 in response to receiving the board ID, but when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When the board ID is not received from the game control microcomputer 560 within a predetermined period from the first, a judgment is made that the verification is NG, and a notification that the main board 31 is not authenticated or a control for stopping the operation is performed. Good. In this case, the effect control microcomputer notifies the effect display device 9 that the main board 31 is not authenticated until the board ID is received after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, “verification NG” May be displayed). Specifically, for example, the display of “collation NG” is started in the process of step S1727, and when it is determined as “collation OK” in step S1728, the authenticated flag is set and the display of “collation NG” is displayed. It is sufficient to display the “verification OK” for a predetermined period. The authenticated flag is reset when power supply to the gaming machine is started or when power supply is stopped. Also, in this case, the production control microcomputer controls the operation stop state until the board ID is received after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (except for the process for receiving the board ID). For example, it may be configured such that reception confirmation of the board ID is performed before starting the effect control process, and the effect control process is controlled not to be started). That is, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits the board ID to the presentation control microcomputer, and the presentation control microcomputer receives the board ID. Until now, it may be configured to perform at least one of notification that the game control board is not authenticated and control of the operation stop state. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not an unauthorized circuit board is installed every time power supply to the gaming machine is started.

  Note that any method of communicating the board ID from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 may be used. For example, the main board 31 and the effect control board 80 may be synchronized to transmit and receive the board ID. May be.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the main board 31 is not authenticated based on the board ID, a notification that the main board 31 is not authenticated is given, and a control for stopping the operation is performed. However, either the notification that the main board 31 is not authenticated or the control for stopping the operation may be performed.

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 111 performs one of steps S800 to S806 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the notice selection process (step S800A).

  Preliminary selection process (step S800A): In the effect display device 9, it is determined whether or not to execute the preliminary effect process for notifying the player of the occurrence of the big hit, and when it is determined to execute the preliminary effect process. Determines the notice type. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern, and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Upon receiving an effect control command (design determination command) for instructing stop of all symbols, control is performed to stop the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805).

  Big hit game processing (step S805): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when receiving an effect control command for display before opening the big winning opening or display when opening the special winning opening, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S806).

  Big hit end processing (step S806): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 199 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a notification screen displayed on the effect display device 9. FIG. 199 (A) shows an example of an initial screen that the effect control microcomputer 110 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the initialization designation command. FIG. 199 (B) shows an example of a power failure recovery screen that the effect control microcomputer 110 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the power failure recovery designation command. In FIG. 199 (C), the abnormality notification displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the reception of the abnormal winning notification designation command (abnormal winning notification 1 designation command or abnormal winning notification 2 designation command) by the production control microcomputer 110. An example of the screen is shown, and it is shown that the display of the abnormality notification screen is continued even when the change of the production symbol is started (see the right side of FIG. 199 (C)).

  FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the notification control process in step S708. In the notification control process, the effect control CPU 111 checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (step S1001). The initial notification flag is set when a power-on designation designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 (see step S1732B in FIG. 197). If the initial notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1006. If the initial notification flag is set, the value of the period timer set in step S1732C is decremented by 1 (step S1002). Then, when the value of the period timer becomes 0, that is, when the initial notification period has elapsed, the initial notification flag is reset (steps S1003 and S1004).

  Further, the effect control CPU 111 outputs a command for deleting the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen in the effect display device 9 to the VDP 109 (step S1005). The VDP 109 deletes the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen from the effect display device 9 according to the command.

  In step S1006, the effect control CPU 111 checks whether or not the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command reception flag indicating that the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1008. If the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command reception flag is set, the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command reception flag is reset (step S1007), and the process proceeds to step S1012. That is, the fact that the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command has been received is a case where an abnormal winning to the big winning opening is detected. In this case, an abnormal winning notification based only on sound output is performed by executing step S1012 described later. Is executed.

  In step S1008, the effect control CPU 111 checks whether or not the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command reception flag indicating that the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command has been received is set. If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. If the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command reception flag is set, the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command reception flag is reset (step S1009), and the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is incremented by 1 (step S1010). The abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is a counter for counting the number of times of receiving the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command.

  Next, the production control CPU 111 checks whether or not the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is 1 (that is, whether or not the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command has been received only once) (step S1011). If the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is 1, the effect control CPU 111 outputs sound data indicating the sound output corresponding to the abnormal winning notification to the audio output board 70 (step S1012). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of abnormal notification sound) corresponding to the notification of abnormal winning is performed thereafter. Then, the effect control CPU 111 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S1019).

  If the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 111 determines whether the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is 2 (that is, whether the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command has been received twice). (No) is confirmed (step S1013). If the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is 2, the effect control CPU 111 outputs sound data indicating the sound output corresponding to the abnormal winning notification to the audio output board 70 (step S1014). Further, the effect control CPU 111 outputs lamp control execution data indicating lamp display corresponding to the abnormal winning notification to the LED driver board 35 (step S1015). Therefore, thereafter, lamp display and sound output (output of abnormal notification sound) according to the notification of abnormal winning is performed. Then, the effect control CPU 111 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S1019).

  If the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is not 2 (that is, if the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is 3 or more (if the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received three or more times)) The control CPU 111 outputs sound data indicating the sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1016). In addition, the effect control CPU 111 outputs lamp control execution data indicating lamp display according to the abnormal winning notification to the LED driver board 35 (step S1017). Further, the effect control CPU 111 outputs to the VDP 109 a command to superimpose and display the abnormality notification screen on the screen displayed at that time in the effect display device 9 (step S1018). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 in response to the command (see FIG. 150C). Therefore, after that, lamp display and sound output (output of the abnormal notification sound) according to the notification of the abnormal winning is performed, and the abnormality display screen is superimposed on the effect display device 9. Then, the effect control CPU 111 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S1019).

  By executing the above processing, the effect control CPU 111 executes the abnormal winning notification based on the reception of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command or the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command. The production control CPU 111 receives the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is further received after starting the abnormal winning notification based on the reception of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command. The notification mode of the abnormal winning notification is switched according to the number of times. That is, in this embodiment, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received only once, the abnormal winning notification is executed using only the sound output. When the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received twice, the abnormal winning notification is executed using the lamp display in addition to the sound output. Further, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received three times or more, in addition to the lamp display and sound output, the abnormal winning notification is executed by superimposing the abnormal notification screen.

  It should be noted that the notification mode of the abnormal prize notification shown in this embodiment is merely an example, for example, by changing the abnormality notification sound to be output or changing the display pattern (for example, lighting or blinking) of the lamp. The notification mode of the winning notification may be switched. In addition, as shown in FIG. 199, the effect control CPU 111 preferably performs control to display an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 when executing an abnormal winning notification using sound output or lamp display. In this embodiment, the case where the notification mode of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is switched according to the number of times of reception of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command has been described. However, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received once, sound output is performed. In addition, the abnormal winning notification may be performed using all of the abnormality notification screen display and lamp display. In this case, when receiving the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command once, the production control CPU 111 controls the output of the abnormal notification sound using the speaker 27 and causes the production display device 9 to superimpose and display the abnormality notification screen. Display control of abnormal display using the LEDs 25, 28a, 28b, 28c is performed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the abnormal winning notification is executed using only the sound output when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received only once is shown. It is not restricted to what was shown in embodiment. For example, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received only once, the abnormality display screen may be displayed superimposed on the effect display device 9, and display control of abnormal display using each LED 25, 28a, 28b, 28c is performed. You may go. Further, the abnormality notification effect may be performed using any two or all of the abnormality notification screen superimposed display, sound output, or abnormality display using the LEDs 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c.

  FIG. 201 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the situation of the display effect on the effect display device 9 and the sound effect by the speaker 27. FIG. 201 (A) shows an example when the effect display device 9 is performing variable display of effect symbols. FIG. 201 (B) shows an example in which initialization notification is performed in the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 201 (C) shows an example in which an abnormality notification is performed in the effect display device 9 and an abnormality notification sound is output by the speaker 27. When receiving the abnormal prize notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 110 performs control to display an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and outputs the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27. I do. Further, even when the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued. Further, even when the variable display of the effect symbol is finished, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued. Note that the production control microcomputer 110 does not execute the control for deleting the abnormality notification screen and the control for stopping the output of the abnormality notification sound, so the display of the abnormality notification screen on the production display device 9 and the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are not performed. The output continues until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. However, the production control microcomputer 110 stops the display of the abnormality notification screen and the output of the abnormality notification sound when a predetermined time elapses after the display of the abnormality notification screen and the output of the abnormality notification sound is started. You may control.

  Further, in this embodiment, the abnormality notification is performed by the effect display device 9 and the speaker 27, but the abnormality notification may be performed using a lamp / LED. In that case, when receiving the abnormal winning notification designation command, the production control microcomputer 110 controls the lamp / LED to blink in a manner different from that in the normal state (when no abnormal winning has occurred). .

  Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 does not detect abnormal winnings for a predetermined period (a period during which the initialization notification is executed) after the power supply to the game machine is started, and does not perform game control. The abnormal winning notification designation command is not transmitted from the microcomputer 560. However, the game control microcomputer 560 does not have a special symbol process flag value less than a predetermined value (5 in this embodiment) or a normal symbol process flag value other than a predetermined value (3 in this embodiment). At this time, the abnormal winning detection is always detected, and the production control microcomputer 110 executes an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command or an abnormal winning notification 2 designation command during a predetermined period after the power supply to the gaming machine is started. If received, the abnormal winning notification may not be performed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the initialization notification is given priority over the abnormality notification, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization notification becomes difficult to recognize. That is, the initialization notification is performed prominently. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits an initialization designation command when a user reset that causes the program to start executing from the top address (for example, address 0000) occurs even when power supply to the game machine is started. As a cause of the occurrence of the user reset, for example, in the case where the watchdog timer is configured to be used, there is a case where the watchdog timer has timed out due to an illegal act that prevents the smooth progress of the program. Such fraudulent acts are configured to be controlled in a probabilistic state, particularly when a predetermined jackpot symbol (predetermined probability variation jackpot symbol or sudden probability variation jackpot symbol) is determined based on a random number for determining the jackpot symbol. It is likely to occur when it is. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is initialized, and a counter for generating a jackpot symbol determining random number is initialized, and it is easy to receive an illegal act that makes it easy to grasp the count value of the counter. By making the initialization notice conspicuous as in this embodiment, it is possible to easily grasp from the outside of the gaming machine that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has been initialized. Is easily recognized.

  In this embodiment, the production control CPU 111 ends the initialization notification when a predetermined period has elapsed (see steps S1001 to S1005), but may terminate the initialization notification at another timing. . For example, the initialization notification is terminated when the variable display of the effect symbol is started for the first time after the initialization notification is started, or the abnormal winning notification designation command is received before the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Sometimes the initialization notification may be terminated. Alternatively, the initialization notification may be terminated when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received or when the first effect control command other than the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received after the initialization notification is started. That is, it is preferable that the initialization notification is continued only for a period sufficient for the game store clerk or the like to recognize the initialization notification.

  In this embodiment, the abnormal winning notification of the same content is performed both when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening occurs and when an abnormal winning at the second start opening 15b occurs. May be performed. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 110 executes different abnormal winning notifications depending on the type of the abnormal winning notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. For example, different notification sounds are sounded when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening occurs and when an abnormal winning at the second starting opening 15b occurs. Or, when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening occurs, the abnormal notification is made with a loud sound.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even when it is detected that an abnormal winning has occurred at the second start port 15b, the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 or the variation of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 It was configured to run continuously. Accordingly, when the game ball is illegally awarded to the second start opening 15b (for example, the start winning device 15 is illegally opened even though the normal symbol is not hit and the game ball is inserted to the second start opening 15b. Even in the case of winning a prize), it is possible that a big hit will occur based on the starting prize and that a ball will be illegally obtained. Therefore, when it is detected that an abnormal winning at the second starting port 15b has occurred, the special symbol may be stopped at a predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, control for prohibiting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display 8 and the variation of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 is executed based on the detection of the abnormal winning at the second start port 15b. Therefore, in the case of winning a prize for the second start opening 15b due to an illegal act (for example, the normal winning symbol 15 is not hit and the start winning apparatus 15 is opened to release the game ball to the second start opening 15b. Even in the case of winning a prize), it is possible to reliably prevent the occurrence of a big hit based on the winning.

  In the above embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the LED driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 110. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 96). The sound output lamp 70, the LED driver board 35, or the like, or a sound / lamp board having a function by a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function by a circuit mounted on the LED driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 110 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the LED driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. 110 may be transmitted. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 110 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment, as well as the audio output board 70, the LED driver. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  FIG. 202 is a block diagram showing still another configuration example of the main board. The configuration of the main board shown in FIG. 202 is the same as that of the main board shown in FIG. 96 except that the interrupt button 361 is not provided.

  FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing a part of main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board shown in FIG. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, The main processing after S1 is started.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 outputs an authentication signal (board ID uniquely given to the main board 31) to the verification terminal 364 in the main process (step S81), and sends the authentication signal to the effect control board 80. It transmits to (step S82). The other processes are the same as those shown in FIG.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 verifies the verification machine 365 on the condition that a winning detection signal is input from the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a. The board ID is transmitted via the terminal 364, and the production control microcomputer determines whether or not to authenticate the main board 31 based on the board ID. When it is determined not to authenticate, the main board 31 is not authenticated. Since the control is performed so that the operation is stopped, it is possible to easily find out that the unauthorized circuit board is installed. That is, when a game ball is won at the first start port 15a or the second start port 15b, if a verification NG is displayed, a game clerk or the like is made aware that there is a possibility that some kind of fraud has been done. If neither verification OK nor verification NG is displayed, the verification process based on the substrate ID by the production control microcomputer is not executed (from the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a). The winning detection signal is input to the spoofing board and not input to the main board 31), so that a game shop clerk can recognize that an illegal circuit board is installed. Therefore, it can be easily found that the illegal circuit board is installed. Here, in the case where an illegal circuit board is installed, the display is not performed when the verification OK is supposed to be displayed, so that the verification OK is not displayed. This corresponds to notification that 31 is not authenticated.

  As a countermeasure when a winning detection signal from the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is input to the spoofing board and the main board 31, for example, display processing by an effect control microcomputer is performed during the matching process. Stop it. In this way, when the unauthorized circuit board is installed, variable display on the effect display device 9 is started before the result of the verification process based on the occurrence of the start winning is displayed. For this reason, even if a winning detection signal from the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is input to the spoofing board and the main board 31, it is easy to find that an illegal circuit board is installed. Can do.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 verifies the collation machine 365 on the condition that a winning detection signal is input from the start port switch 14a or the second start port switch 14a. Although the board ID is transmitted via the terminal 364, the board ID may be transmitted on condition that a winning detection signal is input from another winning detection switch.

  In each of the above embodiments, the game store clerk or the like can check the connection state between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80 by notifying the presence / absence of the board ID and the collation result.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them is provided, and variable display starts after a predetermined variable display execution condition is satisfied. A game in which the variable display means starts variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the condition, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result, the game shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player Although a machine (hereinafter referred to as model A) is illustrated, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to such a gaming machine, and has no “variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information”. It can also be applied to. In other words, the variable winning device is released a predetermined number of times by winning in a predetermined start winning area, and when the game medium that has won the variable winning apparatus through the opening passes through the specific area (V area), it enters a specific gaming state (big hit state). The present invention can also be applied to a controlled gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as model B).

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a mixed type model of model A and model B. In other words, variable display means is provided that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them. After a predetermined variable display execution condition is satisfied, variable display is performed based on the satisfaction of the variable display start condition. The variable display of the identification information is started by the means, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the control to shift to the specific gaming state advantageous to the player, and the variable display of the identification information When the display result becomes a predetermined display result (small hit) different from the specific display result, the variable winning device is released a predetermined number of times, and the game media that has won the variable winning device by the release has a specific region (V region). It may be a gaming machine that executes a control that shifts to a specific gaming state (big hit state) by passing through.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the control command from the main board 31 is input to the effect control board 80, and the control command is input to the LED driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 via the effect control board 80. However, other substrate configurations may be used. For example, the effect control board 80, the LED driver board 35, and the audio output board 70 may be configured by a single board. Further, for example, a control command from the main board 31 is input to the LED driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, and a control command is input to the effect control board 80 via the LED driver board 35 or the audio output board 70. It may be configured. Further, the LED driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may be boards on which a microcomputer is mounted.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the description has been made assuming that the “spoofed” illegal circuit board is found in the main board 31, but the present invention is applicable to those in which the “spoofed” illegal circuit board is found in the payout control board 37. Is also possible.

  204 to 207 are block diagrams illustrating other examples of the substrate configuration, respectively. 204 to 207 show only the main board 31 and the boards related to the effect control. Further, in FIGS. 204 to 207, ◯ indicates an installation location of the board-side connector, and particularly indicates a location where a structure that cannot be removed once the harness-side connector is inserted is employed. However, such a structure may be adopted only in a part of all the portions indicated by ◯.

  An effect control board 80A shown in FIG. 204 is a board on which circuits that realize all the functions of the circuits mounted on the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the LED driver board 35 shown in FIG. 114 are mounted. is there. 204 shows an example in which the effect control board 80A receives power supply from the main board 31; however, the effect control board 80A may receive power supply from the power supply board 910. In addition, a relay board may be provided between the effect control board 80A and the main board 31. When the relay board is provided, the installation positions of the two connectors of the relay board (the connector of the cable connected to the main board 31 and the connector of the cable connected to the effect control board 80A) are also indicated by ◯. It becomes a place.

  A sound / LED board 80B shown in FIG. 205 is a board on which a circuit that realizes all the functions of the circuits mounted on the audio output board 70 and the LED driver board 35 shown in FIG. 114 is mounted. The symbol control board 80C is a board on which a circuit that realizes all the functions of the circuit mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. 114 is mounted. Note that a relay board may not be provided between the sound / LED board 80 </ b> B and the main board 31.

  A sound / symbol control board 80D shown in FIG. 206 is a board on which a circuit that realizes all the functions of the circuits mounted on the audio output board 70 and the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. 114 is mounted. Note that a relay board may not be provided between the sound / LED board 80 </ b> B and the main board 31.

  An LED / design control board 80E shown in FIG. 207 is a board on which a circuit that realizes all the functions of the circuits mounted on the LED driver board 35 and the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. 114 is mounted. Note that a relay board may not be provided between the sound / LED board 80 </ b> B and the main board 31.

  In addition, even if the substrate configuration for controlling the electrical components for production such as the variable display device 9, the light emitter, and the speaker 27 is a configuration other than the substrate configurations illustrated in FIGS. (Means for preventing the harness-side connector inserted into the board-side connector from being pulled out) are the connector installation positions on the other boards that are directly electrically connected to the main board 31 with cables (the main board 31 and other boards). It is preferably applied in both of the substrates), but another substrate (referred to as substrate B) connected to the main substrate 31 (referred to as substrate A) and still another substrate connected to the substrate B. It is more preferable to apply also at the connector installation position (the installation position of the connector to which the cable connecting the boards B and C is connected) in both of them (referred to as the board C).

  As shown in FIG. 208, the design board 411, the first start port switch 13a (or the board on which the first start port switch 13a is mounted), and the second start port switch 14a (or the second start port switch 14a). May be stored in a single storage case that can be in a sealed state. The storage case is configured similarly to the substrate storage case 200, for example. The special symbol display 8 may also be stored in the storage case. The first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are arranged in the vicinity of the special winning opening (see FIG. 94). In a gaming machine in which the special symbol display 8 is arranged in the vicinity of the grand prize opening, the symbol board 411, the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are all arranged in the vicinity of the big prize port. It is effective to store them in one storage case. The first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a that trigger the lottery to determine whether or not the winning is a big hit is susceptible to fraudulent acts, and puts them in a sealed state together with the symbol board 411 and the special symbol display 8. Because it can be done. Note that FIG. 208 shows only a part of the substrate shown in FIGS. 204 to 207.

  Further, when the harness side connector is pulled out from the board side connector mounted on the main board 31, the game control microcomputer 560 may output a signal that can be used to notify that effect. Good. FIG. 209 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration for detecting that the connector has been pulled out. In the example shown in FIG. 209, some of the wirings 1911 and 1912 in the cable (harness) connected to the harness side connector 1902 connected to the board side connector 1901 are connected. In the main board 31, one of the connection portions 1921 and 1922 where the pins of the board-side connector 901 connected to the wirings 1911 and 1912 are connected by soldering or the like is grounded, and the other is connected to the game control microcomputer 560. Connecting.

  Note that the configuration shown in FIG. 209 is applied to the second substrate or the third substrate by applying it to the second substrate connected to the main substrate 31 or the third substrate connected to the second substrate. Detects that the harness-side connector is pulled out, and outputs a signal indicating the detection to the outside of the gaming machine for notification, or to a board on which a component (such as a light emitter) capable of notification is mounted You may make it do. Further, the harness-side connector connected to the main board 31 is pulled out by providing a circuit for detecting that the harness-side connector connected to the main board 31 is pulled out on the second board or the third board. This may be detected on the second substrate or third substrate side, and a signal indicating the detection may be output for notification.

  In a state where the board side connector 1901 and the harness side connector 1902 are connected, a ground level (low level) signal is input to the game control microcomputer 560. When the harness-side connector 1902 is removed from the board-side connector 1901, the connection location 1922 is opened. In that case, the game control microcomputer 560 generally recognizes that the signal level has become high. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the harness side connector 1902 has been removed from the board side connector 1901 when the signal level of the input signal from the connection location 1922 becomes high. The gaming control microcomputer 560 thus determined (specifically, the CPU 56) confirms that the connector has been removed via a board or the like (for example, a terminal board) for outputting a signal to the outside of the gaming machine. The signal shown is output. Further, information indicating that the connector has been removed by the effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 110. Receiving the effect control command, the effect control microcomputer 110 informs that the connector has been removed by the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, LED or lamp).

  Further, when the harness side connector 1902 is removed from the board side connector 1901 when the main power source of the gaming machine is turned off (when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped), the fact is stored and the main power source is turned on. When this is done, based on the memory, a signal indicating that the connector has been removed is output via a board or the like (for example, a terminal board) for outputting a signal to the outside of the gaming machine, or a microcomputer for effect control Information indicating that the connector has been removed may be transmitted to 110 by the effect control command.

  FIG. 210 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration for detecting that the connector has been pulled out when the main power supply is off. In the example shown in FIG. 210, a JK flip-flop 923 is used as the storage means. For example, power from a backup power source supplied to the RAM 55 is branched and supplied to the JK flip-flop 923. The initial level of the JK flip-flop 923Q output is assumed to be H (high level). In the state where the board-side connector 901 and the harness-side connector 902 are connected, the Q output level of the JK flip-flop 923 does not change (H remains H if H, L remains L). When the harness side connector 902 is removed from the side connector 901, the Q output becomes L (low level). At that time, the same applies even if the main power supply is off. Further, the Q output does not change even if the harness side connector 902 is reinserted. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine that the harness-side connector 902 has been removed from the board-side connector 901 if the Q output of the JK flip-flop 923 is L.

  Also in this case, the configuration shown in FIG. 210 is applied to the second substrate connected to the main substrate 31 or the third substrate connected to the second substrate, and the second substrate and the third substrate. It is detected that the harness-side connector connected to the is pulled out, and a signal indicating the detection is output to the outside of the gaming machine for notification, or a component capable of notification (such as a light emitter) is mounted. You may make it output to a board | substrate. Further, the harness-side connector connected to the main board 31 is pulled out by providing a circuit for detecting that the harness-side connector connected to the main board 31 is pulled out on the second board or the third board. This may be detected on the second substrate or third substrate side, and a signal indicating the detection may be output for notification.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine configured as follows is also disclosed.

  The game control board is accommodated in a board box (for example, the game control board box shown in FIG. 136) sealed by an unopenable fixing means, and the abnormality notification means (eg, unpaid excess LED 362) is accommodated in the board box. Gaming machines. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the abnormality notifying unit from being driven by a signal from the unauthorized substrate.

  A game machine in which a player can play a predetermined game, and executes a game control process for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the processes of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process) A game control board (for example, main board 31) on which a game control microcomputer (for example, game control microcomputer 560) is mounted and an effect means (for example, an effect display device) based on a command from the game control microcomputer 9, an effect control board (for example, effect control board 80) equipped with an effect control microcomputer (for example, a microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 80) for controlling the speaker 27, the lamp 25, etc., and a game control board Includes a game control microcomputer authentication information (for example, a game control microphone). The game control microcomputer is provided with a verification terminal (for example, verification terminal 364) for outputting authentication information to a verification machine (for example, verification machine 365) that verifies whether the computer 560 has an ID number). Includes a first authentication information transmitting means (for example, a part for executing the processing of step S81 in the game control microcomputer 560) for transmitting authentication information to the collator via the collation terminal, and an effect control microcomputer. Second authentication information transmitting means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes the process of step S82), and the effect control microcomputer is based on the authentication information. Authentication determining means for determining whether or not to authenticate the game control board (for example, for effect control) When the authentication control microcomputer determines that the authentication determination means does not authenticate (for example, step) When the result of the collation by the process of S1726 is inconsistent), a notification that the game control board is not authenticated (for example, “verification NG” is displayed by the process of step S1727) or a control to stop the operation (for example, step S1729) A gaming machine that performs at least one of the following. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily discover that the unauthorized circuit board is installed by causing the second authentication information transmitting means to transmit the authentication information.

  The second authentication information transmitting means transmits the authentication information to the effect control microcomputer when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the processing of step S82 is executed), and the effect control microcomputer is performed. However, for example, until the authentication information is received by the authentication information receiving means that receives the authentication information, a notification that the game control board is not authenticated is displayed (for example, display of “verification NG” in the process of step S701 is started, When “verification OK” is determined in the process of S1726, “verification NG” display is ended and “verification OK” is displayed.) Or at least one of the control to make the operation stop state (for example, step S1729) is performed. A gaming machine configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not an unauthorized circuit board is installed every time power supply to the gaming machine is started.

  A gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game using a game ball, and detecting that the game ball has won a predetermined winning area (for example, the first start port 15a or the second start port 15b) Winning detection means (for example, the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a) that outputs a winning detection signal when the game is performed, and a game control process for controlling the progress of the game (for example, steps S21 to S21 in the timer interrupt process) A game control microcomputer (e.g., game control microcomputer 560) that executes S33 (excluding step S29), and an input circuit (e.g., input driver circuit 58) that inputs a winning detection signal from the winning detection means. And a game control board (for example, the main board 31), and the game control board includes authentication information (eg, a game control microcomputer). For example, a verification terminal (for example, verification terminal 364) is provided for outputting authentication information to a verification machine (for example, verification machine 365) that verifies whether the game control microcomputer 560 is unique. The game control microcomputer includes authentication information transmission means (for example, a part for executing the processing of step S110 in the game control microcomputer 560) for transmitting authentication information to the verification device via the verification terminal. The authentication information transmitting means transmits authentication information (for example, step S110) on condition that a winning detection signal from the winning detection means is input to the input circuit (for example, Y in step S311). Machine. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily discover that an unauthorized circuit board is installed by causing the winning detection means to detect the game medium and causing the authentication information transmitting means to transmit authentication information. Can do.

  Further, as described above, the main board 31 is housed in the board box, but the impersonation board (illegal board) has the same function as the original main board 31 and is smaller than the main board 31. Is formed. Therefore, it is difficult to find. In addition, it may have a function that causes a big hit illegally. Then, electrical components and other boards that should originally be connected to the main board 31 are connected to the spoofing board, and the game control process is executed in place of the main board 31. That is, the connector of the cable connecting the main board 31 and the electrical component or another board is removed and connected to the spoofed board side. Therefore, in addition to the above measures, it is desirable to take the following measures in order to facilitate the discovery of the spoofed substrate.

(1) A speaker is mounted in the board box, and the speaker is used for production. If the sound output from the speaker deviates from the effect, it can be estimated that an impersonation board exists.
(2) A test switch is mounted on the main board 31, and when the test switch is pressed, a test command is transmitted to another electric component control board. If the test command is not transmitted even when the test switch is pressed, there is a possibility that the spoofing board is performing the game control process instead of the main board 31.
(3) The main board 31 is equipped with a function for detecting and notifying the connector disconnection. When the notification is made, there is a possibility that the spoofing board is performing the game control process in place of the main board 31.
(4) An informing device for informing in accordance with a prize is mounted in the board box. If the notification is not made despite the winning, the spoofing board may be performing the game control process in place of the main board 31.

(5) In the verification test of the game control microcomputer 560, if there is no input signal to the game control microcomputer 560, a verification NG signal is output. If a verification NG signal is output when a verification test is performed while generating a prize, there is a possibility that the spoofing board is performing the game control process in place of the main board 31.

(6) The length of the cable connecting the main board 31 and the electrical components or other boards is made as short as possible. If there is a margin in the cable length, the spoofing board may be performing the game control process instead of the main board 31.
(7) A cable that connects the main board 31 to the electrical component or another board is installed so as not to pass through the back surface of the main board 31. If the cable is hidden behind the main board 31, the spoofing board may be performing the game control process instead of the main board 31.
(8) Provide a structure in which the connector of the cable connecting the main board 31 and the electrical components or other boards cannot be easily removed. If traces left on the connector remain, if the cable is hidden behind the main board 31, the spoofing board may be performing the game control process instead of the main board 31.
(9) Eliminate the gap between the board box and the mounting surface. If the board box is on the back side, the spoofed board may be performing game control processing instead of the main board 31.
(10) Provide a cover that covers each board on the back of the gaming machine so that the cover cannot be easily removed. If there is a trace of the cover being removed, there is a possibility that the spoofing board is performing the game control process instead of the main board 31.

Embodiment B.
Next, a structure that makes it difficult to open the substrate storage case 200 by covering the substrate storage case 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 213. 211 shows a cover member (covering member) 950A that covers the board-side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c, and a cover member (covering member) 950B that covers at least the fixed part 255a of the first fixed part 255 in the board storage case 200. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing together with a substrate storage case 200. The structure of the substrate storage case 200 is the same as the structure shown in FIGS. 98 to 104 and the like also show the connector restricting member 500, but the connector restricting member 500 is not used in the structure shown in FIGS. 211 to 213. However, the connector restricting member 500 may be used in combination.

  As shown in FIG. 211, the cover member 950A covers the board-side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c when the cover member 950A is attached to the board storage case 200. Further, the cover member 950B covers the fixed portion 255a (of which at least the connecting portion 257) of the first fixed portion 255 when the cover member 950B is attached to the substrate storage case 200.

  In the cover member 950A, when the cover member 950A is attached to the substrate storage case 200, the slits 933a to 933a can be passed through the wires 291a to 291c extending from the wire side connectors attached to the substrate side connectors 238a to 238c. 933c is provided.

  The cover member 950A is engaged with each of the plurality of engagement holes 502 provided in the inclined covering surface portion 220c of the case cover 202 when the cover member 950A is attached to the substrate storage case 200. A nail 936 is provided.

  Also, a first fixed portion 930 including four fixed portions 930a to 930d into which the one-way screw 931 is inserted is provided on the side wall 951a of the cover member 950A so as to protrude. The one-way screw 931 is inserted into one of the four fixed portions 930a to 930d (for example, the fixed portion 930a). A cap 932 is put on the fixed portion 930a into which the one-way screw 931 is inserted.

  Note that the side wall 205 of the case main body 201 in the substrate storage case 200 is provided with a screw storage portion 935a for storing a plurality of (three in this embodiment) spare one-way screws 935. Furthermore, on the side wall 205 of the case body 201, the one-way screw 931 inserted into the fixed portions 930a to 930d is positioned so as to contact the fixed portions 930a to 930d when the cover member 950A is attached to the substrate storage case 200. A second fixed portion 937 is provided in which screw holes 938a to 938d are formed at predetermined intervals.

  A side portion of the cover member 950B is provided with a first fixed portion 950a having an internal space and having a communication hole at the bottom. Further, a second fixed portion 950 b is provided on the side portion of the bulging portion 208 a of the case main body 201. A screw hole is formed inside the second adherend 950b. In addition, a planar receiving portion 950c that is in contact with the bottom of the cover member 950B is provided on the upper portion of the second adherend portion 950b. A substantially central portion of the receiving portion 950c is provided with a hole portion that faces the communication hole in the bottom portion of the first fixed portion 950a when the cover member 950B is attached.

  When the cover member 950B is attached to the substrate storage case 200, the cover member 950B is mounted on the substrate so that the position of the communication hole at the bottom of the first fixed portion 950a corresponds to the position of the hole at the bottom of the first fixed portion 950a. Covering the storage case 200, the one-way screw 950d is screwed to the second fixed portion 950b. Thereafter, from above, an adhesive (which may be a colored adhesive colored in a predetermined color) is injected into the internal space of the first fixed portion 950a, and then the cap 950e is attached to the first fixed portion 950a. The one-way screw 950d is made difficult to remove by fitting into the upper surface opening and covering the first fixed portion 950a.

  FIG. 212A is a perspective view showing a state where the cover members 950A and 950B are attached to the substrate storage case 200. FIG. FIG. 212 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the substrate storage case 200 and the cover members 950A and 950B shown in FIG. 212 (a). FIG. 212 (c) is a BB cross-sectional view of the substrate storage case 200 and the cover member 950A shown in FIG. 212 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 212 (b), the cover member 950B covers the adherend portion 255a in the case cover 202 so that the adherent portion 255a is not exposed.

  As shown in FIG. 212 (c), each fixed portion 930b includes a square columnar screw insertion portion 930f through which the one-way screw 931 can be inserted, and a connecting portion 930e connecting the screw insertion portion 930f and the side wall 951a. Has been. And the screw insertion part 930f is arrange | positioned in the state spaced apart from the side wall 951a through the connection part 930e. Therefore, the connecting portion 930e can be cut with a tool such as a nipper. The structures of the adherend parts 930a, 930c, and 930d are the same as the structure of the adherent part 930b.

  Each locking claw 936 in the cover member 950 </ b> A is inserted into each engagement hole 502 in the case cover 202, and the locking claw 936 is locked in the engagement hole 502 by a claw portion (convex portion) in the locking claw 936. Then, the first covering portion 951 covers the board-side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c so that the board-side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c are not exposed.

  In this state, the one-way screw 931 is screwed by rotation in one direction. FIG. 212 (c) shows an example in which the one-way screw 931 inserted into the adherend portion 930b is screwed into the screw hole 938b. In general, first, the screw is inserted through the adherent portion 930a. Screwed into the hole 938a. The one-way screw 931 is a screw having a function that cannot be rotated, that is, the screw cannot be loosened, even if the screw is rotated in the direction different from the direction in which the screw is screwed. Specifically, the one-way screw 931 includes a screw portion having a male screw portion formed on the outer periphery and a head portion provided at the upper end of the screw portion. The spare one-way screw 935 is configured similarly to the spare one-way screw 931.

  Further, the one-way screw 931 is not attached to one of the four adherent portions 255a to 255d (for example, the adherent portion 255a), but the one-way screw 931 is attached to a plurality of adherent portions. Good.

  213 (a) and 213 (b) are cross-sectional views showing a cross section of the cover member 950 and the substrate storage case 200 in a direction orthogonal to the AA cross section in FIG. 212 (a). FIG. 213 (a) shows a cross-sectional view of the case cover 202 cut by a cut surface passing through the bulging portion 208a, and FIG. 213 (b) passes through the first fixed portion 255 in the case cover 202. Sectional drawing at the time of cut | disconnecting by a cut surface is shown.

  A plurality of spare one-way screws 281 are housed inside the bulging portion 208a. As shown in FIG. 213 (a), the cover member 950B is mounted on the board housing case 200. Sometimes, the bulging portion 208a is also covered so that the bulging portion 208a is not exposed.

  As shown in FIG. 213 (b), when the cover member 950B is attached to the substrate storage case 200, the cover member 950B covers the attachment location of the one-way screw 280 in the fixed portion 255a and covers the one-way screw 280. Make sure that is not exposed.

  As shown in FIGS. 211 to 213, the cover member 950 </ b> A prevents the board-side connectors 238 a, 238 b, and 238 c from being exposed, and seals them in the internal space with a one-way screw 931. Further, the cover member 950B prevents the fixed portion 255a in the first fixed portion 255 from being exposed and also prevents the bulging portion 208a in which the spare one-way screw 281 is stored from being exposed. In the sealed state, the board side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c, the first fixed portion 255, and the bulging portion 208a cannot be contacted.

  Taking the case where the fixed portion 930a is fixed to the second fixed portion 937 via the one-way screw 930 as an example, the one-way screw 931 is used to release the sealing state and open the cover member 950A. Cannot be removed by rotating counterclockwise, so that part of the cover member 950A is broken, or the connecting portion 930e is cut with a tool such as a nipper and the second fixed portion 937 is inserted via the one-way screw 930. It is necessary to detach the screw insertion portion 930f of the fixed portion 930a fixed to the main body side of the cover member 950.

  Regardless of the method of destruction or cutting, when the cover member 950A is opened after the sealed state is released, a trace of destruction or cutting remains. As a result, even when the cover member 950A is illegally opened, it is possible to discover that an illegal act has been performed at an early stage.

  Further, when trying to contact the one-way screw 280 of the adherend portion 255a, a part of the cover member 950B is broken, or the first adherent portion 950a and the second adherend portion 950b, the cover member 950B, and the bulging portion 208a. In addition, it is necessary to cut the joint portion with a tool such as a nipper or to remove the one-way screw 950d by some means.

  Furthermore, when contacting the main substrate 31 or the like stored in the substrate storage case 200, the one-way screw 280 cannot be removed by turning it counterclockwise. It is necessary to break or to cut the connecting portion 257 with a tool such as a nipper, and to disconnect the screw insertion portion 256 of the fixed portion 255a fixed to the fixing piece 212a via the one-way screw 280 from the case cover 202. .

  That is, when contacting the main substrate 31 or the like, it is necessary to release the sealing of the cover members 950A and 950B by cutting or breaking, and further to release the sealing of the substrate storage case 200. Further, when contacting the board-side connectors 238a, 238b, 238c, it is necessary to release the sealing of the cover member 950A by cutting or breaking. As described above, when the sealing of the cover members 950A and 950B is released, traces of destruction or cutting remain. Therefore, in the unlikely event, it is replaced with a main board or the like having a ROM in which an illegal game control program is stored, or the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c connected to the board side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c are removed and replaced with illegal boards. Even in such a case, those fraudulent acts can be detected and dealt with early. Therefore, it can be avoided that the game is played in that state and the game store suffers a disadvantage.

  Further, when contacting the main substrate 31 or the like, it is necessary to release the sealing of the cover members 950A and 950B by cutting or breaking, and further to release the sealing of the substrate storage case 200. It takes time to complete fraud aimed at Therefore, it is also possible to suppress the execution of cheating.

  FIG. 214 shows another example of a cover member that covers at least the first fixed portion 255 including the fixed portions 255a to 255d in the substrate storage case 200 and the board side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c together with the substrate storage case 200. It is a perspective view shown. The structure of the substrate storage case 200 is the same as the structure shown in FIGS. 98 to 104 and the like also show the connector restricting member 500, but the connector restricting member 500 is not used in the structure shown in FIGS. 211 to 213. However, the connector restricting member 500 may be used in combination.

  As shown in FIG. 214, the cover member 960 includes a first cover 961 that covers the board-side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c when the cover member 960 is attached to the board storage case 200, and a cover member 960 that houses the board. And a second covering portion 962 that covers the first adherend portion 255 when attached to the case 200.

  In the example shown in FIG. 214, a first fixed portion 963 having a keyhole 966 is provided on the side wall 961a of the first covering portion 961 so as to protrude. Further, on the side wall 205 of the case main body 201 in the substrate storage case 200, the second fixed portion is inserted so that the first fixed portion 963 is inserted into the recess 965 when the cover member 960 is attached to the substrate storage case 200. 964 is provided.

  Inside the first adherent portion 963, a lock portion (not shown) that is projected by a key is provided. Further, a hole (not shown) into which the lock portion is fitted is provided in the inner wall portion of the concave portion 965 in the second adherend portion 964.

  Each locking claw 936 in the cover member 960 is inserted into each engagement hole 502 in the case cover 202, and the locking claw 936 is locked in the engagement hole 502 by a claw portion (convex portion) in the locking claw 936. Then, the first covering portion 961 covers the board-side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c so that the board-side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c are not exposed. Further, the second covering portion 962 covers the first adherent portion 255 in the case cover 202 so that the first adherent portion 255 is not exposed.

  In this state, the first fixed portion 963 is inserted into the recess 965. Then, when the key is inserted into the keyhole 966 and rotated in a predetermined direction, the lock portion protrudes and fits into the hole portion in the second fixed portion 964. In this state, the cover member 960 includes the board-side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c, the first fixed portion 255 including the sealing portion by the one-way screw 280, and the bulging portion 208a in which the spare one-way screw 281 is accommodated. They are prevented from being exposed, and they are sealed in the internal space by a lock mechanism (the lock portion in the first fixed portion 963 and the hole portion in the second fixed portion 964). In the sealed state, the board side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c, the first fixed portion 255, and the bulging portion 208a cannot be contacted.

  As in the case of the example shown in FIG. 211 and the like, when the cover member 950 is to be opened by releasing the sealed state, as long as there is no key that can be inserted into the keyhole 966 and can be unlocked, Unless the locking mechanism is destroyed, it is necessary to destroy a part of the cover member 960 or to cut the connecting portion 930e with a tool such as a nipper. Therefore, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 211 and the like, it is possible to detect and deal with an illegal act on the main board 31 and the like at an early stage. Further, when contacting the main substrate 31 or the like, it is necessary to release the sealing of the cover member 960 by cutting or breaking, and further to release the sealing of the substrate storage case 200. It takes time to complete the cheating. Therefore, it is also possible to suppress the execution of cheating.

Embodiment C. FIG.
FIG. 215 is a perspective view illustrating a configuration example of the main board 31 capable of suppressing the execution of the illegal act. In the example shown in FIG. 215, receiving portions 561 and 562 having threaded portions are provided at a plurality of locations (for example, two locations) in a socket (IC socket) 560a to which the game control microcomputer 560 is mounted. ing. The socket 560a is fixed to the main board 31 by soldering or the like.

  After the game control microcomputer 560 is mounted in the socket 560a, the game control microcomputer 560 is covered with a transparent cover 560b. The cover 560b is provided with a screw insertion portion 565 provided with a hole so as to come into contact with the screw portion of the receiving portions 561 and 562 when the cover 560b is put on the game control microcomputer 560. After the game control microcomputer 560 is covered with the cover 560b, the screws 563 and 564 are screwed to the receiving portions 561 and 562 via the screw insertion portion 565.

  In this state, the game control microcomputer 560 cannot be removed from the socket 560a unless the cover 560b is removed. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 having the ROM 54 cannot be removed and replaced with a microcomputer having the illegal ROM. That is, it takes time to replace the illegal ROM.

  The configuration of the substrate storage case 200 is the same as the configuration in each of the above embodiments (see FIG. 101 and the like). Therefore, when the game control microcomputer 560 is removed from the socket 560a, it is necessary to release the sealing of the substrate storage case 200.

  Further, the cover members 950A and 950B or the cover member 960 shown in FIGS. 211 and 214 may be further used. When the cover members 950A and 950B or the cover member 960 are also used, it takes more time to remove the game control microcomputer 560 from the socket 560a, so that the effect of suppressing the execution of fraud is further increased.

Embodiment D. FIG.
FIG. 216 is a plan view illustrating a configuration example of the gaming machine that can suppress the execution of the cheating. In the example shown in FIG. 216, the back surface of the game board is covered with a transparent cover 970. Since the board storage case 200 (not shown) containing the main board 31 is attached to the back surface of the game board, the board storage case 200 is covered with the cover 970.

  The cover 970 is provided with a first fixed portion having a structure similar to that of the first fixed portion 255 and the cover member 950A in the substrate storage case 200 (see FIGS. 211 and 212). In other words, a first fixed portion 975 including four fixed portions 975a to 975d is provided. Further, the game board is provided with a second fixed portion (not shown) having the same structure as the second fixed portion 212 and the second fixed portion 937 in the board storage case 200.

  Therefore, the cover 970 can be sealed with the one-way screw as in the case of the substrate storage case 200 and the cover member 950A. Also, when releasing the sealed state and opening the cover 970, the one-way screw cannot be removed by turning it counterclockwise. It is necessary to cut from the main body side of the cover 970 by cutting with a tool such as a nipper and separating the cylindrical portion of the fixed portion fixed to the second fixed portion via the one-way screw.

  That is, when contacting the substrate storage case 200, it is necessary to release the sealing of the cover 970 by cutting or breaking. When the seal of the cover 970 is released, traces of destruction or cutting remain. Therefore, in the unlikely event, it is replaced with a main board or the like having a ROM in which an illegal game control program is stored, or the wiring side connectors 290a to 290c connected to the board side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c are removed and replaced with illegal boards. Even in such a case, those fraudulent acts can be detected and dealt with early. Therefore, it can be avoided that the game is played in that state and the game store suffers a disadvantage.

  The configuration of the substrate storage case 200 is the same as the configuration in each of the above embodiments (see FIG. 101 and the like). Therefore, when the game control microcomputer 560 is removed from the socket 560a, it is necessary to release the sealing of the substrate storage case 200.

  Further, the cover member 950 or the cover member 960 shown in FIGS. 211 and 214 may be further used. In the case where the cover member 950 or the cover member 960 is also used, it takes more time to complete the fraud, and the effect of suppressing the execution of the fraud is further increased.

  Further, as a sealing means for the cover 970, the first fixed portion 975 and the second fixed portion having the same structure as the first fixed portion 255 and the cover member 950A in the substrate storage case 200 (see FIGS. 211 and 212). Instead of using the fixing portion, a lock mechanism as shown in FIG. 214 may be used. In that case, a first fixed portion 971 having a key hole 972 is provided in the cover member 950A so as to protrude. . And the 1st to-be-adhered part 971 is provided with the lock part protruded with a key. Moreover, the hole part in which a lock | rock part fits is provided in the game board side. Even with such a structure, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the case where the first fixed portion including the four fixed portions 975a to 975d is provided.

  FIG. 216 shows both the first fixed portion 975 including the four fixed portions 975a to 975d and the first fixed portion 971 having the key hole 972, but at least one of them is provided. Just do it.

  In addition, here, the cover 970 that covers the back surface of the game board is illustrated, but as long as at least the substrate storage case 200 can be covered and sealed, the covered portion may not be the back surface of the game board. The entire back surface of 1 may be sufficient.

  In addition, on the back side of the gaming machine, the board storage case 200 itself is moved by a mechanism similar to the sealing mechanism using a one-way screw as in the case of the board storage case 200 or the cover member 950B, or a lock mechanism using a key. You may make it adhere to the main body (for example, game board or game frame) of a gaming machine.

  As described above, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gaming machine has a board on which game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370) is mounted. Substrate sealing means (for example, fixed portions 255a to 255d) for sealing the substrate in a storage case (for example, the substrate storage case 200) that can store (for example, the main substrate 31 or the payout control substrate 37). The substrate sealing means is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a part of the storage case is destroyed (see FIGS. 107, 108, etc.), and covers at least a cutting portion (for example, the connecting portion 257) of the substrate sealing means. A covering member (for example, a cover member 950B) and a covering member sealing means (for example, a solidified member) that makes the substrate sealing means covered with the covering member impossible to be exposed unless a part thereof is destroyed. 1) the first fixed portion 930 including the portions 930a to 930d and the second fixed portion 937 in which the screw holes 938a to 938d are formed. It can prevent more effectively.

  In the prior art, since the one-way screw is a screw having a structure that is difficult to rotate in the direction in which the screw is removed, the joint portion by the one-way screw is cut when performing an illegal act. For example, in the method described in Patent Document 1, since the cover is detached when the joint portion by the one-way screw is cut, the cover has no protection against an illegal act of cutting the joint portion by the one-way screw. I can't do that either. That is, even if the cover exists, as long as the joint portion by the one-way screw can be easily cut, fraud cannot be effectively prevented.

  However, according to the structure according to the present invention as described above, since the joint portion by the one-way screw cannot be cut unless the covering member is opened, fraud is more effectively prevented.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the structure in which measures for effectively preventing fraudulent acts have been described for the main board 31 on which the game control microcomputer 560 is mounted. The mounted payout control board 37 may have the same structure as that of each of the above embodiments.

  Further, although Embodiments A to D and the modification examples have been described, Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, and each of the modification examples may be combined with Embodiment A, and Any two or more of the embodiments A to D and the modifications may be combined. In each of the above embodiments, the control board (the main board 31 and the payout control board 37) in the pachinko gaming machine is taken as an example, but the embodiments A to D are applied to the control board in the slot machine. You can also.

Embodiment E. FIG.
Next, a structure that makes it difficult to open the substrate storage case 200 by covering the substrate storage case 200 with something other than the cover member 944 will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218. FIG. 217 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 218 is a cross-sectional view showing the AA cross section in FIG. The structure of the substrate storage case 200 is the same as the structure shown in FIGS. 98 to 104 and the like also show the connector restricting member 500, but the connector restricting member 500 is not used in the structure shown in FIGS. 217 and 218. However, the connector restricting member 500 may be used in combination.

  As shown in FIG. 217, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an effect control unit 80A including an effect control board 80 on which an effect control microcomputer 110 for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer, etc. Various board such as a game control board (main board) 31 on which is mounted and a payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control is mounted. The game control board 31 is stored in the board storage case 200. The payout control board 37 is stored in a payout control board storage case. Furthermore, a power supply substrate 910 and a touch sensor substrate 91A are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The mechanism for fixing the case cover 202 to the case main body 201 so as not to be opened is the same as in the case of Embodiment A (see FIGS. 107, 108, etc.). That is, the second fixed portion 212 and the first fixed portion 255 are fixed (caulked) via the one-way screw 280. FIG. 218 shows a state where the one-way screw 280 is screwed to the fixed portion 255a.

  As in the case of the embodiment A, after the one-way screw 280 is completely screwed in, the adhesive Z is injected into the screw insertion portion 256 from above, and then the cap 244 is attached to the upper surface of the fixed portion 255a. It is also shown in FIG. 218 that the one-way screw 280 is difficult to remove when fitted into the opening. As the adhesive Z, a colored adhesive colored in a predetermined color may be used.

  The effect control unit 80A, the payout control board storage case, the case containing the power supply board 910 and the touch sensor board 91A, the storage tank 38, the curve wall (ball path), and the payout case 40A are installed on the mechanism plate (back pack) 105. ing. In the plan view of FIG. 217, the mechanism plate 105 is a hatched portion. The mechanism plate 105 can be opened and closed with hinges 227A and 227B as fulcrums. The mechanism plate 105 is locked by sliding the slide portions of the lock portions 226A, 226B, and 226C with the mechanism plate 105 closed. The mechanism plate 105 is provided with a payout path through which game media (balls, coins, etc.) used in gaming machines are paid out, but is not limited to the one provided with a payout device.

  In this embodiment, a cover body 228 is provided on the mechanism plate 105. As shown in FIG. 218, the cover body 228 has a shape such that the plate is bent so as to form an angle of approximately 90 °. One surface of the cover body 228 is a flat surface portion 228A, and the other surface is a side surface portion 228B. With the mechanism plate 105 closed, the flat surface portion 228A of the cover body 228 covers the first fixing portion 255 and the connecting portion 257 of the substrate storage case 200. That is, the first fixing portion 255 and the connecting portion 257 are covered, and the first fixing portion 255 and the connecting portion 257 are made inaccessible. Therefore, when the main cover 31 is exposed by opening the case cover 202 in the substrate storage case 200, it is necessary to first unlock the mechanism plate 105 and open the mechanism plate 105. Then, a part of the case body 201 or the case cover 202 is destroyed, or the connecting portion 257 is cut with a tool such as a nipper, and the fixed portion 255a fixed through the one-way screw 280 is removed from the case cover. Must be disconnected from 202.

  That is, when contacting the main board 31 or the like, the cover is broken before part of the case main body 201 or the case cover 202 in the board storage case 200 is broken or the connecting portion 257 is cut with a tool such as a nipper. It is necessary to open the mechanism plate 105 in order to remove the cover of the first fixing portion 255 of the substrate storage case 200 by the body 228. The time will be longer. As a result, fraud can be effectively prevented. In addition, after opening the mechanism plate 105, a part of the case body 201 or the case cover 202 is destroyed, or if the connecting portion 257 is cut with a tool such as a nipper, a trace of destruction or cutting remains, so the destruction or cutting Based on these traces, it is possible to discover that fraud has been done.

  In this embodiment, the lock of the mechanism plate 105 is released by sliding the slide portion. However, in order to make the lock release difficult, a mechanism that releases the lock with a key may be adopted. Good. In addition, when a cover that covers the lock portions 226A, 226B, and 226C is provided and the cover and the mechanism plate 105 are sealed with a one-way screw, for example, and the mechanism plate 105 is unlocked, the one-way screw is used. You may make it necessary to cut | disconnect a junction part. That is, a mechanism plate sealing means for sealing the mechanism plate 105 itself with respect to the gaming machine main body so as not to be opened may be provided. In the case where the mechanism plate sealing means is provided, it is possible to further increase the number of steps required until the control means (microcomputer, ROM) is touched, leading to fraud prevention.

  218 also shows a connecting cover portion 244a in a cap 244 described later, but a cap 244 that does not have the connecting cover portion 244a may be used.

  Further, the covering means (the covering portion, that is, the flat portion 228A of the cover body 228) for covering the cutting portion (the connecting portion 257) may be integrally formed with the mechanism plate 105, or may be formed as a separate member. It may be attached to. That is, any structure may be used as long as the mechanism plate 105 cannot be released unless the mechanism plate 105 is opened.

Embodiment F. FIG.
Next, another structure that covers the substrate storage case 200 with a cover member and makes it more difficult to open the substrate storage case 200 by fixing the cover member will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220. To do. FIG. 219 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 220 is a perspective view showing how the substrate storage case 200 and the cover member 984 are attached. The structure of the substrate storage case 200 is the same as the structure shown in FIGS. 98 to 104 and the like also show the connector restricting member 500, but the connector restricting member 500 is not used in the structure shown in FIGS. 219 and 220. However, the connector restricting member 500 may be used in combination.

  As shown in FIG. 219, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an effect control unit 80A including an effect control board 80 on which an effect control microcomputer 110 for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a game control microcomputer Various boards such as a game control board (main board) 31 on which etc. are mounted and a payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control and the like are mounted. The game control board 31 is stored in the board storage case 200. The payout control board 37 is stored in a payout control board storage case. Furthermore, a power supply substrate 910 and a touch sensor substrate 91A are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The power supply substrate 910 and the touch sensor substrate 91A are also accommodated in the case.

  The mechanism for fixing the case cover 202 to the case main body 201 so as not to be opened is the same as in the case of Embodiment A (see FIGS. 107, 108, etc.). That is, the second fixed portion 212 and the first fixed portion 255 are fixed (caulked) via the one-way screw 280. FIG. 219 shows a state in which the cap 244 is fitted after the one-way screw 280 is screwed to the fixed portion 255a (the uppermost of the four fixed portions).

  In this embodiment, a cover member 944 that covers the fixed portions 255 a to 255 d in the first fixing portion 255 is fixed to the mounting plate 221.

  As shown in FIG. 220, the cover member 984 has a U-shape that sandwiches the substrate storage case 200 and the mounting plate 221. In the cover member 984, the front side (side facing the case cover 202) of the substrate storage case 200 is a front surface portion 984 </ b> A, and the surface on the mounting plate 221 side is a back surface portion 984 </ b> B. On the back surface portion 984B, four adherend portions 981a to 981d are provided so as to be arranged vertically. The shapes of the adherends 981a to 981d are the same as, for example, the shapes of the adherent portions 255a to 255d in the first adherent portion 255 of the substrate storage case 200. Note that FIG. 220 also shows an enlarged view around the cover member 984.

  Further, the enlarged view in FIG. 220 is a view of the periphery of the cover member 984 as viewed from the front side of the gaming machine (side on which the player is located). As shown in the enlarged view, the cutting portion sealing means (The to-be-adhered portions 981a to 981d and the like) and the cutting portion of the covering means (the connecting portion 988) overlap with the substrate storage case 200 when viewed from the back side (opposite side to the front side) of the gaming machine, It is provided at a position closer to the front side of the gaming machine than the board storage case 200 (only the cutting portion of the covering means may be provided at a position closer to the front side of the gaming machine than the board storage case 200). . However, the cutting part sealing means and the cutting part of the covering means may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine of the board storage case 200 itself, and the gaming machine front side of the mounting base plate (mounting plate 221) of the board storage case 200 May be provided. That is, any configuration is possible as long as the cutting portion (joining portion 988) of the covering means (cover member 984) cannot be cut unless the substrate storage case 200 is separated (opened) from the gaming machine main body.

  The mounting plate 221 is provided with four cylindrical portions 985a to 985d. The cylindrical portions 985a to 985d are provided at positions corresponding to the adherend portions 981a to 981d, respectively. The mounting method of the one-way screw 986 is the same as the mounting method of the one-way screw 280 in the substrate storage case 200. That is, an insertion hole into which the one-way screw 986 can be inserted is formed in the cylindrical portions 985a to 985d. Screw holes are provided in the cylindrical portions 985a to 985d. A one-way screw 986 is inserted from the upper surface opening of any one of the fixed portions 981a to 981d (here, the fixed portion 981a), and the screw driver is inserted into the fixed portion 981a. A one-way screw is screwed clockwise with a tool such as the like, and the tubular portion 985a and the fixed portion 981a are fixed (caulked) via the one-way screw 986. In a state where the one-way screw 986 is screwed, the cover member 984 is fixed to the mounting plate 221 by fixing the cylindrical portion 985a and the fixed portion 981a.

  Note that after the one-way screw 986 is completely screwed in, an adhesive is injected into the fixed portion 981a from above. Then, the cap 987 is fitted into the upper surface opening of the fixed portion 981a to make it difficult to remove the one-way screw 986. In addition, you may make it harden | cure by irradiating an ultraviolet-ray using an ultraviolet curing resin as an adhesive agent.

  Thereafter, the mounting plate 221 to which the board storage case 200 is mounted is mounted on the gaming machine. Specifically, the attachment plate 221 is attached to the second back cover 946B.

  An attachment base 223A is provided on one of the four sides of the attachment plate 221, and engagement portions 223B and 223C having cylindrical protrusions 223b and 223c are provided on the receiving side and the lower side of the attachment base 223A. . On the mounting plate 221, a locking portion 224 having receiving portions 224b and 224c having holes into which the cylindrical protrusions 223b and 223c are inserted is attached at positions corresponding to the engaging portions 223B and 223C. With the cylindrical protrusions 223b and 223c inserted into the holes in the receiving portions 224b and 224c, the mounting plate 221 to which the substrate storage case 200 is attached can rotate about the portion of the locking portion 224 as a fulcrum. .

  In this state, the surface portion 984 </ b> A of the cover member 984 covers the first fixing portion 255. Therefore, when the case cover 202 in the substrate storage case 200 is opened to expose the main substrate 31, first, it is necessary to remove the fixation between the cover member 984 and the mounting plate 221. Since the one-way screw 986 cannot be removed with a tool such as a screw driver, it is necessary to cut the connecting portion 988 (a part of the cover member 984) with a tool such as a nipper. The connecting portion 988 is a portion that connects each of the fixed portions 981a to 981d and the back surface portion 984B of the cover member 984.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the first fixing portion 255 and the connecting portion 257 in the substrate storage case 200 are covered with the cover member 984, and the cover member 984 is fixed to the mounting plate 221.

  When the main board 31 stored in the board storage case 200 comes into contact, the cover member 984 is unsealed (fixed by the one-way screw 986) by cutting or breaking, and the board storage case 200 is removed from the gaming machine. After removal, it is necessary to release the sealing of the substrate storage case 200. When the sealing of the cover member 984 is released, traces of destruction or cutting remain in the connecting portion 988 of the cover member 984 and the like. Further, when the sealing of the substrate storage case 200 is released, traces of destruction or cutting remain in the connecting portion 257 (see FIG. 99 and the like) of the substrate storage case 200. Therefore, even if the regular game control microcomputer 560 is replaced with a microcomputer having a built-in ROM in which an illegal game control program is stored, in two places (the substrate storage case 200 and the cover member 984). Since traces of destruction or cutting remain, fraud can be detected and dealt with early based on the traces. Therefore, it can be avoided that the game is played in that state and the game store suffers a disadvantage. Further, when contacting the main board 31 stored in the board storage case 200, it is necessary to release the sealing at two places and to remove the board storage case 200 from the gaming machine. It takes time to contact. This also effectively prevents fraud.

  As shown in FIG. 220, the cap 987 is provided with a connecting cover portion 987a. Note that the cap 987 is also provided with a locking claw that fits into a groove provided inside the fixed portions 981a to 981d and prevents the cap 987 from being pulled out.

  The connecting cover portion 987a is provided with two extending portions 987b and 987c, and in each of the extending portions 987b and 987c, a cap 987 is put on the fixed portions 981a to 981d (in this example, the fixed portion 981a). In order to increase the thickness of the connecting portion 988 equivalently, the connecting portion 988 is sandwiched. The extending portions 987b and 987c in the connecting cover portion 987a increase the thickness of the connecting portion 988 equivalently, thereby making it difficult to cut the connecting portion 988 with a tool such as a nipper. That is, the time until the substrate storage case 200 can be contacted can be further increased.

  Even when the connecting cover portion 987a is not provided on the cap 987, the effect of making it impossible to easily contact the first fixing portion 255 in the substrate storage case 200 and the sealing of the substrate storage case 200 are released. When this is done, the effect of leaving traces of destruction or cutting at two locations is maintained.

  As in the case of the embodiment A, the case main body 201 stores the spare one-way screw 281 (spare for the one-way screw 280), but the spare one-way screw 986 is also housed. Preferably it is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 98, FIG. 100, and the like, the total number (three) of caps 265 for the spare one-way screw 281 is housed in the substrate housing case 200. It is preferable to store a total number (three) of caps for the spare one-way screw.

  In this embodiment, the attachment plate 221 to which the board storage case 200 is attached can be rotated with the portion of the locking portion 224 as a fulcrum, but the attachment plate 221 is fixed in the gaming machine (rotation time). This embodiment can be applied even when configured so as not to move.

  In this embodiment, the cover member 984 is fixed to the mounting plate 221 with difficulty in separation. However, the cover member 984 may be fixed to the case body 201 in the substrate storage case 200 with difficulty in separation.

  Note that the fixing portion covering member (cap 244) may be mounted by so-called fitting (the claws engage inside and cannot be removed from the outside), but other members are attached by welding or adhesion. But you can. In other words, it does not have to be easily shifted by hand. Further, the cutting covering portion (joining cover portion 244b)) of the fixing portion covering member only needs to cover a part of the cutting portion (linking portion 257) of the substrate storage case 200, and the tip of a cutting tool such as a nipper is inserted. It is desirable to coat in a shape that is difficult to do. Further, when cutting the cut portion of the substrate storage case 200, the cut covering portion is destroyed first, but after the cut covering portion is broken, only the fixing portion covering (caulking lid portion) portion remains. Traces of destruction remain.

Embodiment G.
Next, FIG. 221 shows a structure that makes it difficult to open the substrate storage case 200 by making the shape of the cap 244 closing the upper surface openings of the adherend portions 255a to 255d in the substrate storage case 200 into a special shape. The description will be given with reference. FIG. 221 is a partial perspective view showing a part of the substrate storage case 200. FIG. 221 also shows an enlarged view of the vicinity of the fixed portion 255d, an AA sectional view of the vicinity of the fixed portion 255d, and a BB sectional view of the cap 244 that covers the fixed portion 255d. .

  As described above, the second fixed portion 212 and the first fixed portion 255 are fixed (caulked) via the one-way screw 280 in the substrate storage case 200. FIG. 221 shows a state in which the one-way screw 280 is screwed to the fixed portion 255a.

  After the one-way screw 280 is completely screwed in, the adhesive Z is injected into the screw insertion portion 256 from above, and then the cap 244 is fitted into the upper surface opening of the fixed portion 255a, and the one-way screw 280 is removed. It is hard to be repelled. As the adhesive Z, a colored adhesive colored in a predetermined color may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 221, the cap 244 is provided with a connecting cover portion 244a. The connecting cover portion 244a is provided with two extending portions 244b and 244c, and in each of the extending portions 244b and 244c, the cap 244 is covered with the fixed portions 255a to 255d (in this example, the fixed portion 255a). When connecting the connecting portion 257, the thickness of the connecting portion 257 is equivalently increased. The extending portions 244b and 244c in the connecting cover portion 244a increase the thickness of the connecting portion 257 equivalently, thereby making it difficult to cut the connecting portion 257 with a tool such as a nipper. That is, the time until the main substrate 31 stored in the substrate storage case 200 can be contacted can be made longer.

  In the example shown in FIG. 221, the cap 244 that covers the adherend portion to be used first (the adherend portion 255a in this example) among the adherent portions 255a to 255d is colored in a predetermined color. The color is different from the color of the spare cap 265 in the cap suspension support 245 (not shown in FIG. 221). The one-way screw 280 used first is colored in a predetermined color. The color is different from the color of the spare one-way screw 281. Therefore, in order not to leave a trace of opening the case cover, in order to conceal the illegal act by illegally releasing the joining with the one-way screw 280 with a special tool or the like dedicated to removing the one-way screw, After the illegal action is taken, the joint is joined with the spare one-way screw 281 obtained from the used machine of the gaming machine, and further, the upper surface of the fixed part 255a is secured with the spare cap 265 obtained from the used machine of the gaming machine. Even if you can cover it, you can easily detect fraud.

Embodiment H. FIG.
Next, a structure that makes it difficult to remove the main substrate 31 from the substrate storage case 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 and 223. FIG. 222 is a perspective view showing the case cover 202 in the substrate storage case 200 together with the main substrate 31. FIG. 223 is a perspective view showing the substrate storage case 200 in a situation where the case cover 202 is slid and closed.

  As shown in FIG. 222, the case cover 202 is provided with four cylindrical portions 991a to 991d facing inward. In the main substrate 31, holes 996a to 996d are provided at positions corresponding to the cylindrical portions 991a to 991d.

  The cylindrical portions 991a to 991d are formed with insertion holes into which the one-way screws 997 can be inserted. In addition, screw holes are provided inside the cylindrical portions 991a to 991d.

  FIG. 222 also shows an enlarged view of the periphery of the bottom portion 993 of the tubular portion 991a (the portion of the tubular portion 991a that contacts the flat portion of the case cover 202). One of the enlarged views (left side enlarged view) shows a state where the tubular portion 991a is not separated, and the other (right side enlarged view) shows a state where the tubular portion 991a is separated. ing.

  As shown in the enlarged view on the left side, a plurality of through holes 992 are provided around the bottom portion 993 of the tubular portion 991a. When the portions connecting the respective through holes 992 are cut, the cylindrical portion 991a is separated from the case cover 202.

  When storing the main board 31 in the board storage case 200, first, the case cover 202 is attached to the main board 31. At this time, the component mounting surface (front surface) of the main board 31 is opposed to the case cover 202. Then, the main board 31 and the case cover 202 are screwed with screws (screws) 998 and 999 from the back surface of the main board 31.

  Furthermore, from the back surface of the main substrate 31, any one of the cylindrical portions 991a to 991d (here, the cylindrical portion 991a) via any one of the hole portions 996a to 996d (here, the hole portion 996a). The one-way screw 997 is inserted from the opening of the screw, and the one-way screw 997 is screwed clockwise with a tool such as a screwdriver in the state where the tip of the screw portion is inserted into the cylindrical portion 991a. It is fixed (caulked) via a one-way screw 997. In a state where the one-way screw 997 is screwed, the tubular portion 991a and the main substrate 31 are fixed.

  Next, the guide piece 355 provided in the case cover 202 is placed in the opening of the guide groove 350 provided in the side walls 205 and 206 of the case body 201, and the case cover 202 is slid in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 223). (See arrow in). The case cover 202 is fitted into the guide groove 350. Then, the case cover 202 and the case main body 201 are screwed from the surface of the case cover 202 with a plurality of screws (screws).

  Further, as in the case of the embodiment A, the one-way screw 280 is inserted from the upper surface opening of any one of the four fixed portions 255a to 255d (for example, the fixed portion 255a), and the screw portion The one-way screw 280 is screwed clockwise with a tool such as a screwdriver in a state where the tip of the screw is inserted into the fixed portion 255a, and the second fixed portion 212 and the first fixed portion 255 in the case body 201 are connected to the one-way screw 280. It is fixed (crimped) through

  As in the case of the embodiment A, a spare one-way screw 281 (spare for the one-way screw 280) is accommodated inside the bulging portion 208 of the case body 201. The one-way screw (for example, three) is also preferably housed. The spare one-way screw means, for example, a spare tubular portion (three tubular shapes) other than the tubular portion 991a when the main substrate 31 is sealed again to the case cover 202 after the tubular portion 991a is separated. It is a one-way screw attached to any one of the parts 991b to 991d (for example, the cylindrical part 991b). The storage place for the spare one-way screw is not limited to the inside of the bulging portion 208. In addition, when the main substrate 31 is sealed again in the case cover 202 after the spare cylindrical portion 991b is separated, any one of the two cylindrical portions 991c to 991d (for example, the cylindrical portion 991c) is used. After the spare one-way screw is attached and the spare cylindrical portion 991c is separated, when the main substrate 31 is sealed again to the case cover 202, the spare one-way screw is attached to the tubular portion 991d. The

  When exposing the main substrate 1, first, as in the case of Embodiment A, it is necessary to release the sealing of the substrate storage case 200. In addition, it is necessary to remove the main board 31 from the case cover 202. Since the one-way screw 997 is a screw having a structure that is difficult to rotate in the direction in which the screw is removed, when the main board 31 is removed from the case cover 202, a portion that connects the through hole 992 is formed with a tool such as a nipper. Need to cut.

  Therefore, when the main board 1 is exposed, since traces of destruction or cutting remain at two places (the caulking portion and the case cover 202 in the board storage case 200), an illegal act can be detected early based on the traces. Can be dealt with. Therefore, it can be avoided that the game is played in that state and the game store suffers a disadvantage. Further, when the main substrate 1 is exposed, it is necessary to release the sealing at two places, so it takes time to expose the main substrate 1. This also effectively prevents fraud.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case cover 202 and the main board are inserted by inserting the one-way screw 280 from the upper surface opening of any one of the four fixed portions 255a to 255d (for example, the fixed portion 255a). 31 is fixed, but the one-way screw 280 may be inserted from the upper surface opening of a plurality of fixed portions of the four fixed portions 255a to 255d to fix the case cover 202 and the main board 31 to each other. .

  FIG. 222 also shows a cover (cover covering the game control microcomputer 560) 560d to be described later. However, in this embodiment, the use of the cover 560d is not essential.

Embodiment I. FIG.
FIG. 224 is a perspective view illustrating a configuration example of the main board 31 capable of suppressing the execution of fraud. In the example shown in FIG. 224, receiving portions 561 and 562 having threaded portions are provided at a plurality of locations (for example, two locations) in the socket 560c to which the game control microcomputer 560 is mounted. The socket 560c is fixed to the main board 31 by soldering or the like.

  After the game control microcomputer 560 is mounted in the socket 560c, the game control microcomputer 560 is covered with a transparent cover 560d. The cover 560d is provided with a screw insertion portion 565 provided with a hole so as to come into contact with the screw portion in the receiving portions 561 and 562 when the cover 560d is put on the game control microcomputer 560. After the game control microcomputer 560 is covered with the cover 560b, the screws 563 and 564 are screwed to the receiving portions 561 and 562 via the screw insertion portion 565.

  Four adherends 566a to 566d are provided on the side surface of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 560d so as to be aligned in the longitudinal direction. For example, the shapes of the fixed portions 566a to 566d are the same as the shapes of the fixed portions 255a to 255d in the first fixing portion 255 of the substrate storage case 200.

  Further, a table portion 567 is provided on a side portion of the socket 560c. Four cylindrical portions 569a to 569d are provided on the back side of the table portion 567. The cylindrical portions 569a to 569d are provided at positions corresponding to the fixed portions 566a to 566d, respectively. The cylindrical portions 569a to 569d are formed with insertion holes into which the one-way screws 568 can be inserted, and screw holes are provided inside the cylindrical portions 569a to 569d. In addition, the table portion 567 of the socket 560c is provided with a communication hole that communicates with the insertion holes of the cylindrical portions 569a to 569d. The one-way screw 568 is inserted from the upper surface opening of any one of the fixed parts 566a to 566d (here, the fixed part 566a), and the screw driver is inserted into the fixed part 566a. A one-way screw is screwed clockwise with a tool such as the like, and the cylindrical portion 569a and the fixed portion 566a are fixed (caulked) via the one-way screw 568. In a state where the one-way screw 568 is screwed, the cylindrical portion 569a and the fixed portion 566a are fixed, whereby the cover 560d is fixed to the socket 560c.

  In this state, the game control microcomputer 560 cannot be removed from the socket 560c unless the cover 560d is removed. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 having the ROM 54 cannot be removed and replaced with a microcomputer having the illegal ROM.

  When removing the cover 560d, it is necessary not only to remove the screws 563 and 564 but also to release the sealing of the cover 560d (adhering with the one-way screw 568) by cutting or breaking. When the sealing of the cover 560d is released, traces of destruction or cutting remain in the connecting portion 570 of the cover 560d. Therefore, even if the legitimate game control microcomputer 560 is replaced with a microcomputer having a built-in ROM in which an illegal game control program is stored, the illegal act is quickly detected based on the trace of destruction or disconnection. Can be found and dealt with.

  In this embodiment, the cover 560d is fixed to the socket 560c, but it may be fixed to the main board 31. In that case, the table portion 567 is not provided in the socket 560c, and a cylindrical portion similar to the cylindrical portions 569a to 569d provided on the back side of the table portion 567 is provided on the main substrate 31. The fixing method of the cover 560d by the cylindrical portion in the main substrate 31 is the same as the fixing method when the table portion 567 is provided in the socket 560c.

  As in the case of Embodiment A, a spare one-way screw 281 (spare for the one-way screw 280) is housed in the bulging portion 208 of the case body 201. A spare one-way screw is also preferably housed. The spare one-way screw is, for example, a one-way screw that is attached to a cylindrical portion other than the cylindrical portion 569a when the main substrate 31 is sealed again to the case cover 202 after the cylindrical portion 569a is separated. is there. The storage place for the spare one-way screw is not limited to the inside of the bulging portion 208.

  When this embodiment and the embodiment H are used together, the component mounting surface of the main board 31 can be visually recognized through the transparent case cover 202. Therefore, the adherend parts 566a to 566d and the connecting part 570 are visible through the transparent case cover 202. Therefore, when the connection part 570 is cut | disconnected illegally, that can be confirmed easily. Even when the embodiment H is not used together, the component mounting surface of the main board 31 faces the case cover 202 and is stored in the board storage case 200, and the case main body 201 side is installed in the gaming machine main body. When configured to do so, the fixed portions 566a to 566d and the connecting portion 570 are visible through the transparent case cover 202. This is because the fixed portions 566a to 566d and the connecting portion 570 are installed on the component mounting surface side of the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the cover 560d is formed to cover the upper surface and four side surfaces of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped game control microcomputer 560. However, at least a part of the game control microcomputer 560 is formed. You may form so that it may cover. For example, the cover 560d is formed so as to cover only the terminals of the game control microcomputer 560. Even in such a configuration, the cover 560d can be expected to prevent the wiring for transmitting the illegal signal from being connected to the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, for example, the cover 560d may be formed so as not to cover the terminals of the game control microcomputer 560. In that case, with the cover 560d attached, the gaming control microcomputer 560 can be inspected by connecting the terminal of the measuring instrument to the terminal of the gaming control microcomputer 560 with a cable. Further, when a wiring for transmitting an illegal signal is connected to the game control microcomputer 560, it can be easily found.

  The configuration of the substrate storage case 200 is the same as the configuration in each of the above embodiments (see FIG. 101 and the like). Therefore, when removing the game control microcomputer 560 from the socket 560c, first, it is necessary to release the sealing of the board storage case 200. Then, after the sealing of the substrate storage case 200 is released, it is necessary to release the sealing of the cover 560d. Therefore, it takes time to exchange the authorized game control microcomputer 560 with a microcomputer incorporating a ROM in which an unauthorized game control program is stored. It can be effectively suppressed. In addition, since traces of destruction or cutting remain in two places (the substrate storage case 200 and the cover 560d), it is easier to find fraud based on the trace of destruction or cutting.

  Further, after the one-way screw 568 is completely screwed in, an adhesive is injected into the fixed portion 566a from above, or a cap is fitted into the upper surface opening of the fixed portion 566a to make it difficult to remove the one-way screw 568. May be. Moreover, you may make it harden | cure by irradiating an ultraviolet-ray using an ultraviolet curable resin as an adhesive agent. Furthermore, the structure of the cap may be the same as the structure of the cap 244 shown in FIG. That is, when the cap is provided with a connecting cover portion, the connecting cover portion is provided with two extending portions, and the cap is put on the fixed portions 566a to 566d (in this example, the fixed portion 566a), The extending portion may sandwich the connecting portion 570 so that the thickness of the connecting portion 570 is equivalently increased.

  FIG. 225 is a top view, a front view, and a partial cross-sectional view showing the structure of the one-way screw 280 used in the upper embodiments. As shown in FIG. 225, the one-way screw 280 includes a screw portion 283 having a male screw portion formed on the outer periphery and a head portion 284 provided at the upper end of the screw portion 283. Two contact surfaces 282a are provided. Further, an inclined portion 284b is provided from each contact surface 282a toward the other contact surface 282a, and a concave portion 284c is provided in the central portion. When the one-way screw 280 is screwed, a minus type screw driver having a protrusion that fits into the recess 284c at the center of the tip is used. When the screw driver is rotated clockwise with the protrusion of the screw driver fitted in the recess 284c, the tip of the screw driver rotates the one-way screw 280 clockwise while pushing the contact surface 282a. Screwed into screw holes 211a to 211d (see FIG. 98) formed in the fixed piece 212a.

  The one-way screw 280 cannot be removed with a minus screw driver. When the screw driver is brought into contact with the head 284 of the one-way screw 280 and rotated counterclockwise, the tip of the screw driver moves away from the contact surface 282a, so that the one-way screw 280 is rotated. Can not.

  Moreover, the recessed part 284c has a shape which spreads upwards from the lowest part. The wall portion between the uppermost portion (A in FIG. 225) of the recess 284c and the inclined portion 284b is also wider as it approaches the inclined portion 284b. Moreover, the distance between the lowermost part of the recessed part 284c and the lower end 288 of the contact surface 282a is very small. That is, the depth of the recess 284c from the lower end 288 of the contact surface 282a is extremely shallow. Therefore, even if it is attempted to remove the one-way screw 280 using a minus type screw driver having a protrusion that fits into the recess 284c at the center of the tip, the one-way screw 280 cannot be removed. The protrusion of the screw driver can fit into the recess 284c, but since the depth of the recess 284c is shallow, the rotational force of the screw driver is not applied to the entire one-way screw 280, and the one-way screw 280 can be rotated. It is not possible.

  Further, in the threaded portion 283 having a male threaded portion formed on the outer periphery, a microcapsule 283a made of a synthetic resin is attached between each screw thread. An adhesive 283b is sealed in the microcapsule 283a. When the screw part 283 of the one-way screw 280 enters the screw holes 211a to 211d in the screw part 283, the microcapsule 283a is broken, and the sealed adhesive 283b is discharged from the microcapsule 283a. And since each screw thread in the screw part 283 and the inner periphery of the screw holes 211a-211d are adhere | attached, the one-way screw 280 is fixed more firmly.

  The spare one-way screw 281 is configured similarly to the one-way screw 280.

Embodiment J. FIG.
Next, another structure that makes it difficult to open the substrate storage case 200 by covering the substrate storage case 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229. 226 shows a cover member (covering member) 950A that covers the board-side connectors 238a, 238b, and 238c and a cover member (covering member) 950B that covers at least the fixed part 255a2 of the first fixed part 255 in the substrate storage case 200. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing together with a substrate storage case 200. FIG. 227 is a perspective view and a cross-sectional view showing a state where the cover member is attached to the substrate storage case. FIG. 228 is an enlarged perspective view showing a fixed portion including a first fixed portion and a second fixed portion. FIG. 229 is a sectional view showing a section of the cover member and the substrate storage case. The structure of the substrate storage case 200 is the same as the structure shown in FIGS. 98 to 104 and the like also show the connector restricting member 500, but the connector restricting member 500 is not used in the structure shown in FIGS. 226 to 229. However, the connector restricting member 500 may be used in combination.

  The structures of the cover members 950A, 950B, etc. are the same as in the case of Embodiment B shown in FIGS. 211 to 213. However, unlike the case of the embodiment B, the shape of the adherend portion 255a2 is different from the shapes of the adherent portions 255b, 255c, and 255d used for the second and subsequent attachments. In the examples shown in FIGS. 226 and 227, the heights are different. Therefore, the shape of the cover member 950B is different from the shape of the cover member 950B shown in FIGS. 211 and 212. Specifically, the height of the portion covering the adherend portion 255a2 is high.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 228, in this embodiment, the screw to be screwed first via the fixed portion 255a2 used for fixing is not the one-way screw 280 in each of the above embodiments but a special screw. 280a. That is, the fixing method used for the first fixing is different from the fixing method used for the second and subsequent fixings. Further, the special screw 280a is sealed in advance in the internal space 269 of the fixed portion 255a2.

  As shown in FIG. 228, the special screw 280a has a screw portion 283 (coupling portion) extending from the head portion 285 to one side, and a head portion 285 formed integrally with the screw portion 283. It has an upper member (operation part operated by a tool) 284 having an engaging part (for example, a cross shape) into which the tip of a tool such as a screwdriver is fitted. The head 285 and the upper member 284 are coupled via a connecting portion 287, but the connecting portion 287 is formed to have a smaller diameter than the diameter of the head 285 and the upper member 284. The connecting portion 287 is formed to be cut when a torsional load applied to the upper member 284 exceeds a predetermined value.

  Further, a constricted portion 286 is provided in the middle of the extending direction of the screw portion 283. In the example shown in FIG. 228, the screw portion 283 is threaded below the constricted portion 286, and is not threaded above the constricted portion 286.

  For example, when fixing the fixing portion with the special screw 280a, the screw driver is inserted through the opening 245a provided in the center portion of the cap 244 after the cap 244 is attached to the fixed portion 255a2 in which the special screw 280a is enclosed. When the upper member 284 is rotated with a tool such as a screw driver, the screw portion 283 is inserted into the screw hole 211a. After the tip of the screw part 283 reaches the deepest part of the screw hole 211a, when a tool such as a screwdriver is further rotated and a torsional load exceeding a predetermined value is applied to the upper member 284, the head 285 and the upper member 284 are separated. The connecting portion 287 is cut.

  The special screw 280a may be made of metal, but may be made of synthetic resin so that the head 285 and the upper member 284 can be easily separated.

  Therefore, in this state, the fixing portion is fixed by the special screw 280a, and the upper member 284 separated from the special screw 280a remains in the internal space of the fixed portion 255a2. Since the upper surface of the adherend portion 255a2 is covered with the cap 244, as shown in FIG. 229, the upper member 284 is confined in the internal space of the adherend portion 255a2.

  Then, even if a tool is inserted through the opening 245 a provided in the cap 244 in order to remove the fixing that fixes the fixing portion, the tool cannot reach the head 285. That is, it is difficult to release the sticking even if the sticking by the special screw 280a is illegally released.

  The special screw 280a is used only when it is used for the first fixation. A screw to be screwed through the fixed portions 255b to 255d in the second and subsequent fixing is a spare one-way screw 281. Further, the fixed portion 255a may be configured such that the spare one-way screw 281 cannot be inserted. For example, the diameter of the special screw 280a is made smaller than the diameter of the spare one-way screw 281 and the diameter of the hole provided in the bottom of the fixed portion 255a is formed so as not to pass through the spare one-way screw 281.

  In addition, when the joining with the special screw is released with a special tool or the like (the screw is removed), the case cover 202 can be opened, and an illegal act on the substrate becomes possible. And in order to conceal the cheating, specifically, to avoid leaving traces of opening the case cover, the cheating was obtained from a used machine of the gaming machine after cheating on the board Even when the joining portion is joined with the spare one-way screw 281, an illegal act can be easily found because the special screw 280 a is not attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 229, a metal plate 271 having a hole 272 provided at a position corresponding to the screw hole 211a is embedded in the fixing piece 212a formed on the side wall 203 side of the case body 201. It is. The diameter of the hole is slightly smaller than the diameter of the screw portion 283 in the special screw 280a (specifically, the diameter of the portion directly above and below the constricted portion 286: see FIG. 228), the lower end portion of the constricted portion 286, The diameter of the constricted portion 286 formed in the middle of the portion 283 is substantially the same.

  Inside the fixed piece 212a, the plate 271 is installed at a position where the hole in the plate 271 fits into the constricted portion 286 when the tip of the special screw 280a reaches the bottom of the screw hole 211a. At this time, the lower surface of the head 285 is in contact with the bottom surface 259a of the fixed portion 255a. Accordingly, when the special screw 280a is screwed, the constricted portion 286 is fitted into the hole portion 272a. Then, it becomes more difficult to remove the special screw 280a illegally by some means.

  Further, even if the color of the special screw 280a used for setting the sealed state first is different from the color of the spare one-way screw 281 used for setting the sealed state after the second time. Good. In such a case, when the spare one-way screw 281 used for the second and subsequent fixing (sealing) attached as a spare to the storage case attached to the used game machine is taken out and used. This can be easily recognized and it is difficult to cheat.

Embodiment K.
Next, a structure that covers the substrate storage case 200 with a cover member and makes it more difficult to open the substrate storage case 200 by fixing the cover member will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 and 231. FIG. 230 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 231 is a perspective view showing how the substrate storage case 200 and the cover member 944 are attached. The structure of the substrate storage case 200 is the same as the structure shown in FIGS. 98 to 104 and the like also show the connector restricting member 500, but the connector restricting member 500 is not used in the structure shown in FIGS. 230 and 231. However, the connector restricting member 500 may be used in combination.

  As shown in FIG. 230, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an effect control unit 80A including an effect control board 80 on which an effect control microcomputer 110 for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer Various boards such as a game control board (main board) 31 on which etc. are mounted and a payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control and the like are mounted. The game control board 31 is stored in the board storage case 200. The payout control board 37 is stored in a payout control board storage case. Furthermore, a power supply substrate 910 and a touch sensor substrate 91A are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The power supply substrate 910 and the touch sensor substrate 91A are also accommodated in the case.

  The mechanism for fixing the case cover 202 to the case main body 201 so as not to be opened is the same as in the case of the embodiment J (see FIGS. 226 to 229). That is, the second fixed portion 212 and the first fixed portion 255 are fixed (caulked) via the special screw 280a.

  As shown in FIG. 231, on the back side of the game board 6, a first back cover 946A and a second back cover 946B provided for collecting winning balls and forming a mounting portion of the board are game boards. 6, the substrate storage case 200 is attached to the attachment plate 221, and then the attachment plate 221 is attached to the second back cover 946 </ b> B.

  An attachment base 223A is provided on one of the four sides of the attachment plate 221, and engagement portions 223B and 223C having cylindrical protrusions 223b and 223c are provided on the upper and lower sides of the attachment base 223A. On the mounting plate 221, a locking portion 224 having receiving portions 224b and 224c having holes into which the cylindrical protrusions 223b and 223c are inserted is attached at positions corresponding to the engaging portions 223B and 223C. With the cylindrical protrusions 223b and 223c inserted into the holes in the receiving portions 224b and 224c, the mounting plate 221 to which the substrate storage case 200 is attached can rotate about the portion of the locking portion 224 as a fulcrum. .

  However, in this embodiment, after the cylindrical protrusions 223b and 223c in the mounting plate 221 to which the substrate storage case 200 is mounted are inserted into the holes in the receiving portions 224b and 224c, the first fixed portion 255 is fixed. A cover member 944 that covers the portions 255a2 and 255b to 255d is fixed to the second back cover 946B. In this state, the mounting plate 221 cannot be rotated.

  As shown in FIG. 231, the cover member 944 has a shape in which one plate is bent so as to form an angle of approximately 90 °. One surface of the cover member 944 is a flat surface portion 944A, and the other surface is a side surface portion 944B. A fixed portion 955 is provided on the side surface portion 944B. The shape of the to-be-adhered part 955 is the same as the shape of the to-be-adhered parts 255b-255d in the 1st adhering part 255, for example. FIG. 231 also shows an enlarged view around the cover member 944.

  The second back cover 946B is provided with a cylindrical portion 942a. The cylindrical portion 942a is provided at a position corresponding to the fixed portion 955. The mounting method of the one-way screw 943 is the same as the mounting method of the one-way screw 280 in the substrate storage case 200. That is, an insertion hole into which the one-way screw 943 can be inserted is formed in the cylindrical portion 942a. Further, a screw hole is provided inside the cylindrical portion 942a. Then, the one-way screw 943 is inserted from the upper surface opening of the fixed portion 955, and the one-way screw is screwed clockwise with a tool such as a screw driver in a state where the tip of the screw portion is inserted into the fixed portion 955, and the cylindrical portion 942a And the fixed portion 955 are fixed (caulked) via a one-way screw 943. In the state where the one-way screw 943 is screwed, the cover member 944 is fixed to the second back cover 946B by fixing the cylindrical portion 942a and the fixed portion 955.

  After the one-way screw 943 is completely screwed in, the adhesive 947 is injected into the fixed portion 955 from above. Then, the cap 945 is fitted into the upper surface opening of the fixed portion 955 to make it difficult to remove the one-way screw 943. Note that an ultraviolet curable resin may be used as the adhesive 947 and cured by irradiation with ultraviolet rays.

  In this state, the flat surface portion 944 </ b> A of the cover member 944 covers the first fixing portion 255 and the connecting portion 257 of the substrate storage case 200. That is, the first fixing portion 255 and the connecting portion 257 are covered, and the first fixing portion 255 and the connecting portion 257 are made inaccessible. Therefore, when the case cover 202 in the substrate storage case 200 is opened to expose the main substrate 31, first, it is necessary to remove the fixation between the cover member 944 and the second back cover 946B. Since the one-way screw 943 cannot be removed with a tool such as a screw driver, it is necessary to cut the connecting portion 948 with a tool such as a nipper. The connecting portion 948 (a part of the cover member 944) is a portion that connects the fixed portion 955 and the side surface portion 944B of the cover member 944.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the first fixing portion 255 in the substrate storage case 200 is covered with the cover member 944, and the cover member 944 is fixed to the second back cover 946B.

  When contacting the main substrate 31 stored in the substrate storage case 200, it is necessary to release the sealing of the cover member 944 by cutting or breaking, and then release the sealing of the substrate storage case 200. There is. When the sealing of the cover member 944 (fixed by the one-way screw 943) is released, traces of destruction or cutting remain at the connecting portion 948 or the like. Further, when the sealing of the substrate storage case 200 is released, traces of destruction or cutting remain in the connecting portion 257 (see FIG. 99 and the like) of the substrate storage case 200. Therefore, even if it is replaced with a main board having a ROM in which an illegal game control program is stored, traces of destruction or cutting remain in two places (the board storage case 200 and the cover member 944). Based on this, fraud can be detected and dealt with early. Therefore, it can be avoided that the game is played in that state and the game store suffers a disadvantage. Further, when contacting the main board 31 stored in the board storage case 200, it is necessary to release the sealing at two places. Therefore, the main board 31 (in particular, the ROM mounted on the main board 31 is installed). It takes time to contact the built-in game control microcomputer 560). This also effectively prevents fraud.

  As shown in FIG. 231, the cap 945 is provided with a connecting cover portion 945a and a locking claw 945d. The locking claw 945d is inserted into a groove portion 949 provided inside the fixed portion 955 to prevent the cap 945 from being pulled out.

  The connecting cover portion 945a is provided with two extending portions 945b and 945c, and the extending portions 945b and 945c sandwich the connecting portion 948 when the cap 945 is put on the fixed portion 955. In order to increase the thickness of the connecting portion 948 equivalently. The extending portions 945b and 945c in the connecting cover portion 945a increase the thickness of the connecting portion 948 equivalently, thereby making it difficult to cut the connecting portion 948 with a tool such as a nipper. That is, the time until the main substrate 31 can be contacted can be further increased.

  Even when the connecting cover portion 945a is not provided, the effect of making it impossible to easily contact the first fixing portion 255 in the substrate storage case 200 or when the sealing of the substrate storage case 200 is released. The effect of leaving traces of destruction or cutting at two locations is maintained.

  In this embodiment, the cover member 944 is fixed to the second back cover 946B. However, the cover member 944 is not limited to the second back cover 946B. You may make it adhere to the member attached to the game board 6 or a mechanism board, or the game board 6 or the mechanism board itself. That is, the cover member 944 only needs to be fixed to the gaming machine main body.

  The covering means (cover member 944) is not limited to covering the substrate sealing means (fixed parts 255a2, 255b to 255d, etc.), and covers at least the cutting part (connecting part 257) of the storage case. I just need it. Moreover, the structure which seals the board | substrate storage case 200 is a structure shown by FIGS. 226-229, for example.

  FIGS. 232 and 233 are a perspective view showing a modification of the embodiment A (see FIG. 98) and a cross-sectional view showing a portion of the first fixed portion 255.

  Unlike the case of the embodiment A, the special screw 280a is used when used for the first fixing. The upper member 284 separated from the special screw 280a is taken out from the internal space of the adherend portion 255a, and then the cap 244 is put on the upper surface of the adherend portion 255a.

  As shown in FIG. 233, the cap 244 used for the first sealing is a colored cap, and the spare cap 265 connected to the cap suspension support 245 is used for the initial sealing. The cap 244 is used in a different color (may be transparent). Therefore, even if a spare cap 265 obtained from a used machine of the gaming machine is attached to the adherend portion 255a after some improper act has been done, this is immediately recognized.

  Instead of using the colored cap 244, or using the colored cap 244, a colored adhesive may be used as the adhesive Z. When a colored adhesive is injected into the screw insertion portion 256 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, when there is some access to the one-way screw 280, a trace of the colored adhesive Z being scraped off is colored. Therefore, it becomes easy to find a trace of fraud even from the outside of the transparent screw insertion portion 256.

  234 and 235 are a perspective view showing another modification of the embodiment A (see FIG. 98) and a cross-sectional view showing a portion of the first adherend portion 255. FIG.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, the shape of the fixed portion 255a2 used for the initial fixation is different from the fixed portion 255a in the embodiment A. In the example shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, the heights are different. Further, as shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, in this embodiment, the screw to be screwed first through the fixed portion 255a2 used for fixing is not the one-way screw 280 in each of the above embodiments. The special screw 280a (see FIG. 228). That is, the fixing method used for the first fixing is different from the fixing method used for the second and subsequent fixings.

  The fixing method used for the first fixing is the same as in the case of the embodiment J shown in FIG. Accordingly, the fixing portion is fixed by the special screw 280a, and the upper member 284 separated from the special screw 280a remains in the internal space of the fixed portion 255a2. Since the cap 244 is covered on the upper surface of the adherend portion 255a2, the upper member 284 is confined in the internal space of the adherend portion 255a2, as shown in FIG.

  Then, even if a tool is inserted through the opening 245 a provided in the cap 244 in order to remove the fixing that fixes the fixing portion, the tool cannot reach the head 285. That is, it is difficult to release the sticking even if the sticking by the special screw 280a is illegally released.

  236 and 237 are a perspective view showing still another modified example of the embodiment A (see FIG. 98) and a cross-sectional view showing a portion of the first fixed portion 255. FIG.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the shape of the fixed portion 255a3 used for the first fixing is different from the fixed portion 255a in the embodiment A. In the example shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the width and depth are different. Therefore, the shape of the fixed portion 255a3 used for fixing first is different from the shapes of the fixed portions 255b, 255c, 255d used for the second and subsequent fixing (the shapes of the fixed portions 255b, 255c, 255d). Is the same as the shape of the fixed portion 255a in the embodiment A).

  Therefore, the shape of the cap 244 </ b> A covering the adherend portion 255 a 3 is different from the shape of the spare cap 265 in the cap suspension support 245. Therefore, in order not to leave a trace of opening the case cover, in order to conceal the illegal act by illegally releasing the joining with the one-way screw 280 with a special tool or the like dedicated to removing the one-way screw, Even if the joint portion is joined with the spare one-way screw 281 obtained from the second-hand machine of the gaming machine after the illegal act is performed, the fixed portion 255a3 is further secured with the spare cap 265 obtained from the second-hand machine of the gaming machine. It is difficult to cover the top surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult to conceal that fraud has been performed.

  238 and 239 are a perspective view showing another modification of the embodiment A (see FIG. 98) and a cross-sectional view showing a portion of the first adherent portion 255. FIG.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 238 and 239, a pin 280b is used instead of the special screw 280a shown in FIGS. 234 and 235. In the pin 280b, as in the special screw 280a, the extension extending from the head 285 is not threaded. Further, similarly to the special screw 280a, an upper member 284 having an engaging portion (for example, a cross shape) into which a tip of a tool such as a screwdriver fits is provided on the upper portion of the head 285. The head 285 and the upper member 284 are coupled, but the connecting portion 287 is formed to have a smaller diameter than the diameters of the head 285 and the upper member 284. The connecting portion 287 is formed to be cut when a torsional load applied to the upper member 284 exceeds a predetermined value. Further, a constricted portion 286 is provided in the middle of the extended portion extending from the head portion 285.

  Moreover, in the 2nd to-be-adhered part 212, it replaces with the screw hole 211a and the hole part 211 which is not cut is provided.

  Initially, the fixed portion 255a2 and the second fixed portion 212 in the first fixed portion 255 are fixed by the pin 280b. In that case, the pin 280b is inserted into the hole 211 using a pressing tool or the like. When the insertion is completed, the upper member 284 is rotated with a tool such as a screwdriver, so that a torsional load exceeding a predetermined value is applied to the upper member 284, and the connecting portion 287 between the head 285 and the upper member 284 is cut. To do. The upper member 284 separated from the pin 288 remains in the internal space of the fixed portion 255a2. Since the upper surface of the adherend portion 255a2 is covered with the cap 244, the upper member 284 is confined in the internal space of the adherend portion 255a.

  Also in this example, the first fixing method used for fixing is different from the second fixing method. For example, in the fixing method used for the second time and thereafter, the spare one-way screw 281 is used. Then, an unauthorized person removes the pin 280b by some means without cutting the connecting portion 257 in the fixed portion 255a2, and the case body 201 and the case cover 202 can be separated from each other and mounted on the board. It is difficult to fix the to-be-fixed part 255a and the second to-be-fixed part 212 using a member having the same structure as the pin 280b in order to conceal the cheating action after performing the cheating action. This is because it is difficult to obtain a member having the same structure as the pin 280b. It is relatively easy to obtain the spare one-way screw 281 from another game machine (for example, a used product). However, when trying to obtain the pin 280b from another gaming machine, it is necessary to obtain the pin 280b without destroying it, but since the pin 280b is first used for fixing in other gaming machines, It is difficult to obtain the pin 280b without destroying it. That is, it is difficult to fix through the fixed portion 255a2 after performing the illegal act, and as a result, it is possible to easily find out that the illegal act has been performed.

Embodiment L.
240 and 241 show another structure that makes it difficult to open the substrate storage case 200 by covering the first fixed portion 255 and the second fixed portion 212 of the substrate storage case 200 with a cover member. It is a perspective view. 240 shows a state before the first fixed portion 255 and the second fixed portion 212 are covered with the cover member, and FIG. 241 shows the first fixed portion 255 and the second fixed portion 212 being covered. The state after being covered with the member is shown.

  In this embodiment, the first fixed portion 255 and the second fixed portion 212 (hereinafter, referred to as a fixed portion) are fixed, and the fixed portion is further covered with a cover member. The cover member includes an upper member 1001 and a lower member 1021. The upper member 1001 is provided with four support members 1002a to 1002d, each of which has a structure in which substantially cylindrical screw insertion portions 1003a to 1003d are integrally formed. The screw insertion portions 1003a to 1003d are connected to adjacent screw insertion portions by connection portions 1005a, 1005b, and 1005c. The screw insertion portions 1003a to 1003d have a bottom surface, and a hole through which the screw 1030 can pass is provided on the bottom surface. Further, connecting portions 1004a, 1004b, and 1004c for connecting adjacent ones of the four support members 1002a to 1002d are provided. In addition, engaging portions 1006a to 1006d that engage with the back surface of the table portion 1022 are provided outside the screw insertion portions 1003a to 1003d. Further, a plate-like auxiliary screw cover 1010 is provided on one side of the upper member 1001. The screw 1030 is, for example, a screw similar to the one-way screw 280 or a screw similar to the special screw 280a.

  The lower member 1021 is provided with a hole 1026 into which the cylindrical portion 212b in the second adherend portion 212 can be inserted. Further, the horizontally long table portion 1022 is provided with screw holes 1024a to 1024d into which screws 1030 are inserted through screw insertion portions 1003a to 1003d. Screws are cut into the screw holes 1024a to 1024d. Furthermore, a spare screw storage portion 1023 for storing three spare screws 1031 is provided on one side of the table portion 1022. The spare screw 1031 is, for example, the same screw as the one-way screw 280.

  The method of fixing the fixed portion by the first fixed portion 255 and the second fixed portion 212 is the same as in the above embodiments. Thereafter, the upper member 1001 is covered from above the fixing portion, and the lower member 1021 is installed from below the fixing portion.

  The upper member 1001 and the lower member 1021 are aligned (for example, the position of the hole on the bottom surface of the screw insertion portion 1003a and the position of the screw hole 1024a are aligned), and the engaging portions 1006a to 1006d in the upper member 1001 are placed on the table portion 1022. Engage with the back of the. Then, the upper member 1001 and the lower member 1021 are fixed by inserting the screw 1030 into the screw insertion portion 1003a and screwing the screw 1030 into the screw hole 1024a with a tool such as a screw driver.

  In the state where the upper member 1001 and the lower member 1021 are fixed (see FIG. 241), when releasing the fixing between the upper member 1001 and the lower member 1021, the connecting portion 1004a is cut and the connecting portion 1005a is cut. There is a need to. In addition, after they are normally cut, the spare screw 1031 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 1003b, and the screw 1030 is screwed into the screw hole 1024b with a tool such as a screw driver, whereby the upper member 1001 and the lower member 1021 are Can be fixed again.

  When a one-way screw is used as the screw 1030, the one-way screw cannot be removed by turning the one-way screw counterclockwise when the upper member 1001 and the lower member 1021 are released and the cover member is to be released. Therefore, it is necessary to destroy a part of the cover member or to cut the connecting portion 1004a and the connecting portion 1005a with a tool such as a nipper.

  Regardless of the method of destruction or cutting, if the cover member is released after the fixed state is released, a trace of destruction or cutting remains. As a result, even when the cover member is illegally opened, it is possible to discover that an illegal act has been performed early.

  Furthermore, when contacting the main substrate 31 or the like stored in the substrate storage case 200, the one-way screw 280 cannot be removed by turning it counterclockwise. It is necessary to break or to cut the connecting portion 257 with a tool such as a nipper, and to disconnect the screw insertion portion 256 of the fixed portion 255a fixed to the fixing piece 212a via the one-way screw 280 from the case cover 202. .

  That is, when contacting the main substrate 31 or the like, it is necessary to release the fixing of the cover member by cutting or breaking, and to release the sealing of the substrate storage case 200. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform an illegal act on a substrate or the like in the substrate storage case 200, and it is possible to detect and deal with an illegal act early. Therefore, it can be avoided that the game is played in that state and the game store suffers a disadvantage.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the structure in which measures for effectively preventing fraudulent acts have been described for the main board 31 on which the game control microcomputer 560 is mounted. The mounted payout control board 37 may have the same structure as that of each of the above embodiments. Furthermore, the production control board 80 on which production control means (production control microcomputer 110) for performing production control is mounted may adopt the same structure as that of each of the above embodiments.

  Further, the gaming machine may be configured by arbitrarily combining the embodiments A to L. As an example, Embodiment J, Embodiment I, or Embodiment J may be combined with each of Embodiments B to F and Embodiment K. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the control board (main board 31 or payout control board 37) in the pachinko gaming machine is taken as an example, but the embodiments E to L are applied to the control board in the slot machine. You can also. In the case of a pachinko machine, a storage case is attached to the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, but in the case of a slot machine, electrical components such as a board are often placed inside a box-type housing. The structure of each of the above embodiments is applied to the inner part of the box-shaped housing.

  In each of the above embodiments, the adhesive Z (colorless or colored) is injected into the screw insertion portion 256 of the first fixed portion 255, and then the cap 244 is fixed to the fixed portion 255a (or fixed portion 255a2). Although the embodiment in which the one-way screw 280 and the special screw 280a are made difficult to be removed by being fitted into the upper surface opening of ˜255d is illustrated, the adhesive Z may or may not be used in any of the embodiments.

  Although the form which makes the color of the cap 244 used in the first fixing (sealing) different from the color of the cap 265 used in the second and subsequent fixing (sealing) is exemplified, in any embodiment, The cap 244 used in the first fixing (sealing) and the cap 265 used in the second and subsequent fixing (sealing) may have different patterns and shapes. Further, any one of the cap 244 used in the first fixing (sealing) and the cap 265 used in the second and subsequent fixing (sealing) is made into a shape having a protrusion or a shape having a recess. Or you may.

  Further, in addition to the above embodiments, it is desirable to take the following measures.

  A structure in which a member that covers a portion to be broken (cut) when the control substrate case sealed by the substrate sealing means is opened is further sealed. Thereby, when it tries to open the case of a control board illegally, work time will be taken and it will lead to suppression of an illegal act. Further, the covering member may cover the entire board sealing member, and may further cover the entire case of the control board, and further the entire back surface of the game board and the game frame.

  The sealing means is not limited to the case of the case of the control board with a one-way screw, and is not limited to the one that screws the mounting portion provided on the cover body, the one that locks the mounting portion with a key, the engagement pin, It may be riveted or welded. In addition, the sealing means is a concept that includes not only fixed parts such as screws, rivets, and locking claws, but also includes a fixed part and a plurality of fixed parts for mounting the fixed part.

  It is desirable not to provide a space around the control board that may hide an unauthorized board (such as an impersonation board). Specifically, it is possible to make a large rib in a place that seems to be a space, to provide a window part so that it can be easily seen even when the substrate is hidden, or to configure the peripheral part with a transparent member desirable.

  In addition, the game frame locking device for the outer frame generally has two hook structures on the upper and lower sides, but it is desirable to cover the hook to prevent the frame from being opened from the outside. Furthermore, the operation part of the locking device may be covered. It is also desirable that when one hook is hooked so that the two hooks operate independently of each other, the other does not open. As a result, the game frame is illegally opened, the back surface of the gaming machine is exposed, and the control board case is prevented from being exchanged. Further, it may be one that detects the release of the game frame and notifies the outside, and further outputs that fact to the hall computer as an external information signal.

  It may be one that informs that the game ball has been illegally won in the variable winning opening, and further outputs that fact to the hall computer as an external information signal. Furthermore, payouts may not be allowed for illegal winnings. Further, the variable winning opening may be structured so as not to be opened by external force.

It is desirable to make it possible to confirm the counterfeit chip by making the ID number of the one-chip microcomputer and other printed numbers visible from the outside of the box.
It is desirable to use an oscillation sensor to detect an action that improperly impacts a gaming machine to aim for a big hit (V prize), and outputs it to the outside.

  It is desirable to use an magnet sensor to detect an act of aiming for a big hit (V winning) by improperly bringing a magnet close to a gaming machine, and reporting and outputting the result is desirable.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and is particularly preferably applied to a gaming machine provided with a plurality of variable display means.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the relationship between the 1st counter circuit and 2nd counter circuit, and the game control microcomputer. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the creation method of random (MR1) and random (MR2-1), and the creation method of MR3 and MR4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the development chance eyes, and the chances of surprise. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a special symbol display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number value which the microcomputer for production control counts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a left-right output determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a promotion effect execution determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notice pattern classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notice pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notice pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notice pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an effect control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an effect control pattern table. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a production control data holding area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transmission timing of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transmission timing of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in the microcomputer for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process for a display. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a random number generation process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows processing during a big hit game. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine of 2nd Embodiment from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board | substrate in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between a round number and a threshold value. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormal winning notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the other method for preventing the fraud with respect to the random number value compared with a jackpot determination value. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is the rear view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the back. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example in a game control board (main board | substrate). It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example such as an effect control board. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows a board | substrate storage case. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows a board | substrate storage case. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the assembly | attachment state of a board | substrate storage case and a main board | substrate. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment state of the main board | substrate with respect to a case cover. It is a perspective view which shows the connection condition of the wiring side connector. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of a connector control member. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the state which closed the case main body and the case cover. It is a perspective view which shows the sealing state of a board | substrate storage case. It is sectional drawing which shows the AA cross section of the board | substrate storage case shown in FIG. It is a partially broken side view which shows a board | substrate storage case. (A) is sectional drawing which shows the BB cross section of the board | substrate storage case shown in FIG. 107, (b) is a figure which shows CC cross section. It is a perspective view which shows the other aspect of a connector control member and a case cover. FIG. 110 is a plan view showing a board storage case to which the connector restricting member shown in FIG. 109 is attached. It is sectional drawing which shows the DD cross section of the connector control member shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the other aspect of a connector control member and a case cover. FIG. 113 is an enlarged longitudinal sectional view showing a main part of the board storage case to which the connector restricting member shown in FIG. 112 is attached. It is a block diagram which shows the example of the board | substrate structure in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the example of the board | substrate structure in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the example of the board | substrate structure in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state before a cover member is attached after a harness side connector is inserted. It is a perspective view which shows the state after a cover member was attached. It is a perspective view which shows the state which destroys a cover member in order to pull out a harness side connector. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the harness side connector was extracted after the cover member was destroyed. (A) is the bottom view which looked at the cover member of the 1st structure from the bottom side, (b) is the top view which shows the upper surface of a cover member, (c) is the front view which shows the front of a cover member, (d) is The back view which looked at the cover member from the back side, (e) is a side view which shows the side of a cover member. It is a perspective view which shows the state before a cover member is attached after a harness side connector is inserted. It is a perspective view which shows the state which destroys a cover member in order to pull out a harness side connector. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the harness side connector was extracted after the cover member was destroyed. It is a perspective view which shows a mode that an engagement pin fixing | fixed part is removed. (A) is the bottom view which looked at the cover member of the 2nd structure from the bottom, (b) is the top view which shows the upper surface of a cover member, (c) is the front view which shows the front of a cover member, (d) is a cover The back view which looked at the member from the back surface, (e) is a side view which shows the side surface of a cover member. It is a perspective view which shows the state before a cover member is attached after a harness side connector is inserted. It is a perspective view which shows the state in which the process for controlling removal of a cover member is performed. It is a perspective view which shows the state after the process for controlling removal of a cover member was performed. It is a perspective view which shows the state before a cover member is attached after a harness side connector is inserted. It is a perspective view which shows the state in which the process for controlling removal of a cover member is performed. It is a perspective view which shows the state after the process for controlling removal of a cover member was performed. It is a perspective view which shows the state which destroys a cover member in order to pull out a harness side connector. It is a block diagram which shows the other example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the example of the state by which the impersonation board | substrate was installed in the gaming machine. It is a front view which simplifies and shows a game control board box. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the mounting state of an interruption button. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a block diagram which shows one structural example of a random number generation circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process for determination. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process for initial values. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the value of the counter for producing | generating random 1 (random number for jackpot determination). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the value of the counter for producing | generating random 5 (random number for normal symbol determination). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a gaming state, and explanatory drawing for demonstrating background mode. It is a state transition diagram showing an example of how to change the gaming state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the kind of game state and jackpot when a game state is a high probability and a high base state, and the number of judgment values. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the variation pattern of a special design, a decoration design, and an effect design. FIG. 38E illustrates an effect control command signal line. It is a timing diagram showing the relationship between an 8-bit control signal and an INT signal constituting a control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a gate switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the open pattern of the change time of a normal symbol, and a variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the lighting state of state alert LED and a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a status alert | report LED control process. It is a block diagram which shows the further another example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the payout control signal. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a payout control signal. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of how to output a payout control signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the buffer used by switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows a switch process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows a standby process. It is a flowchart which shows payout number signal transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reception confirmation signal ON waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception confirmation signal OFF waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout operation signal on waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the signal off waiting process during payout operation. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of how to output a payout control signal. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormal winning notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the microcomputer for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a payout motor control process. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication process. It is a flowchart which shows a standby process. It is a flowchart which shows payout REQ signal OFF waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout operation start waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during payout operation. It is a flowchart which shows payout number signal OFF waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball lending control process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout motor stop waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for production control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on an effect display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the situation of the display effect in an effect display apparatus, and the sound effect by a speaker. It is a block diagram which shows the further another example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows a part of main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a block diagram which shows the other example of a board | substrate structure. It is a block diagram which shows the further another example of a board | substrate structure. It is a block diagram which shows the further another example of a board | substrate structure. It is a block diagram which shows the further another example of a board | substrate structure. It is a block diagram which shows the further another example of a board | substrate structure. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure for detecting that the connector was extracted. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure for detecting that the connector was extracted. It is a perspective view which shows a cover member with a board | substrate storage case. It is the perspective view and sectional drawing which show the state with which the cover member was mounted | worn with the board | substrate storage case. It is sectional drawing which shows the cross section of a cover member and a board | substrate storage case. It is a perspective view which shows the other example of a cover member with a board | substrate storage case. It is a perspective view which shows the structural example of the main board | substrate which can suppress execution of cheating. It is a top view which shows the structural example of the gaming machine which can suppress execution of cheating. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine of Embodiment E. FIG. 227 is a cross sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 217. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko gaming machine of embodiment F. It is a perspective view which shows the mode of attachment of the board | substrate storage case and cover member in Embodiment F. FIG. 10 is a partial perspective view showing a part of a substrate storage case in Embodiment G. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the case cover in the board | substrate storage case in Embodiment H with a main board | substrate. It is a perspective view which shows the board | substrate storage case in the condition which slides and closes the case cover in Embodiment H. It is a perspective view which shows the structural example of the main board | substrate in Embodiment I which can suppress execution of cheating. It is the top view, front view, and partial sectional view showing the structure of a one-way screw. It is a perspective view which shows the cover member (covering member) in Embodiment J with a board | substrate storage case. FIG. 20 is a perspective view and a cross-sectional view showing a state where the cover member in Embodiment J is attached to the substrate storage case. FIG. 16 is an enlarged perspective view showing a fixing portion composed of a first fixed portion and a second fixed portion in Embodiment J. 6 is a cross-sectional view showing a cross section of a cover member and a substrate storage case in Embodiment J. FIG. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine of Embodiment K. It is a perspective view which shows the mode of attachment of the board | substrate storage case and cover member in Embodiment K. FIG. FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing a substrate storage case in a modification of Embodiment A. FIG. 38 is a cross sectional view showing a substrate storage case in a modification of Embodiment A. FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing a substrate storage case in a modification of Embodiment A. FIG. 38 is a cross sectional view showing a substrate storage case in a modification of Embodiment A. FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing a substrate storage case in a modification of Embodiment A. FIG. 38 is a cross sectional view showing a substrate storage case in a modification of Embodiment A. FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing a substrate storage case in a modification of Embodiment A. FIG. 38 is a cross sectional view showing a substrate storage case in a modification of Embodiment A. FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing the periphery of a fixing portion in embodiment L. FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing the periphery of a fixing portion in embodiment L.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 1st special symbol display 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 20 Variable winning ball apparatus 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
80 Production control board 110 Production control microcomputer 111 Production control CPU
119 VDP
506 Random number circuit 511 First counter circuit 512 Second counter circuit 513 Pulse oscillator 514 First latch circuit 515 Second latch circuit 516 Counter circuit 560 Microcomputer for game control 105 Mechanism board (back pack)
200 Substrate storage case 201 Case main body 202 Case cover 211a to 211d
212 2nd to-be-adhered part 212a Adhering piece 212b Cylindrical part 228 Cover body 238a-238c Board side connector 244 Cap 244a Connection cover part 244b, 244c Extending part 255 1st to-be-adhered part 255a-255d Adhered part 257 Connection part 265 Cap (Reserve cap)
271 Plate 280 One-way screw 290a-290c Wiring side connector (harness side connector)
500, 520, 550 Connector restriction member 560a, 560c Socket (IC socket)
560b, 560d cover 566a to 566d fixed portion 568 one-way screw 569a to 569d cylindrical portion 601 board side connector 602 harness side connector 611,612 standing plate portion 613, 633, 653, 673 cover member 614, 634 covering portion 615, 616 , 635, 636 Engaging pin fixing part 631, 632 Umbrella part 650, 657 Insul lock engaging part 661 Insul lock 674, 675 Mounting member 670, 671 Screw receiving member 910 Power supply board 942a Cylindrical part 943 One-way screw 944 Cover member 950A, 950B Cover member 955 To-be-adhered portion 960 Cover member 981a to 981d To-be-adhered portion 984 Cover member 985a to 985d Tubular portion 986 One-way screw 987 Cap 987a Connection cover portion 9 7b, 987C extending portion 991a~991d cylindrical portion 992 through hole 996a~996d hole 997 One-way screw 1001 upper member 1021 lower member

Claims (7)

A gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game using a game medium, and transitioning the gaming state to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of the predetermined transition condition after the start condition is satisfied Because
A game control microcomputer for performing a game control process for controlling the progress of the game;
A counter circuit that increments the count value within a predetermined numerical range by counting the pulse signal output from the pulse signal supply circuit and outputs the count value as the first numerical value;
The game control microcomputer is:
Numerical value creating means for creating a second numerical value by updating the numerical value within the predetermined numerical range by software;
Determination numerical value generating means for generating a determination numerical value when the start condition is satisfied;
Specific game state determination means for determining whether to shift to the specific game state by comparing the determination numerical value generated by the determination numerical value generation means with a predetermined determination value;
The determination numerical value generation means adds the first numerical value output from the counter circuit and the second numerical value generated by the numerical value generation means when a determination numerical value generation condition is satisfied, Dividing by the number of numerical values within the predetermined numerical range, the remainder resulting from the division is used as the determination numerical value. A gaming machine that transitions a gaming state to a specific gaming state that is advantageous for a player based on the fact that a predetermined transition condition is established after any of a plurality of starting conditions is established,
A plurality of latch circuits corresponding to each of a plurality of starting conditions;
A plurality of latch signal output means for outputting a latch signal to the corresponding latch circuit based on the establishment of the start condition;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game control microcomputer inputs a count value of a counter circuit via the latch circuit. A variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the establishment of the variable display start condition, and a specific display in which the display result of the identification information in the variable display means is predetermined. When the result is a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player,
A numerical value updating means for determining a variation pattern type for updating a numerical value for determining a variation pattern type for variable display of identification information within a predetermined numerical range for determining a type,
A fluctuation pattern determining numerical value updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern determining numerical value within a predetermined fluctuation pattern determining numerical range;
Fluctuation pattern type determination means for extracting a variation pattern type determination numerical value and determining the variation pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types based on the extracted numerical value in accordance with the determination result by the specific gaming state determination means When,
The variation pattern determination for determining the variation pattern of the identification information from among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determination means based on the extracted numerical value for determining the variation pattern The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: means. The game control microcomputer
First numerical value storage means for storing the first numerical value output from the counter circuit as a stored numerical value;
A numerical comparison for determining whether or not the first numerical value output from the counter circuit and the stored numerical value stored in the first numerical value storing means match when a determination numerical value generation condition is satisfied Means,
An abnormality notification means for performing abnormality notification when it is determined that the numerical value comparison means coincides continuously a predetermined number of times,
The said 1st numerical value preservation | save means preserve | saves the said 1st numerical value output from the said counter circuit as the said preserve | saved numerical value when the said numerical value generation conditions for determination are satisfied. The gaming machine described. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the frequency of the pulse signal output from the pulse signal supply circuit is different from the operating frequency of the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer
Built-in random number circuit that generates random numbers,
Numerical value storage means for storing numerical values;
An addition means for reading a random number value from the random number circuit, determining an addition value based on the read random value, and adding the determined addition value to a numerical value stored in the numerical value storage means;
When the predetermined effect mode determination condition is satisfied, the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage means is read, and the read numerical value is compared with a predetermined determination value, thereby determining the effect mode in the gaming machine. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising: means. A first start port and a second start port through which a game ball as a game medium can be won;
First variable display means for starting the variable display of the first identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the winning of the game ball at the first start opening as the start condition;
A second variable display means for starting the variable display of the second identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the winning of the game ball at the second start opening as the start condition;
A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state when a specific display result is derived and displayed on either the first variable display means or the second variable display means,
The game control microcomputer is common when variable display of the first identification information is executed by the first variable display means and when variable display of the second identification information is executed by the second variable display means. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein execution of variable display is controlled by the processing routine.

Images